JP2020000763A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suitably permit execution of a performance in a game machine capable of reserving and storing a lottery result.SOLUTION: When a predetermined condition pertaining to period extension is satisfied, a performance extension function is operated and a special period pertaining to a reservation fill-up performance is extended, thus increasing reservation to be subjected to the reservation fill-up performance by the amount of extension when the special period pertaining to the reservation fill-up performance is extended by the performance extension function. Hereby, amusement capable of extending a special period pertaining to a reservation fill-up performance can be added by allowing a player to shoot game balls by targeting start winning of a special pattern so as to increase reservation of the special pattern in a configuration in which the reservation fill-up performance can appear when the number of reservation times of the special pattern reaches the upper limit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed. Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-22147 A

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result on hold.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to enable an effect in a gaming machine capable of holding a lottery result to be held suitably.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has been developed in order to solve the above problems.
A display unit capable of displaying symbols,
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A starting port that satisfies a starting condition when a game ball fired by the firing means enters,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbol, and then performs a variable execution unit that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. When,
Among the lottery results, a lottery result in which the execution of the variation display of the symbol by the variation execution means is suspended, a holding storage means that can be stored in a predetermined holding storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
A special effect execution means for executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined first period at a predetermined first probability when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit by the reservation storage unit reaches an upper limit; ,
The special effect execution means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit, and is the same as the end time of the first period or the end time of the first period If a predetermined extension condition that can be satisfied by the game ball fired by the firing means is satisfied earlier within a predetermined second period reaching the end time, the end time of the first period is extended. It is characterized by having period extension means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably execute an effect in a gaming machine capable of holding a lottery result on hold.

Front side perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in an open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view of pachinko machine with front block removed Front view of gaming board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing A time chart for explaining when the suggested effect appears in the decorative pattern change display FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing screen transition of the decorative symbol display device along the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative symbol display device along the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative symbol display device along the time chart of FIG. (A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen on which a player can select whether or not to restore a fluctuating display of decorative symbols performed before the transition to the special game state in the special game state, b) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the decorative symbol change display is restored in the special game state The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. Time chart for explaining the suggestion effect cancellation function FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment serving as an own machine and another pachinko machine communicably connected to the pachinko machine. FIG. 7 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device when the selection operation device is operated during the operable period generated during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. Diagram for explaining an example for facilitating the increase of the number of times the unit game right related to the special symbol is held Front view of a game board in a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment (A) is a front view of a reel device, (b) is a front view of a middle reel. Front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device Schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device when the second sub-symbol precursor notice is given Schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device when the second sub-symbol precursor notice is given Schematic diagram showing transition of display by a reel device when a countdown notice is performed (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device in the game board, and (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main structure of the game board taken along line AA in FIG. 30A is a simplified cross-sectional view of a main configuration including a reel device taken along line BB in FIG. 30A, and FIG. 30B illustrates a school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device. Front view for (A) is an enlarged front view near the upper and lower starting prize devices in the gaming machine of the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine along line CC in FIG. 32 (a), (C) is a top view of FIG. 32 (a) viewed from above, and (d) is a vicinity of the information display unit when the player playing the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment views the lower left direction obliquely. Diagram showing how people look (A) is a front view of the reel device of the ninth embodiment, (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device taken along line DD of FIG. 33 (a), and (c) is a front view of the gaming machine. Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in a vertical direction at a position substantially at the center in the left-right direction, and (d) is a top view of the pressing operation device and the wave lamp. (A) is a front view of the reel device when the display area of each symbol row by three reels is a basic display area, and (b) is a reduced display area of each symbol row by three reels. A front view of the reel device in the case of the display area, (c) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and (d) is a reduced display area of the symbol row. Top view of the reel device schematically showing the state in which Exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the eleventh embodiment, viewed from the front side. Exploded perspective view of the drum base viewed from the front side Perspective view of the light guide plate unit viewed from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit viewed from the front side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit viewed from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit viewed from the rear side (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining a traveling direction of light incident on a lower end surface of the light guide plate, and (b) is a front view of the light guide plate showing an example of light emission. (A) is a front view of the reel device in a case where each symbol row by three reels is in a basic state, and (b) is cut along the rotation axis through the rotation axis in the basic state. Partial sectional view of the left reel, (c) is a partial sectional view of the left reel cut along the rotation axis through the rotation axis in a state where the width of the symbol row of the left reel is narrowed, ( (d) is a front view of the reel device when the width of the left and right symbol rows by the left and right reels is reduced, and (e) is a case where the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving each of the three reels. Front view of reel device Timing chart showing the operation of each configuration when changing the size of the display area of each symbol row (A) is a perspective view of the light guide plate of the fourteenth embodiment as viewed from the rear side, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide plate of the fourteenth embodiment in which a substantially center in the left-right direction is cut in the vertical direction, (c) 4) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate when the drive solenoid is in a protruding state, and FIG. 4D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate when the drive solenoid is in a retracted state. Figure Front view of the screen portion of the light guide plate according to the fourteenth embodiment Front view of two light guide plates and a light guide plate overlapping in the front-back direction (A) is a screen diagram for explaining a display area of a decorative symbol display device in the pachinko machine of the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a screen transition of the decorative symbol display device with an increase in the number of holdings. Explanatory drawing showing the relationship between the type of the lottery result based on the winning start stored in the main control board and the fluctuation time, etc. Flowchart showing display effect setting processing executed on the sub control board Time chart showing a transition example of gaming state Front view of a game board in a pachinko machine of an eighteenth embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to an eighteenth embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing in a pachinko machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of nail state related processing Flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing (A) is a front view for explaining a lottery result display unit, and (b) is an explanation related to an example of a display mode of the lottery result display unit when a game mode with a third-stage probability of each type is set. Figure Explanatory drawing concerning an example of the effect extension function

  With respect to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described, and then a modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, the configuration of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Is shown. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state where the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as main body supporting means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrangular frame body in which a top plate 111, a bottom plate 112, a left plate 113, and a right plate 114 are assembled. And is firmly fixed by fixtures (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or a main body portion having the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 and corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 is provided. The support mechanism for supporting and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body may be provided in the island facility.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101 as shown in FIG. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft hole provided in the shaft support is provided. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation. The main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. It is detachably attached to it. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a predetermined amount. You. Thus, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be detached from the outer frame 101.

  On the front side of the intermediate block 103, the front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side when viewed from the front. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is disposed on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side when viewed from the front. It is connected. The rear block supporting mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block supporting mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detachment operation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism for restricting opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism for restricting opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operating mechanism operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through an opening of the front block 102.

  When a right rotation operation using an operation key (not shown) is performed as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided on the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 and the movable portion 143 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable part 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism for restricting opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing are prohibited (opening / closing prohibited state) and a state where opening and closing are allowed (opening / closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation. It has been.

  The rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism includes, for example, two opening / closing restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. . The three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change their engagement state with the opening portions arranged to be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation. And an openable / closeable posture corresponding to the openable / closeable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the opening / closing allowance posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is allowed to open / close with respect to the intermediate block 103. Note that the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close permissible posture may be switched between the open / close prohibition state and the open / close permissible state by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to a change in posture when a component member in each device shifts between a plurality of postures.

  Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to some of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibition state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C corresponding to the remaining portion, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the openable / closable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been raised.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulating mechanism for regulating the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. The game ball movement restricting mechanism is configured by, for example, a combination of a flow-down restricting piece 161 provided on the intermediate block 103 and a restriction changing unit 162 provided on the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) to the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down regulating piece 161 is in a movement-permissible state in which a game ball is allowed to flow down. The change unit 162 presses and pushes the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guiding path (not shown) for guiding a game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (an open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow-down regulating piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the flow-down regulating piece 161 is set in a movement-prohibited state in which it projects toward the front block 102. The downflow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the downflow of the game ball to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, for example, at the lower end of the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and at the tip end of rotation (left side in rear view). An opening / closing detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the operation is performed is provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at a lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

  Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 mainly includes a base frame 201 made of a synthetic resin, and has a plurality of functional components attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front side of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central part of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in a front-rear direction over a wide area excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by a player to fire the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 surrounding the periphery of the opening 210 </ b> A, and a front protruding portion below the opening 210 </ b> A. An upper protruding portion 217, a lower protruding portion 218 that is located below the upper protruding portion 217 and protrudes forward, and an upper protruding portion 217 and a lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219 formed of a substantially flat region located on the back side of the 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is arranged is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 includes, for example, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light-transmitting light fitted into the front side of the panel frame 221 as shown in FIGS. And a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 behind the panel frame 221 with a predetermined gap therebetween. I have.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls obtained according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inlet 231A for allowing game balls to flow from inside the pachinko machine 100 to the storage unit 231 and an outlet (not shown) for allowing game balls to flow from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is released from the storage section 231 to the player without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removing mechanism has a function of switching the destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  The game balls obtained in accordance with the progress of the game and the game balls lent in response to a lending operation performed on a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. The storage section 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted or game balls lent out at the game hall are supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation is being performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes a storage part 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and a discharge port 241B. And a ball-pulling operation member 242 that operates the ball-pulling mechanism 243. The game balls or the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A when the storage section 231 is full. In addition, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage part 231 to the storage part 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage part 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Note that, when the release port 241B is completely opened by the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 242, the release port 241B is kept open until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) on the ball removal operation member 242 is performed. Will be maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided behind the inflow port 241A.

  The firing operation device 250 includes, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, a pedestal 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, A firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for invalidating the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, game balls are ejected from the firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Note that when the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or when the firing operation is disabled by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is being rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the firing device 330.

  Further, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, a left upper edge portion 211B and an upper right edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper central edge portion 211A, and a left upper edge portion. It has a left edge portion 211D located below the upper edge portion 211B and a right edge portion 211E located below the upper right edge portion 211C as light emitting portions. Devices 271 to 275 are provided.

  The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. It comprises a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 integrates and electrically connects a light emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and the like. And a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral portion 211 thereof. An upper left audio device 281 and an upper right audio device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right audio output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, a game ball lending device 290 is provided, for example, on the upper right side of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of bills, cards, and the like inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged alongside the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending. A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the game, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted into the card unit. When a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which numerical values corresponding to the amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent of the game balls. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the card in which the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the balance are recorded is returned from the card unit in accordance with the return operation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation different from the firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 that can perform a pressing operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up, down, left, and right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing an effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player-related operation It is possible to execute an effect setting operation or the like for inputting information and executing an effect of the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the previous game, and these operations can be executed by a player or a manager of a game arcade as needed. It has been.

  For example, although details will be described later, the pressing operation device 261 functions as an operation device for causing a predetermined suggestive effect to appear during a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). I do. The “suggested effect” is an effect that indicates the degree (or expectation) of the ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is definitely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player contacts the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by an input operation unit driving unit such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and either before or after the input operation or during the input operation or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanying the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104 to integrate the main body of the pachinko machine 100 into an integrated state. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including a game board 400 to a base frame 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism for rotatably and detachably supporting the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism for fixing the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. A firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) for emitting, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress comprehensively, and based on commands from the main control device 370. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notification.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding game balls discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are formed by various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, the upper left sound device 281 and the upper right sound device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rear block 104. Including the wiring, the signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having a through hole through which game balls such as an outlet 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball preventing mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. And a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball fired from a firing device 330 described later into a game area. The return ball preventing mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch path 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing in parallel to return to the launch path 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock absorbing property to prevent a large rebound of a game ball, such that a game ball directed to the right over the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left via the upper center again. For example, it is formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in a lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the firing device 330 in the direction of the firing path 401B, and the firing is performed from the firing device 330 but not beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) through the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (falls down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which an area having a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is mostly used. The outer periphery of the game area is generally defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. Is divided into Note that various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a firing position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (see FIG. 10). ), A firing mechanism 333 that ejects a game ball arranged at a firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10), and a halved board case 371 for housing the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace.

  Further, main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thus, not only the rear side (front side) of the main controller 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main controller 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main controller 370 is attached to the gaming board 400. It can be easily checked with the camera attached. Main controller 370 may be connected to attachment portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the state of removal of main controller 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and a board case 391 having a two-part structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is, for example, similar to the main control board 920, in a state in which the sub-control board 940 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, various structures arranged in the game area in the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the downflow direction or downflow speed of the game ball, and a center disposed at a substantially center of the base 401. The structure 420, a middle starting winning device 431 arranged below the central structure 420, and a starting device according to a second special symbol arranged lower right with respect to the central structure 420 (specifically, The right start winning device 432), the big winning devices 433 and 434 arranged below the right starting winning device 432 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434), and the right starting A starting device 436 related to a normal symbol arranged above (upstream) the winning device 432 and an upper (upstream) position above and below the big winning devices 433 and 434 on the upper right side of the gaming board 400. 435 with the consecutive action device 435 Located on the left and right sides of the middle starting winning device 431 a regular winning device 439A, and a 439B.

  The middle start winning device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle starting winning device 431A and the right middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The left middle starting winning device 431A is a starting device according to a first special symbol, and the right middle starting winning device 431B is a starting device according to a second special symbol similar to the right starting winning device 432. That is, the middle start winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device according to a first special symbol and a starting device according to a second special symbol.

  The middle starting winning device 431 includes a distribution unit 620 that distributes a game ball entered from the entrance 611 to either the left middle starting winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B. The distribution unit 620 is configured such that the winning devices 431A and 431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched every time the game balls enter from the entrance 611. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 431 basically enters the left middle start winning device 431A or the right middle start winning device 431B alternately.

  The middle start winning device 431 has a very low probability of a part of the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 without entering any of the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B. Has a function of discharging the game board 400 from the opening formed in the game board 400. The probability that a game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 is discharged without entering the start winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the above-mentioned middle starting winning device 431A and the like, and corresponds to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle-start winning switch (left middle-start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the left middle-start winning device 431A, and a middle-start winning switch (right middle) that detects a game ball that has entered the right-mid-start winning device 431B. Start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 for detecting a game ball entering the right starting winning device 432, lower large winning switch 443 for detecting a game ball entering the lower winning device 433, and upper winning device 434. Upper winning switch 444 for detecting a game ball that has entered, a combination switch 445 for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, a start switch 446 for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting device 436, a lower winning combination. A non-specific passage switch 447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the device 433; A specific path switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the special winning device 433, a general prize switch 449A for detecting a game ball that has entered a general prize device 439A or 439B, 449B and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  Further, the gaming board 400 is provided with various sensors for preventing fraud (see FIG. 10), and can detect an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Game balls of each prize device, specifically, the left middle start prize device 431A, the right middle start prize device 431B, the right start prize device 432, the lower large prize device 433, the upper large prize device 434, and the general prize devices 439A and 439B. The entrance portion of the player constitutes a winning opening, and the game balls entering each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. Further, the game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection and discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  Each prize device may be configured separately from the other prize devices, or two or more prize devices (for example, the left middle prize device 431A and the right middle prize device, like the middle start prize device 431). The winning device may be constituted by a device in which 431B) is integrated. In addition, the starting device such as the left middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game ball enters, and the game ball is returned to the game area without being paid out. It may be used as the entrance for the ball to be released.

  Each of the general prize device 439A and the general prize device 439B guides the entered game ball to the rear side of the base 401 without changing the probability of the game ball entering the device. Although the mid-start winning device 431 does not change the entry probability to the entrance 611, as described above, a part of the game ball that has entered the mid-start winning device 431 is sent to either the left or right mid-start winning device 431A or 431B. Is also discharged onto the game board 400 (ie, the game area) without entering (ie, without being guided to the back side of the base 401).

  Further, the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. The mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device according to the second special symbol. Instead, or in addition, the starting device according to the first special symbol, the general winning device. 439A, 439B, and one or more of the winning devices such as the middle starting winning device 431 including the starting device according to the first special symbol and the starting device according to the second special symbol. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  The right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 for changing a probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a right entry restriction device. 452 (see FIG. 10). The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462. When the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition position, the two movable pieces are connected to the entrance (winning opening). ) Is restricted (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right starting prize device 432, but when the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the two movable pieces have their leading ends. By arranging such that the interval between the sets is enlarged, the game ball can enter the right starting winning device 432. The right entry restriction mechanism 452, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”), enters the right entry In accordance with the drive by the regulating solenoid 462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower large winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entry permitted position and a restricted entry position, and a lower entry restriction device. The lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance attitude and the guidance attitude cause the game ball that has entered the lower big prize winning device 433 to enter the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distributing mechanism (not shown) for distributing, and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the orientation of the distributing mechanism to switch the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry prohibited position, the lower entry restriction mechanism 433 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower entry device 433. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture projecting forward, and is in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed rearward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, a game state advantageous as a privilege is given to the player. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance permitted position and the entry prohibited position by a transition between the entry permitted position and the entry prohibited position. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry-prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening). Is in the entry allowable posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the upper-prize winning device 434.

  In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside such as the right entry control mechanism 452, the winning opening (or entrance opening) of each device is constituted by each mechanism. In response to a change in the posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I just want it. Also, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball, such as the right entry control mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and to allow the game ball to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower big prize winning device 433 and the upper big prize winning device 434 when a lottery of a big hit is won. Specifically, a lottery based on the detection of the game ball which has entered the left middle start winning device 431A related to the first special symbol by the left middle start winning switch 441A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"). Or a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right middle start winning switch 441B or the right start winning switch 442. When a lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won, at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 to the entry allowable posture, and further switches after a predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. When the solenoid 465 stops, it returns to the non-guidance posture.

  The winning combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operating, on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a big hit is won, the player can start the special game state at a timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to adopt a configuration in which either the lower large winning device 433 or the upper large winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball passes through the combination operating device 435, and instead or instead of this. In addition, a configuration may be employed in which either the lower winning device 433 or the upper winning device 434 starts operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, display devices 471 to 473 for displaying a symbol change display and a lottery result, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times a game is held are integrated on the game board 400. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided at a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

  Specifically, on the gaming board 400, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed along with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 471 relating to the special symbol, and a second symbol for changing and displaying the second special symbol in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or displaying the second special symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 displaying the number of unit games held according to the first special symbol, and a special symbol hold displaying the number of held unit games related to the second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are each held up to four times. Here, the unit game is a single game executed based on one start winning, and is determined based on whether the lottery is executed based on one start winning or not, and the lottery based on the winning / decision determined. This refers to a series of games including the start and end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A is detected by the left middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10). Also, the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432 is turned to the right middle start winning switch 441B (FIG. 10) or the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emitting pattern (a combination of light emitting states (light off, light on, blink) including light emitting colors) of the plurality of light emitting units. The special symbol hold display device 476 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 relating to the second special symbol determine the number of times of holding by the combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

  Also, the game board 400 includes a normal symbol display device 473 that fluctuates and displays a normal symbol in accordance with a normal symbol lottery, or displays a normal symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to four times. In the case where the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the unit game right relating to the ordinary symbol is not added even if the game ball which has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The ordinary symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, a symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of hold times by a combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

  In addition, on the game board 400, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the finalized display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the finalized display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol always start changing at a completely coincident timing or stop display as the fixed display. There is no need to set the timing so that the fluctuation is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference between the timings, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board light emitting device 490 is provided along with the progress of the game based on control by the sub-control board 940. Various types of light emission effects and state notification by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal gaming state") is in a state in which the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol have a long variable display time (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). Corresponding.

  When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state shifted based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state shifts after the special game state. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the variable symbol display time of the normal symbol are shorter than the non-hour reduction state (hereinafter, the "time reduction state"). "), And the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as" low probability state ") ( In the following, the state shifts to “time reduction gaming state”). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is reduced, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. A transition is made to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a “high-probability state”) (hereinafter also referred to as a “probable changing gaming state”).

  The time-saving gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter returns to the normal gaming state. In addition, the probable change game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and thereafter returns to the normal game state.

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a gaming state different from each of the above-described gaming states, or a configuration in which a transition between gaming states is performed under a condition different from the above-described conditions.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and a variety of variation pattern random numbers relating to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated. When the game ball that has entered the left middle starting winning device 431A, which is the starting device according to the first special symbol, is detected by the left middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol is started. At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the right of the unit game relating to the symbol is not reserved, the processing is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning is completed. When each random number is acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all the holdings before the current winning winning after the special gaming state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  In addition, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the right of the unit game relating to the 2 special symbols is not reserved, the processing is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning is completed. When each random number is obtained based on the winning start of the second special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all the holdings after the special gaming state and before the current winning winning. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  That is, the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning. In addition, it is not always necessary to have a configuration in which the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning, and one of the special symbols is executed in preference to the other special symbols. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a unit game based on a winning start of a second special symbol is executed prior to a unit game related to a first special symbol. In other words, during the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol is a start winning prize, and thereafter, if the second special symbol is the first winning prize, the starting prize is later. The configuration may be such that the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, or the configuration may be such that the two special symbols are not alternative but can simultaneously change.

  In the case of winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning winning of the first special symbol, a stop symbol (corresponding to the big hit winning of the first special symbol lottery based on the obtained big hit symbol random number) The type of big hit symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the big hit, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, A plurality of types of big hits are set in accordance with the type of game state such as a game state to be shifted to after the special game state (whether or not to shift to the probable change game state), and a big hit symbol is set for each type. If a big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is determined based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved. The change display time of the symbol is determined, and the change pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. The variation pattern of the decorative symbol is roughly classified into a variation pattern in which reach display is performed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol (big hit symbol or losing symbol) according to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed (hereinafter referred to as “reach”). There is also a variation pattern in which the reach symbol is not displayed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is the lost symbol is definitely displayed.

  In addition, the “reach display” means that after the variable display of the decorative symbol in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, the fixed display is firstly displayed in the left and right display areas of the decorative symbol display device 479. A display result when the remaining decorative symbols for which some of the combinations corresponding to the decorative symbol combinations have a big hit and the variable display continues to be displayed in the center display area is confirmed (ie, This is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the stop symbol).

  The reach display includes a normal reach that is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds) and a reach display that has a longer fluctuation display time than the normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). And super reach. Note that the types of reach display are not limited to the two types of normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with a variable display time longer than super reach.

  The reach fluctuation pattern is provided for each type of reach display such as normal reach and super reach. Note that only one type of normal reach may be set, or a plurality of types having different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of normal reach are set, a reach variation pattern is provided for each type of normal reach. Similarly, only one type of super reach may be set, or a plurality of types having different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of super reach are set, a reach variation pattern is provided for each type of super reach.

  After the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decoration symbol is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the decoration on the decoration symbol display device 479 are performed. The variable display (fluctuation effect) of the symbol is started, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern over the variable display time for the first special symbol, and the variable pattern is displayed over the variable display time for the decorative symbol. Is displayed continuously. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol relating to the first special symbol is definitely displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is finally displayed as a decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper large winning device 434 are in the entry permissible attitude a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443 and 444 or in a predetermined maximum during the respective permissible postures of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper entry control mechanism 454. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Only one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is configured to take an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in (). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture of the last round and after a predetermined standby time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432, which is the starting device according to the second special symbol, is a right middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or a right start winning switch. When detected by 442 (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the second special symbol is achieved. The control of the unit game based on the winning start of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the ordinary symbol, the unit game according to the acquired ordinary symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the ordinary symbol is being performed, the unit game related to the acquired ordinary symbol is started after the unit game based on the acquired unit game right related to the ordinary symbol is completed.

  In a unit game related to a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not a winning has been made based on the value of a winning random number. If the winning has been won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when no winning is made in the ordinary symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stopped symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation display in a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined fluctuation display time, and in the time reduction state. The variable display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With a lapse of a predetermined time according to the game state, a stop symbol related to a normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restricting mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowed posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the winning is performed in the non-time saving state (the normal gaming state and the special gaming state), the right starting winning device 432 allows the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) is longer in the case of winning in the time saving state (the time saving game state and the probability change game state). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right starting winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  Next, a configuration relating to the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In order to receive a second special symbol lottery based on a start winning in the right starting winning device 432 (hereinafter, this lottery may be referred to as a "right special symbol lottery"), first, a normal symbol lottery must be won. In addition, the game ball must enter the right-start winning device 432 in a state where the right-start winning device 432 is allowed to enter based on the winning. The winning probability for a normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry-permitted state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely shorter than the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, so that in the normal gaming state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right special symbol lottery is A first special symbol lottery and a second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, these lotteries may be referred to as “central side special symbol lottery”) based on a start winning in the middle start winning device 431 per unit time. Opportunities are significantly smaller. On the other hand, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probable change game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right side special symbol lottery is made much larger than the opportunity per unit time to receive the center side special symbol lottery. ing.

  Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the center side special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays the game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the right special symbol lottery before each game state is completed.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 at the center of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) that mainly causes the game ball to flow from the left side of the central structure 420 ) And a game technique (right-handed game technique) in which a game ball flows down from the right side of the central structure 420. In the normal game state, the player plays a game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, performs the game by the right-handed game method. In addition, since the lower large winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, even in the special gaming state, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching another member or device to the base 501. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

  The rear block 104 is a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game balls, and rectifies the game balls downstream (for example, in one row) continuously from the game ball tank 510 and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball aligning portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of game balls on a downstream side of the case rail 530, A payout device 540 for renting out game balls, and guidance as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing out of the payout device 540 downstream of the payout device 540 to a guidance passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls payout of game balls by the payout device 540 and lending of game balls, and an external power source. A function as a power supply unit that converts the power into a predetermined voltage required by the type of device and outputs the same and controls the ejection of game balls based on a firing operation on the firing operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged beside the pachinko machine 100 And a relay device 950 that relays a signal between the two.

  The base 501 is integrally formed of a resin (for example, an ABS resin), and includes a base 502 corresponding to a front side portion and a protective cover 503 located behind the base 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as an attached portion to be attached.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the rear surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected or confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is provided on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window for exposing to the window. A large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of the heat generated by the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container opened upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island equipment are sequentially replenished at one end in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed in one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and a height gradually increasing as an upper surface of a passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 for rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage having a top surface portion whose height is lowered from a vertically overlapped height to a one-stage height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed vertically long so as to be continuous below the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. In the case rail 530, the game ball is curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously and continues downward. Further, a ball break detector 539 for detecting a ball break is provided at an intermediate portion of the ball path in the case rail 530. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built in the ball out detection unit 539, and the stored ball switch 591 causes a ball to be clogged on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof, and a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball conditions that have not been properly replenished.

  The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving unit for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout count switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passing of the released game balls through the ball path is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of paid out game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / firing control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Have been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

  The dispensing control device 560 includes a dispensing control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the dispensing control board 930. The dispensing control board 930, like the main control board 920, leaves no trace of opening. It is housed inside a substrate case sealed so as not to be opened.

  The power supply / emission control device 570 includes a power supply / emission control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power supply / emission control board 900. The power supply / emission control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. Is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device in response to operation of the launch operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 that controls the driving of the 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various powers from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of a driving voltage (for example, 12 VDC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. For example, power of a control voltage (for example, 5 VDC), power of a backup voltage for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various types of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power of the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. The power of the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with power of a driving voltage and a control voltage. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with power of the driving voltage and the control voltage. The power of the driving voltage and the power of the control voltage are supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, taking in of external power is stopped. Note that the pachinko machine is turned off by turning off the power switch 909 or by removing a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 through the power switch 909 from an external power supply outlet (not shown). The state in which the supply of power to the inside of the device 100 is stopped or the state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped are collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after shifting to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state so as to return to the current control state and end the control.

  The launch control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The operation of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping firing is provided. On condition that no operation is performed, the firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let it. As a result, game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252).

  When the initialization switch 907 is pressed, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 initializes the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the initialization signal in the ON state. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The configuration may be such that the initialization switch 907 is accommodated in the board case 371, so that an unauthorized signal input aimed at a section where a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal outputs the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. (Payout speed of the game balls from the device 540). The main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

  The power supply monitoring board 910 monitors a power supply state from the power supply / emission control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in accordance with the transition to the power failure state, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. If the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power failure signal in an ON state is output to main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the shift to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

  The main control board 920 generally controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various kinds of data temporarily when executing the control programs. And the like (not shown) for storing the same. The main control board 920 further includes various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown). I have. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by power supply of a backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after transition to the power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls a payout operation of game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with an instruction from the main control board 920 and a rental operation of game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with an operation of the game ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted.

  The payout control board 930 is provided with an input / output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with another device, and for example, bidirectional information input / output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Are connected to the open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the stored ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is connected. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function to maintain internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920 Unlike this, a configuration in which internal data is not maintained in a power failure state may be adopted.

  The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control substrate 920. The sub-control board 940 is provided with an input / output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with another device. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are connected so that information can be communicated in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing started upon recovery from a power failure state and a main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, interrupted by 2 ms (milliseconds)) and executed. Timer interrupt processing.

  First, a main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

  In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initialization processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol, and the normal symbol The random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and a first variation type counter for determining a variation display time (variation time), a variation pattern, etc. Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (part of the RAM) and interrupts are permitted. And write permission process S1023 is repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permitting process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permitting process S1023.

  In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) for controlling execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A start-up standby process S1003 for waiting for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up is executed.

  After the start-up standby process S1003, a process S1004 for determining the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900, a process S1005 for determining the value of the power failure information (a partial area of the RAM), and saving. An information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the storage information in the RAM is to be deleted based on the determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and The value of the counter related to the unit game in the middle, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) along with the current checksum value and the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Determine whether the exclusive-OR of the checksum value calculated in step 2) with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement, is “0” (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power outage information is not a predetermined power outage value indicating that the storage information has been saved and ended when shifting to the power outage state (S1005: N), or stored. If the information is not normally stored (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the information stored in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, the hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A ware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is performed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the held information and a return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 returns to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the held information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. Is performed (initialization command output processing S1014).

  Note that in the RAM return setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as a fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if the error has occurred, all of those error states are released. Also, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also performed in each of.

  After the initialization of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014), if the condition device was activated at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation processing S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and processing corresponding to the state of the game at the time of the power outage state is executed on the sub control board 940. You.

  After the special game state return preparation processing S1015, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state flag is set to determine whether the state is the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state (determination processing S1016). In this case (S1016: Y), a time-saving command is output (time-saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), a non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting processing S1019).

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than the timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, power outage monitoring processing S1202 to external information output processing S1221 related to substantial control such as progress control of the game of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various kinds of injustices (S1207: Y), the control signal output processing S1208 to the external information output processing S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be individually described.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a partial area of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected all three times, it is determined that the power failure is present. If it is not determined in this determination that a power failure has occurred, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. In addition, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and a two's complement of the checksum value is set as a RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantial control such as progress of the game and monitoring of various sensors is not performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. You. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

  In the random number updating process S1203, the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from a prescribed maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter according to the above is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, if the value after the change is the same value as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. , And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the ordinary symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter for the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and a plurality of counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter for the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The winning random number counter for the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the normal symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value updating process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from a prescribed maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special value is changed. If the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter for special symbols and the random number initial value counter for ordinary symbols, the random number initial value counter for special symbols is the same except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

  In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second to fourth variation type counters are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  In addition, each winning random number counter, big hit symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter relating to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol need not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter is another configuration. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a predetermined initial value is updated without using an initial value counter, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the information is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination processing S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. Note that the fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when various frauds are detected in the fraud detection process S1211. In the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped based on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, and the normal symbol display device 472 A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol design display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approaching solenoid 462, a downward approaching solenoid 463, an upward approaching solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower big winning switch 443, the upper winning switch 444, the combination operating switch 445, the start switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read twice into the input buffer (part of the RAM) at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. In each case, the signal state read first (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and the signal state read second (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), a change in the detection state of various switches is detected. For each switch, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, the first signal state is the ON state, and when the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that the transition to the ON state is made. Then, a detection flag (part of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power outage monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, since each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, immediately after the power supply is stopped, the various switches are turned on. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer updating process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of the RAM) used for displaying special symbols and ordinary symbols in a fluctuating manner, controlling each game state, and monitoring impropriety are updated.

  In the fraud detection process S1211, a fraudulent act of forcibly causing a game ball to enter various prize apparatuses or forcibly operating various prize apparatuses is detected. More specifically, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly moved to a permissible approaching posture, and a game ball is guided to a specific passage of the lower winning device 433 by vibrating. Induction of forced malfunction of the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 by radio waves, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, a left starting winning device 431A, Occurrence of a situation in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball to the right middle winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 at an abnormal timing has been performed. Is detected.

  In the winning detection response processing S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the left middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). , The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. If the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Also, when the lower large winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower large winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper large winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper winning switch detection flag is set based on this, the big winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is closed or not.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. Note that the sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output processing S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. Note that the first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated in accordance with the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by one each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by one each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number (for example, three) of game balls corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 receives the prize. In a situation where a ball command is requested and payout of prize balls continues, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter to the payout control board. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game according to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In addition, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, each piece of information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number. The value is selected based on the value and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In addition, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, each piece of information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 includes the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number. The selection is made based on the value and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is held.

  In the ordinary symbol-related processing S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol, the operation control of the ordinary symbol display device 473 relating to the ordinary symbol is executed, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right starting winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 for the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, and Based on various kinds of information updated to control the operation of the special symbol reservation display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol selected in the special symbol related process S1217 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub-control board 940 in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Suggestive effects that appear in the variable display of decorative patterns>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472 is a predetermined reach display (for example, In the case of a mode including (super reach), it is configured that a predetermined suggestion effect can be made to appear by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

  With reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, a description will be given of a suggested effect that appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the time when the suggested effect appears in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 13, as an example of the variable display in which the suggested effect can appear, a variable display including a super reach in which the variable display time is 90 seconds is illustrated. FIGS. 14 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing screen transitions of the decorative symbol display device 479 along the time chart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, at time ts, when the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 479, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol is displayed. Starts scrolling. It should be noted that the display data constituting the variable display of the decorative symbol is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940 in association with each of the fluctuation pattern commands that the sub control board 940 can receive from the main control board 920. Have been.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbols include a symbol in a left column (hereinafter, also referred to as a “left symbol”), a symbol in a right column (hereinafter, also referred to as a “right symbol”), and a left symbol. It is composed of three rows of symbols with a symbol between the right symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a "medium symbol"). In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, it is assumed that the decorative display in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at “6”, “5”, and “3”, respectively, is started.

  After a predetermined time (for example, after 4 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol at time ts, the first operable period starts (time t1). The first operable period started at time t1 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t2). The first operable period from time t1 to time t2 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261. The time t2 does not necessarily have to be a predetermined time after the start of the first operable period, and the first operable period ends at the timing when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261. A display corresponding to the operation may be performed.Even in the other operable periods described below, each operable period ends at the timing when the push operation is performed, and the display of the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. You may start.

  When the first operable period is started at time t1, as shown in FIG. 14, the decorative symbol display device 479 for variably displaying the decorative symbol indicates that the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. Is displayed, and a character 602 of "enemy has arrived!" Is displayed as a comment on the effect that prompts a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  Each display data relating to the display of the image 601 and the characters 602 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the start time of the first operable period (that is, the time) is controlled by the sub-control board 940. At t1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and is deleted at the end of the period (that is, at time t2).

When the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started at time ts At the timing of (after), the left symbol of the decorative symbols during the variable display is stopped (time t4).
On the other hand, when the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period, when the first operable period ends at time t2, the first special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started. . As the first special effect, as shown in FIG. 14, three types of a pattern 1A, a pattern 1B, and a pattern 1C are prepared, and the first of the one pattern selected from the three types is provided. The special effect is started at time t2 by the control of the sub control board 940.

  The pattern 1A is a pattern including a character 611A of “XX military has come!” And a red frame (red frame) 612A surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 1B is a pattern including a character 611B of “The thief has come!” And a yellow frame (yellow frame) 612B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 1C is a pattern including a character 611C of “Cat came!” And a blue frame (blue frame) 612C surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. It is not necessary to set the combination of the character and the frame to be the same each time, and the character and the frame may be selected by lottery.

  A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a “first special effect lottery”) for selecting one of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C as the first special effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the first special effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the first special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and This is performed by referring to the first special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The first special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. In this case, the value is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0").

  The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the first special effect by the first special effect lottery is received from the main control board 920 by the sub-control board 940 as a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. May be the timing at which the first operable period starts or ends.

  The first special effect selection table includes a first hit time table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display. A first out-of-office table which is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probabilities of the patterns (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) in the first hit time table and the first off time table are determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol (that is, (Variable display including reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 1A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set so that the possibility of transition to the special game state after the final display) is set to be the highest, and when the pattern 1C appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decoration pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen.

  Therefore, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. In other words, when the player sees the character 611A of “The army has arrived!” Included in the pattern 1A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, and the “cat” included in the pattern 1C. Has come! ", The degree of expectation for the special game state is the lowest.

  Similarly, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. That is, when the player sees the pattern 1A in which the frame 612A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, and when the player sees the pattern 1C in which the frame 612C is blue, the player has the special game state. The lowest expectations for

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit time table shows that the selection probability of the pattern 1A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the pattern 1C Is set to be the lowest (for example, 10%). On the other hand, in the first off-state table, the selection probability of the pattern 1C is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the selection probability of the pattern 1A is the lowest. (For example, 10%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the first special effect ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the first special effect starts (time t3). Note that the first special effect (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) is displayed on a layer in front of the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol. The variable display of the decoration pattern inside appears again. Thereafter, at time t4, the left symbol stops.

  After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the left symbol stops at time t4, the second operable period is started during the low-speed fluctuation (scroll) before the right symbol stops (time t5). The first operable period started at time t5 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t6). The second operable period from time t5 to time t6 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  When the second operable period starts at time t5, as shown in FIG. 15, the decorative symbol display device 479 has an image 603 reminding the player that the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is possible. Is displayed. Display data relating to the display of the image 603 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and is decorated at the start time of the second operable period (that is, time t5) by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the symbol display device 479, and is deleted at the end of the period (that is, at time t6).

  When the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol at time ts. At the timing of (after), the right symbol performing the low-speed scrolling (low-speed fluctuation) is stopped so as to reach the reach display (time t7). For example, in a configuration in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped at the same symbol when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. When the right symbol stops at "7" at time t7, the reach display is generated.

  On the other hand, when the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, when the second operable period ends at time t6, the second special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is displayed on the sub-control board. It is started by the control of 940. As the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 15, four types of a pattern 2A, a pattern 2B, a pattern 2C, and a pattern 2D are prepared, and one of these four types is selected. The second special effect of the pattern is started at time t6.

  The pattern 2D is a pattern in which the right symbol that scrolls at a low speed is stopped so as to reach the reach display, as in the case where the player does not perform the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 261 during the second operable period.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the pattern 2C is temporarily stopped so that the right symbol scrolling at a low speed becomes the reach display and then starts moving again (display Q1), and is shifted by one from “7” where the right symbol becomes the reach display. Stop at "8" (display Q2), the middle symbol is short and stops temporarily (display Q3). When a series of displays Q including these displays Q1 to Q3 is displayed, the symbols in the left and right three columns are scrolled again. The symbols in each row to be scrolled again stop at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at the time t4, and then stop at the right symbol through the low speed scroll to reach display. That is, the pattern 2C is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display were performed twice in a pseudo manner.

  The pattern 2B is the same as the pattern 2C up to the portion where the right symbol scrolls at a low speed in the re-scrolled three columns of symbols. In the pattern 2B, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the left and right three columns start the second re-scroll. The symbols in each row where the second re-scrolling is started stop after the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol stops so as to reach reach through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2B is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if pseudo display was performed three times.

  The pattern 2A is the same as the pattern 2B up to the portion where the right symbol scrolls at a low speed in the second re-scroll. In the pattern 2A, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the left and right three columns start the third re-scroll. The symbols in each column where the third re-scrolling is started stop after the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at the time t4, and then the right symbol stops so as to reach reach through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2A is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display were performed four times in a simulated manner.

  Further, among the second special effects, for the patterns (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing the continuous effect, frames of each color surrounding the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 appear during the effect. For example, in the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, a blue frame 613C appears in a display Q3 constituting a series of displays Q (that is, a display in which a middle symbol is short and temporarily stopped).

  On the other hand, in the pattern 2B, a blue frame 613B1 appears in the display Q3 forming the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 forming the second series of displays Q. I do. That is, different colored frames appear in the series of displays Q performed for the first time and the series of displays Q performed for the second time.

  In the pattern 2A, a blue frame 613A1 appears in the display Q3 forming the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 forming the second series of displays Q. A red frame appears in the display Q3 constituting a series of displays Q performed for the third time. That is, different colored frames appear in the series of display Q performed for the first time, the series of display Q performed for the second time, and the series of display Q performed for the third time. In the pattern 2A, a rainbow (rainbow) frame may appear before the right symbol stops after the third re-scroll, and in this case, the variable display indicates that the big hit has been won. Correspondingly, it is set to always transition to the special game state after the fluctuation display.

  Each display data relating to the above-described pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C display is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. As for the pattern 2D, the display data constituting the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is diverted.

  The lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “second special effect lottery”) for selecting any one of the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, the pattern 2C, and the pattern 2D as the second special effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the second special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the second special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and This is performed by referring to the second special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The second special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds). When the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, the counter value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a counter that is common to the first special effect selection counter described above may be used as the second special effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the second special effect by the second special effect lottery is determined by receiving from the main control board 920 a variable pattern command corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub control board 940. May be the timing at which the second operable period starts or ends.

  The second special effect selection table includes a second hit time table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol change display. And a second out-of-office table which is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery.

  The selection probabilities of the patterns (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D) in the second hit table and the second out-of-office table are determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol. (I.e., the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 2A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set to have the highest possibility of transition to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 2D appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decorative pattern currently displayed in a variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen. The pattern 2B and the pattern 2C are set so that the possibility is the second and the third highest, respectively.

  Therefore, when the pattern 2A for performing the continuous effect as if the variable display is performed four times in a pseudo manner appears as the second special effect, the player maximizes the degree of expectation for the special game state, In the case where the pattern 2D for the reach display appears without performing the continuous effect despite the operation of the pressing operation device 261, the player makes the expectation the lowest.

  In the second special effect, in the patterns 2A, 2B, and 2C for performing the continuous effect, the frames (the frames 613C, 613B1, and 613A1 and the like) surrounding the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 are provided. ) Appears. The number of times the color of the frame changes in each pattern is performed four times in the pattern 2A, twice in the pattern 2B, and once in the pattern 2C. Therefore, each time the color of the frame changes, Improve the degree of expectation for a special game state.

  Further, the change in the color of the frame in the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, and the pattern 2C may cause a transition to the special game state, similarly to the patterns (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) constituting the first special effect. It is configured to change in the order of blue → yellow → red as the height increases. In other words, in the second special effect, the order of change in the color of the frame in each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing the continuous effect is a certain regularity between the possibility of transition to the special game state. It is configured to be. Therefore, as the color of the frame sequentially changes along the regularity, the player multiplies the expectation for the special game state in a synergistic manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the second hit table, the selection probability of the pattern 2A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the second highest (for example, 30%), and the pattern 2C Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 8%) and the lowest selection probability of pattern 2D (for example, 2%). On the other hand, in the second out-of-office table, the selection probability of the pattern 2D is the highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 2C is the second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the third. It is set so as to be high (for example, 10%) and to have the lowest selection probability of the pattern 2A (for example, 2%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second special effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the second special effect, by stopping the right symbol to reach display (time t10). In FIG. 13, only one time is illustrated as time t10, which is the end time of the second special effect. However, the execution time of the second special effect is different for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2C, 2D), four times corresponding to each pattern of the second special effect can be time t10.

  For example, in the pattern 2D, the time t7, which is the stop time of the right symbol when the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, is the time t10. On the other hand, in the pattern 2A, for example, the timing 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol at time ts is time t10. In the pattern 2B and the pattern 2C, for example, the timing 40 seconds and 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol at the time ts is the time t10.

  The execution time of the second special effect may correspond to the variable display time selected in advance. For example, re-scrolling may be performed for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D). The larger the number of times, the longer the variable display time, the longer the variable display is selected, and the main control board 920 determines the variable display time, thereby determining the number of re-scrolls and determining the pattern. . Further, the length of the effect (battle effect) executed after the right symbol stops is made different, and the timing of stopping the right symbol in the first and second and subsequent times in each pattern coincides, and the length differs according to each pattern. It is good also as composition which performs the production of the effect.

  If the right symbol stops in the reach display at time t7 or time t10 after the end of the second special effect, the third operable period starts. The third operable period ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t8 or time t11). The third operable period is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  When the third operable period is started by stopping the right symbol in the reach display, as shown in FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 479 informs the player that the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. An image 605 reminding the user and a character 606 of “recruiting helpers!” Are displayed as a comment on the effect that prompts a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  Each display data relating to the display of the image 605 and the characters 606 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the decorative symbol is displayed at the start time of the third operable period under the control of the sub-control board 940. Displayed on device 479 and erased at the end of the period.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the third operable period started at time t7 ends at time t8, regardless of whether the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. A battle effect, which is one of the suggestion effects, is started by the control of the sub-control board 940. Similarly, when the third operable period started at time t10 ends at time t11, regardless of whether the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. The battle effect is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  The battle production is a video production in which the characters until the middle symbol finally stops are represented by the battle situation with a character regarded as an enemy such as a XX army, a bandit or a cat. As the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 16, four types of patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D are prepared, and one pattern selected from these four types is prepared. The battle effect is started at time t8 or time t11.

  The pattern 4A is a pattern representing a situation in which the opponent is fighting in an overwhelming priority situation. The pattern 4B is a pattern showing a state where the enemy is fighting in a priority situation. The pattern 4C is a pattern showing a situation in which an enemy is fighting in an inferior situation. The pattern 4D is a pattern showing a situation in which the opponent is fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation.

  Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Each of these patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D may have a configuration in which only display data corresponding to a video production indicating the situation of each battle is prepared, or may appear in the first special production. A configuration may be provided in which display data corresponding to a plurality of types of video effects indicating a battle situation is prepared for each type of enemy.

  Each of the patterns 4A, 4B, and 4C is a pattern of a long production time used when the right symbol stops at time t7 (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed at the second operation time). And a short effect time pattern used when the operation is stopped at time t10 after the end of the second special effect (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time). On the other hand, for the pattern 4D, the time at which the right symbol stops is the same regardless of whether the second special effect has been performed (that is, whether the pressing operation device 261 has been pressed at the second operation time). Therefore, one effect time pattern that is common to the case where the pressing operation device 261 is pressed and the case where the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed during the second operation time is prepared.

  The lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “battle effect lottery”) for selecting any one of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D as the battle effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the battle effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the battle effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and obtains the value of the battle effect selection counter. This is performed by referring to the battle effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

  The battle effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds). At the update timing, if the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”), The value is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, the counter value is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a counter that is common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter and the second special effect selection counter described above may be used as the battle effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the battle effect pattern by the battle effect lottery is the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the currently displayed variation display of the decorative symbol. Or the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

  As the battle effect selection table, a fourth hit time table referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol, A fourth out-of-office table which is referred to when a big hit is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probabilities of the patterns (pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, and pattern 4D) in the fourth hit table and the fourth miss table are determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being executed. (I.e., the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 4A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 4D appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decoration pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen. The pattern 4B and the pattern 4C are set such that the likelihood is the second and third highest, respectively.

  Therefore, when a pattern 4A for performing a video production showing a state of fighting in an overwhelmingly priority situation with respect to the enemy appears as a battle performance, the player maximizes the degree of expectation for the special game state. Then, when a pattern 4D for performing a video effect showing a situation where the player is fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation with respect to the enemy appears, the player has the lowest expectation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the fourth hit table, the selection probability of the pattern 4A is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4B is the second highest (for example, 15%), and the pattern 4C Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 5%) and the lowest selection probability for pattern 4D (for example, 0%). On the other hand, in the fourth miss table, the selection probability of the pattern 4D is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4C is the second highest (for example, 15%), and the selection probability of the pattern 4B is the third. It is set so as to be high (for example, 4%) and to have the lowest selection probability of the pattern 4A (for example, 1%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the battle effect started at time t8 or time t11 is a timing after a predetermined time (90 seconds after in the example shown in FIG. 13) from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol at time ts. Then, the process ends when the middle symbol finally stops (that is, the decorative symbol is finally displayed) with the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (time te).

  In the configuration where the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are fixedly stopped at the same symbol when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, both the left symbol and the right symbol stop at "7". In this case, if the first or second special symbol lottery has won a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at "7" at time te. On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol lottery has not won the big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol other than “7” (for example, “8”) at time te. Immediately before or at the same time as the stop, the result of the battle effect is also displayed. If the first or second special symbol lottery has been won at the jackpot, an image in which the ally character wins is displayed. An image is displayed in which the enemy character wins and the ally loses.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, when the third operable period ends at time t8, the suggested effect 1 The third special effect is started by the control of the sub-control board 940. Similarly, when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t10, the third special effect is started when the third operable period ends at time t11. You.

  As the third special effect, as shown in FIG. 16, three types of a pattern 3A, a pattern 3B, and a pattern 3C are prepared, and a third pattern of one pattern selected from the three types is prepared. The special effect starts at time t8. As described above, at time t8 or time t11, the battle effect is also started. However, since the third special effect is displayed on a layer in front of the battle effect, the player is required to perform the third special effect. Until the end, the third special effect is seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  The pattern 3A is a pattern including a character 614A of “XX! Has arrived!” And a red frame 615A surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 3B is a pattern including a character 614B of “A fighter has arrived!” And a yellow frame 615B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 3 </ b> C is a pattern including a character 614 </ b> C “Dog came!” And a blue frame 615 </ b> C surrounding the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940.

  A lottery for selecting any of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C as the first special effect (hereinafter also referred to as a “third special effect lottery”) is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the third special effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the third special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and This is performed by referring to the third special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The third special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds). When the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, the counter value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a counter that is common to at least one of the above-described first special effect selection counter, second special effect selection counter, or battle effect selection counter may be used as the third special effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the third special effect by the third special effect lottery is determined by receiving from the main control board 920 a variable pattern command corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub control board 940. May be the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

  The third special effect selection table includes a third hit time table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display. And a third out-of-office table which is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery.

  The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) in the third hit table and the third miss table is determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being executed (that is, (Variable display including reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 3A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 3C appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decorative pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen.

  Therefore, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. That is, when the player sees the character 614A of “XX! Man has arrived!” Included in the pattern 3A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the “3. When the character 614C of "Dog came!" Is seen, the degree of expectation for the special game state is minimized.

  Similarly, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. That is, when the player sees the pattern 3A in which the frame 615A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, and when the player sees the pattern 3C in which the frame 615C is blue, the player has the special game state. The lowest expectations for

  In particular, the correlation between the frame color of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, and pattern 3C) constituting the third special effect and the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is determined by each pattern (pattern (first pattern) constituting the first special effect). Since the configuration is the same as the patterns 1A, 1B, and 1C), the player can intuitively judge the degree of expectation of the special game state for the frame color in the third special effect from the regularity of the frame color. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the third hit table, the selection probability of the pattern 3A is the highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is the second highest (for example, 25%), and the pattern 3C Is set to be the lowest (for example, 5%). On the other hand, in the third out-of-office table, the selection probability of the pattern 3C is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is the second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 3A is the lowest. (For example, 2%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the third special effect started at time t8 or time t11 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t9 or time t12). Note that the third special effect (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) is displayed on the layer in front of the battle effect, so that the player has completed the third special effect at time t9 or time t12. Then, the user will see the battle effect on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 479 has a mode in which the variable display of the decorative symbol includes the predetermined reach display, the predetermined operation is performed by pressing the pressing operation device 261. Suggestive effects can appear.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the operation period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed is three times (that is, the first operation period and the second operation period) during the one-time display of the decoration symbol. , And a third operable period) are provided, and when the player performs the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period, a suggested effect (ie, a first special effect, a first The second special effect and the third special effect) can be displayed (displayed) on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Therefore, in the variation display of the decorative symbol in the example shown in FIG. 13, three operable periods are provided during one variation display, so that the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period is provided. In accordance with the presence or absence of the operation, the suggested effect can appear in various patterns (more specifically, eight patterns).

  First, in the first pattern, by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, a first special effect is produced at time t2 and started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, the second special effect is caused to appear at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which the third special effect and the battle effect appear at time t11.

  In the second pattern, a first special effect appears at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during a first operable period started at time t1, and a second operation started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at time t10. Thus, at the time t11, this is a pattern in which only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In the third pattern, by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, the first special effect is caused to appear at time t2, and the second special operation is started at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect does not appear, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7. This is a pattern in which a third special effect and a battle effect appear at time t8.

  The fourth pattern is such that the first special effect appears at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation started at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect does not appear, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7. This is a pattern in which, at time t8, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In the fifth pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which a third special effect and a battle effect appear at time t11.

  In the sixth pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation possible started at time t5 is performed. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which, at time t11, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In the seventh pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period started at the time t1, and the second operable started at the time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect does not appear, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, time t8 Is a pattern for producing a third special effect and a battle effect.

  In the eighth pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at the time t1, and the second operable started at the time t5. The second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at the time t7. This is a pattern in which, at t8, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In this manner, when a plurality of operable periods are provided while one variable display is performed, a plurality of patterns of patterns are provided depending on whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is operated in each operable period. The suggestion effect can appear in one of the patterns.

  As described above, as an example of the variable display provided with a plurality of operable periods, the variable display including the super reach in which the variable display time is 90 seconds has been exemplified. However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time is used. Is also provided with a plurality of operable periods in a variable display including a super reach having a length other than 90 seconds. Regardless of the type of reach display included, a configuration in which a plurality of operable periods are provided for a variable display (variable display including reach display) in which the variable display time is longer than a predetermined time may be provided. . The number of operable periods provided may be different depending on the length of the variable display time. Further, the number of operable periods provided for one variable display may be one.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after performing a variable display in which a plurality of suggested effects can appear, such as a variable display including a super reach shown in FIG. When the gaming state has transitioned to the special gaming state, the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state displays the variable display of the decorative symbol, including a suggestive effect that can appear during the variable display. And can be restored.

  In order to realize such a configuration, the sub control board 940 executes a variable display in which a plurality of suggested effects can appear, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be performed (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit, the stop symbol of each row immediately before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (for example, the example in FIG. 13) "653"), the lottery result of the first special rendering lottery, the lottery result of the second special rendering lottery, the lottery result of the battle rendering lottery, and the fixed display of the decorative symbol Are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, for example, the stop symbol of each column (for example, “777” in the example of FIG. 13).

  These pieces of information (that is, the stop symbol before the change display of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) are stored at predetermined timing. Alternatively, one or a plurality of pieces of information may be stored at each of a plurality of timings. The information may be stored at a timing at which the variable display ends (that is, a timing at which the fixed display is displayed), at a timing at which the variable display is started, or when each effect lottery is performed. May be the timing to be performed.

<Restoration of suggested effects in special game state>
In a configuration in which a plurality of suggested effects appear during a single fluctuation display, the suggested effect that appears later is less likely to transition to the special game state than the previously suggested effect. In such a case, the player may lose his expectation of transitioning from the currently displayed variable display to the special game state, and may be discouraged from playing the game. To prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period.

  However, in some cases, such as when the finalized display of the decorative symbol is a display indicating that the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the player does not cause the player himself to appear. You may want to know later what was going on if you had the suggestive production appear.

  In contrast to this case, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the special game state, the decorative symbol display device 479 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed before the transition to the special game state, It is configured so that it can be restored including the suggested effect that can appear during the fluctuation display.

  Hereinafter, the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 (a) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which a player can select whether or not to restore a fluctuating display of a decorative symbol performed before transition to the special game state in the special game state. It is. FIG. 17 (b) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game state transitions to the special game state after a fluctuation display in which a plurality of suggested effects can appear can be performed, such as the fluctuation display including the super reach shown in FIG. In this case, when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) executed in the special gaming state is started, before a transition to the special gaming state, A screen as shown in FIG. 17A is displayed as a decorative pattern display as a screen (hereinafter, also referred to as a “restoration selection screen”) that allows the player to select whether or not to restore the displayed decoration pattern that has been performed. Displayed on device 479.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the restoration selection screen includes a character 621 that informs the player that the variable display of the decorative pattern, which was performed before the transition to the special game state, can be restored, and a decoration. An image 622 that reminds the player that a pressing operation can be performed on the pressing operation device 261 to restore the symbol variation display, and a round number display 631 that informs the player of the current round number in the special game state. Is configured as a screen displayed on the special game state screen including the special game state screen.

  The character 621 and the image 622 are displayed on the special game state screen at a timing when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started in the special game state, and a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, 5 seconds) After). That is, the restoration selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a period from the start of the predetermined round in the special game state to the lapse of a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. The display data for displaying the characters 621 and the image 622 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the display and erasure are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  When the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period in which the restoration selection screen is displayed, the sub-control board 940 displays the variation of the decorative symbol performed before the transition to the special game state in execution. Based on each information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (i.e., the stop symbol before the display of the variation of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery result of each effect lottery). , Including the suggestive effects that can appear during the fluctuation display.

  That is, in the example of FIG. 13 described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol stopped at “653” is started, and when the first operable period comes, the image 601 is displayed as shown in FIG. And a character 602 are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the first operable period, the first special effect according to the stored lottery result of the first special effect lottery is executed.

  When the second operable period comes after the left symbol stops at “7”, an image 603 is displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the second operable period, the second special effect according to the stored lottery result of the second special effect lottery is executed.

  When the third operable period comes after the right symbol stops at “7” so as to reach the reach display, the image 605 and the character 606 are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the third operable period, the third special effect according to the stored lottery result of the third special effect lottery, and the third special effect according to the stored lottery result of the battle effect lottery are determined. The battle effect is displayed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display being executed (for example, 90 seconds in the example of FIG. 13) has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at “7”. That is, the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed as “777”.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation device 261 is not operated during the third operable period, a battle effect according to the stored battle effect lottery result is displayed, and the execution is performed in the same manner as when the pressing operation device 261 is operated. At the timing when the fluctuation display time of the medium fluctuation display has elapsed, the medium symbol finally stops at “7”.

  Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed before the transition to the special game state in execution, is restored as described above, the player can perform the operable period provided three times (the first operable period). , The second operable period, and the third operable period), the first special effect and the second special effect are performed by pressing the pressing operation device 261 during all operable periods or a part of the operable periods. Or among the third special effects, a special effect that the user wants to see can be seen.

  In other words, in the restored decorative symbol change display, the operable period corresponding to the operable period in which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 was performed during the decorative symbol change display performed before the special game state is performed. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in this manner, the player, even in the reconstructed display of the decorative pattern, displays the special pattern viewed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern performed before the special game state. You can see the production again.

  On the other hand, in the restored display of the decorative symbol, the operable period corresponding to the operable period in which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol performed before the special game state is performed. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 for the period, the player is restored to the special effect that was not seen during the variation display of the decorative pattern performed before the special game state. This can be seen in the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  Therefore, for example, in the variation display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, as described above, the suggestion effects (the first special effect, the second special effect, and the third effect) in eight patterns from the first to the eighth. Special effect, and battle effect), but in the display of the variation of the restored decorative symbol, the same pattern as that in the variation of the decorative symbol performed before the special game state is displayed. Suggestive effects can be expressed in patterns, or suggestive effects can be expressed in different patterns.

  Here, the restoration of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not necessarily have to restore the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display, and a part of the variable display may be restored, and a start winning may occur. A period in which the variable display is executed a plurality of times after the variable display corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed may be made reproducible, or the player may be able to select the time to be reconstructed.

  The restoration selection screen may be displayed a plurality of times during the special game state, such as displaying the restoration selection screen in the third round and the seventh round in the special game state. In other words, a configuration may be employed in which the variable display of the decorative symbol can be restored a plurality of times during the special game state. By adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the decorative symbol can be restored a plurality of times, the player can make suggestion effects with a plurality of types of patterns different from the pattern displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed before the special game state. Can appear.

  When the decorative symbol change display performed before the transition to the running special game state is restored to the decorative symbol display device 479, the restoration is performed as shown in FIG. 17B. A round number display 641 indicating the current round number is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, a lower right portion of the screen) so that the player can recognize the current round number while the player is in the game. The display of the round number display 641 is controlled by the sub control board 940. Note that, instead of displaying the round number display 641, a reduced screen of the special game state screen may be displayed in a predetermined area.

<Pending full production>
In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is reserved are both the maximum number of times, that is, for both special symbols. When the total number of reservations reaches eight, a predetermined effect (hereinafter, this effect is also referred to as “hold full effect”) appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions.

  The holding full effect may be an effect that is immediately executed at the timing when the number of holdings reaches eight in total, or a variable display for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed) Until a predetermined time (a period until a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses) is started, and the start of the special period changes the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. The effect may be suggested to the player by causing the player to display a specific color on the periphery of the display screen. In addition, the hold full effect is such that a specific sound effect is output at the timing when the number of holds reaches eight, a specific character that does not appear except during a special period during the fluctuation display appears, or a decorative pattern is displayed. Expectation of the random display for a specific movement (for example, high-speed movement) or the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for the hold each time the color of the hold display is 1 The color indicating the degree (for example, the color of the display part indicating the hold is displayed in blue, yellow, red, gold, and rainbow colors, and the color order is uniform with the color indicating the other expected degrees) This is an effect that is not seen at all in other situations such as a period other than the special period, or has a special feeling that is hardly seen.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, both the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is reserved are set to the maximum number (upper limit of the number of reservations). When it has reached, the probability of appearance of the holding full tank effect depends on whether or not all the holdings include the holdings that have been won in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery). Are configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the maximum number of holds includes a hold that has won the special symbol lottery, the hold with a higher probability than when the hold that has won the special symbol lottery is not included It is configured so that a full tank effect can appear. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, the hold full tank effect appears with a probability of 80%. If the winning pattern is not included in the symbol lottery, the full holding effect will appear only with a probability of 10%.

  The lottery for determining whether or not to display the reserved full effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “reserved full effect lottery”) is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. More specifically, the holding full tank production lottery is executed when the sub-control board 940 reaches the maximum number of holdings for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By acquiring the value of the full tank effect counter (part of the area of the RAM) and referring to the reserved full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the reserved full tank effect counter. Done.

  The main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information on the number of suspensions at a predetermined timing every time the number of suspensions for each special symbol changes. The sub-control board 940 can determine whether or not each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number based on the information notified from the main control board 920.

  The main control board 920 may execute a predetermined command (hereinafter referred to as a command) including information on the number of times of holding of each special symbol, for example, at a timing when the number of times of holding for the special symbol increases due to the start winning of each special symbol. This command is also referred to as a “hold command”) to the sub-control board 940 to notify the sub-control board 940 of information on the number of times of suspension. Further, the main control board 920, for example, at the timing when the main control board 920 transmits the variation pattern command (that is, the timing when the number of times of suspension for the special symbol decreases), transmits the variation pattern command including the information on the number of suspensions to the sub control board. By transmitting the information to the sub-control board 940, the sub-control board 940 is notified.

  The hold command includes information on the result of the lottery of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) together with information on the number of times each special symbol is held. When receiving the hold command from the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 associates the information on the result of the special symbol lottery with the receiving order of the hold command (that is, the order in which the starting prize is generated) and stores the information in the RAM. , And thereafter, when the corresponding hold is exhausted (that is, when the held unit game is executed), the information is deleted. The sub-control board 940 can determine, based on the information stored in the RAM, whether or not the hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol includes the hold for the special symbol lottery. .

  The hold full tank effect counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. Is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”).

  The first table to refer to when the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, and the special symbol lottery for the hold for the maximum number of times A second table to be referred to when the winning hold is not included is prepared. The first table is set so that the appearance of the suspended full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80% as in the example shown in FIG. 18). The second table is also set so that the appearance of the suspended full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10% as in the example shown in FIG. 18).

  The sub-control board 940 executes the suspended full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sub control board 940 performs a holding full tank effect lottery when each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number. However, when the main control board 920 has reached the maximum number of times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, each of the number of reservations has reached the maximum number of times. It is good also as composition which performs a production lottery. In such a configuration, when the appearance of the hold full effect is selected in the hold full effect lottery, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information to that effect, and notifies the sub control board 940 Executes the hold full effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the special game state, the decorative symbol display device 479 presses the decorative symbol change display performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state. It is configured to be able to restore including the suggested effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) that can be made to appear by operating the operation device 261.

  Therefore, even if the player does not intentionally perform the operation of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period provided for causing the suggested effect to appear during the period of the variable display of the decorative symbol, The player can later restore and view the suggested effect that was not seen because the player did not operate the pressing operation device 261.

  As a result, the player may have negative emotions in the game, such as regretting that he did not see the suggested effect that he could see during the period of the display of the decorative pattern Can be reduced, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when both the number of times of holding the unit game right related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the unit game right related to the second special symbol reach the maximum number, , And the full fill effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions. Therefore, since the player has the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special symbol, the willingness to play is improved.

  In particular, if the hold for the maximum number of times includes a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery, the hold-full production will have a higher probability than if the hold that has won the special symbol lottery is not included. Is configured to appear. In other words, in the case where the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, the hold full tank effect is more likely to appear than in the case where the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is not included Thus, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by the appearance of the held full tank effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the lottery result of the held full tank effect may be indicated to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol to the player, for example, At the timing when the number of suspensions, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the reserved full tank effect, reaches the upper limit, a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 479 (for example, the upper right corner) is formed in a circular shape in a front view in the circumferential direction. A roulette display in which fan-shaped areas with the indications of "hit" and "losing" are displayed in order, and a fluctuating display by roulette effect in which any of the areas is displayed brightly lit in order, hold In response to the lottery result of the full tank effect, finally, an effect in which the lit portion stops in the area of "hit" or "losing" may be executed, and thereafter, the reserved full tank effect may be executed. . Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the situation is that there is a possibility that the suspended full tank effect will be executed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, a function (hereinafter, referred to as a function that allows the player to cancel execution of the second and subsequent suggestion effects among a plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during one variation display). This function is also referred to as a “suggested effect cancel function”). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart for explaining the suggested effect cancel function. FIG. 19 illustrates a case where the player cancels the suggested effect in the variable display including the super reach in which the variable display time shown in FIG. 13 is 90 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period from time t1 to time t2, the first special effect is performed during the period from time t2 to time t3. After the first special effect ends at time t3, the first cancelable period starts at time ta1 (for example, one second after the first special effect ends). The first cancelable period ends at a time ta2 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the time ta1.

  The first cancelable period only needs to be provided in a period before the second operable period is started. Therefore, for example, the first cancelable period may be started at time t3 when the first special effect ends, or the first cancel period may be ended at time t4 when the left symbol stops. Is also good.

  In the first cancellation period, the control of the sub-control board 940 informs the player that the display of the subsequent suggested effect can be canceled based on the display data prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Characters and images are displayed. For example, similar to the image 601, a character indicating a comment that informs the player that the display of the subsequent suggested effect can be canceled is displayed, or the player is reminded that the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is possible. The image is displayed.

  When the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancel period, the second operable period and the third operable period do not occur, and when the right symbol is stopped at the time t7 so that the reach display is displayed, The non-battle effect is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  The non-battle effect, unlike the suggestive effects such as the first special effect and the battle effect, is an effect in which the degree of ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative pattern is definitely displayed is not recalled. The non-battle effect is, for example, an introduction video of a character appearing in a suggestive effect such as a first special effect that can appear in the variable display, and its display data is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the second operable period is started at time t5 on condition that the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period from time t5 to time t6, and the second special effect is performed during the period from time t6 to time t10, the second special effect is performed. The second cancelable period is started at time ta3 (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the second special effect) in the execution period of the effect. The second cancelable period ends at time ta4 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from time ta3.

  Note that the second cancelable period only needs to be provided in a period before the third operable period is started. Therefore, for example, the second cancelable period may be started at the time t6 when the second special effect starts, or the time t10 at which the right symbol stops (or the second special effect ends). Alternatively, the second cancellation period may end.

  In the second cancellation period, similarly to the first cancellation period described above, the control of the sub-control board 940 cancels the display of the subsequent suggested effect to the player based on the display data prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940. Characters, images, etc. that indicate what can be done are displayed.

  When the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancel period, the third operable period does not occur, and at time t10, the right symbol stops displaying the reach display. A non-battle effect similar to the case where the user performs the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 261 is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  Note that the non-battle effect production time started at time t10 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period is the first cancellation effect except when the second special effect is the pattern 2D. The period is shorter than the battle effect started at time t7 due to the player operating the pressing operation device 261 during the period.

  The display data of the battle effect started at time t10 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancellation period is also changed to the time t7 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. Are prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in the same manner as the display data of the battle effect started in.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, during the third operable period, the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period, and the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period. Is started at time t7. When the third operable period occurs, at least a battle effect appears as a suggested effect regardless of whether or not the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect, and battle effect) that can appear during one change display, Since the player has a function (suggested effect canceling function) that allows the player to cancel the execution of the suggested effect (second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) after the second time, the suggested effect that appeared later is It is possible to suppress a situation indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is lower than the suggested effect that appeared earlier. Therefore, the player loses expectation for the occurrence of the special game state due to the content of the suggestion effect that appears later, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol, a predetermined suggestive effect is provided by the decorative symbol of the pachinko machine 100 that is its own device. When the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period while being displayed on the display device 479, a predetermined suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100. . In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 20 illustrates a pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100A” for convenience) and another pachinko machine communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a machine 100 (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100B” for convenience).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko machine 100A is communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100B via the LAN 651. The connection between the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B is not limited to the LAN 651, but may be a direct connection with a cable or the like or a wireless connection based on various standards such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100B, which is a communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A, may be the pachinko machine 100 installed at a specific position with respect to the pachinko machine 100A, such as to the right of the pachinko machine 100A, or a game hall ( Among the plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed in the hall, a predetermined pachinko machine 100 designated by the pachinko machine 100A may be used. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 100B as a communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A may be one or more than one.

  When an operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol on the pachinko machine 100A, the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, a suggestion effect (for example, a first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A that is its own machine.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a directional operation on the selection operation device 263 in a predetermined direction (for example, rightward) during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100A, the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period is performed. The information is transmitted via the LAN 651 to the pachinko machine 100B which is determined in advance as a communication partner.

  The information transmitted from the pachinko machine 100A to the pachinko machine 100B (information related to the suggested effect corresponding to the operable period) is selected by the pattern selected as the suggested effect (for example, selected by the first special effect lottery in the first embodiment). (A pattern of the first special effect). Transmission of information to the pachinko machine 100B is performed by control of the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100A.

  When the pachinko machine 100B receives the information from the pachinko machine 100A, the pachinko machine 100B performs a suggestion effect of the pattern selected in the pachinko machine 100A based on the received information, that is, the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. In this case, the suggested effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B. The display control in the pachinko machine 100B is performed by controlling the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the player performs the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period generated during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period. Can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A, which is the player's own machine. When the player performs a predetermined direction operation on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, the operation The suggested effect corresponding to the possible period can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B which is another pachinko machine.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100B controls the pachinko machine 100B by controlling the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B when displaying the suggested effect on the decorative design display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the information received from the pachinko machine 100A. The reduced screen of the screen (for example, the screen on which the variable display is performed) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the game is changed to a predetermined area (for example, the screen) of the decorative symbol display device 479. At the lower right of the display).

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol, a suggested effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A that is its own machine. On the other hand, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, a suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100B.

  As described above, the display position of the suggested effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selecting operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggested effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. A variety of games can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

  In particular, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B, so that the suggested effect is played on another pachinko machine 100B. It can be seen with the player, and can have a different interest than when playing the game alone.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined suggestion effect is performed by the decorative symbol display device. It is configured to be displayed in an area different from the area in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in 479 is displayed. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 21 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the fancy display of the decorative symbol on the pachinko machine 100, the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. In this case, a suggested effect (for example, a first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a directional operation on the selection operation device 263 in a predetermined direction (for example, rightward) during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. The suggested effect corresponding to the period is displayed in the area 479A on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In contrast to the right area 479A where the suggested effect is displayed, the left area 479B has a display content when the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period (for example, the first area in the first embodiment). (Variation display after one operable period) is displayed.

  When the suggestion effect displayed in the area 479A on the right side is completed, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the left area 479B, and nothing may be displayed in the right area 479A, and the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol in each of the left and right areas 479A and 479B. May be displayed.

  Note that the control related to the above-described display in this embodiment is performed by the sub-control board 940.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol, the suggested effect is the display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479. It is displayed in an area different from the area where the variable display is displayed.

  As described above, the display position of the suggested effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selecting operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggested effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. A variety of games can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, the suggestion effect displayed by operating the selection operation device 263 and the content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when neither the pressing operation device 261 nor the selection operation device 263 is operated. Can be seen at the same time, so that the interest in the game is suitably improved.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of times of holding), all of these are set. The appearance probability of the hold full effect differs depending on whether or not the hold includes a win in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holdings), The appearance probability of the hold-up full effect is different depending on the number of the arrival within the predetermined period. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the number of times each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number increases in a predetermined period, the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect increases. Is configured so that there is a portion where the height is higher. Hereinafter, the “predetermined period” is also referred to as a “suspended number monitoring period”.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the number of holdings for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number for the first time during the predetermined period, the holding full tank effect is If it is the second time, the pending full effect will appear with a 70% probability, and if it is the third time, the pending full effect will be with the 80% probability. If it is the fourth time or later, the held full effect is displayed with a 95% probability.

  Here, when the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit a plurality of times during the predetermined period, not only the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect is changed, but also if the effect contents are different. It is good also as a structure to make it. A bonus may be given to the player when the appearance of the hold full tank effect is selected during the predetermined period for a plurality of predetermined times, and the bonus may be, for example, a plurality of times during the predetermined period. Only when the appearance of the hold full effect is selected, the hold full effect may be executed by an effect using a different character for each number of times, or the hold full effect may be executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period. When the appearance of the tongue effect is selected, it is possible to restore the above-described decorative pattern change display during the special game state thereafter, and the number of times the appearance of the hold full effect is selected during the predetermined period is reduced. The number of recoverable times may increase as the number increases. Thereby, even when the appearance of the hold full effect is once selected and the hold full effect is executed, the player continues the game so that the number of times of hold reaches the upper limit again during the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player stops watching the game due to the reserved full tank effect and the operation of the gaming machine is reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the suspension count monitoring period starts at a point in time when each of the suspension counts for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number at a certain time, and these suspension counts are all This is a period until the game is consumed (that is, until the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol is performed the maximum number of times).

  Note that a period from the start point until the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times greater or less than the maximum number of times may be set as a suspended number monitoring period, or a predetermined number of times may be determined from the start point. A period until the set time elapses may be set as the suspension count monitoring period. Further, the starting point of the suspension count monitoring period is not limited to the time when each of the suspension counts for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum frequency, but may be a predetermined time (for example, 0 minute every hour). Or the time point when the player gives an instruction in a predetermined manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the sub control board 940 sets the maximum number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be the same as in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. When the number of times has been reached, the value of the reserved full effect counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940 is acquired, and the value of the reserved full effect counter is compared with the value of the reserved full-state effect counter. This is performed by referring to the pending full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM.

  The hold full effect selection table according to the present embodiment is referred to when the number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number is the first time in the number-of-holds monitoring period. A first table, a second table to be referred to in the second time, a third table to be referred to in the third time, and a fourth table to be referred to in the fourth and subsequent times are prepared.

  The first table is set so that the appearance of the held full effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50% as in the example shown in FIG. 22), and the second table is also determined in advance. It is set so that the appearance of the reserved full effect is selected with the given probability (for example, a probability of 70% as in the example shown in FIG. 22). The third table and the fourth table are also set so that the appearance of the held full effect is selected with a predetermined probability.

  The sub-control board 940 sets a period flag (a partial area of the RAM) that is set when the number-of-suspension monitoring period is set, and sets the number of times of suspension for the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the number-of-suspension monitoring period. Each of them includes an arrival counter (a part of the RAM) for counting the number of times the maximum number is reached, and a remaining period counter (a part of the RAM) for counting the remaining period of the suspension count monitoring period. Note that the initial values of the arrival counter and the remaining period counter are “0”.

  The sub-control board 940 sets the period flag when the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number in a state where the period flag is not set, and sets 1 to the arrival counter. The sum of the upper limit of the number of times of suspension for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (in this embodiment, “8”) is set in the remaining period counter. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the first table to perform a lottery holding full effect drawing, and executes a holding full tank production when the appearance of the holding full tank production is selected.

  The sub-control board 940 adds 1 to the arrival counter and sets the remaining period counter from the remaining period counter when each of the holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in a state where the period flag is set. Subtract one. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to a table corresponding to the value of the arrival counter among the holding full tank production selection tables, performs a holding full tank production lottery, and selects the appearance of the holding full tank production. Executes the held full effect.

  When the value of the remaining period counter becomes “0” by updating the remaining period counter, the sub-control board 940 determines that the suspension count monitoring period has ended, cancels the setting of the period flag, and sets the arrival counter. Is set to the initial value “0”.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub control board 940 is configured to perform the holding full tank production lottery. However, the main control board 920 is configured to perform the same holding full tank production lottery performed by the sub control board 940. It is good also as composition which performs a full tank production lottery. In such a configuration, when the appearance of the hold full effect is selected in the hold full effect lottery, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information to that effect, and notifies the sub control board 940 Executes the hold full effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of times of holding), the arrival thereof is predetermined. It is configured such that the appearance probability of the pending full tank effect differs depending on the number of times of arrival during the period.

  Therefore, during the predetermined period, when the number of times of holding for each special symbol reaches the upper limit again, the suggested effect becomes easier to appear as compared to the case where the number of holdings reaches the upper limit before that, and the player With the aim of increasing the number of holdings for each special symbol, it is possible to launch a game in which a game ball is fired aiming at entering the starting device according to each special symbol. Thereby, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be easily increased (the number of holdings can be easily stored). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  In the special game state, since the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol tends to reach the upper limit by the game ball fired during the special game state, if the reach display appears in the variation display of the decorative symbol, In view of the fact that the special game state will occur after that, the player who has seen the game stops firing the game ball so as not to increase the number of holdings before the special game state occurs (that is, during the fluctuation display). There are many cases. In other words, the appearance of the reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol can be one of the causes of the difficulty in increasing the number of unit games related to the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 (that is, the sub control board 940 is When a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation display including the reach display is received from the control board 920), when there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is configured to execute, at a predetermined probability, a variable display including a plurality of variable displays (ie, complete loss variable display) that do not include the reach display with the same variable display time (variable time) as the selected variable display. Is done.

  For example, FIG. 23A is a time chart illustrating an example of a variable display including a reach display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 60 seconds. In the variable display including the reach display, when the right symbol stops and the reach display occurs, the player tends to stop emitting the game ball for a relatively long period until the middle symbol stops thereafter.

  On the other hand, FIG. 23B is a time chart showing an example of a complete loss fluctuation display. The variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is configured to be longer than the variable display time of the complete loss variable display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 20 seconds.

  FIG. 23C is a time chart showing a variable display in which the variable display time is 60 seconds, which is composed of a complete loss variable display in which the variable display time is 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 23C, by repeating the complete loss variation display shown in FIG. 23B three times, the same variation display time as the variation display including the reach display shown in FIG. Second) variable display.

  In addition, for each of the variable displays including the reach display prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, the complete loss variable display is configured to form the variable display of the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display. Information that defines whether to combine them is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in advance. The sub-control board 940 configures the variable display based on the information by combining the target complete loss variable display with the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display.

  On the other hand, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the special symbol lottery is won while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being held. When there is no hold, the complete loss fluctuation display for the same fluctuation display time as the selected fluctuation display is performed multiple times with a predetermined probability, as in the case where there is a hold winning the special symbol lottery. Is configured to be executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the probability that the variable display including the complete loss variable display for a plurality of times is executed depends on whether the special symbol lottery has been won while being held for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The case where there is a hold is higher than the case where there is no hold winning the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a “non-reach mode lottery”) as to whether or not to perform a variation display including a plurality of complete loss variation displays is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the sub control board 940 receives a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation display including the reach display from the main control board 920, the selection counter ( This is performed by acquiring the value of a part of the RAM) and referring to the selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)). If the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, The value is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, the counter value is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”).

  The selection table includes a first table to be referred to when a special symbol lottery has been selected among the special symbol or second special symbol, and a reservation for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And a second table to be referred to when there is no hold winning the special symbol lottery. The first table has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80%), and the execution of the variation display including the complete loss variation display for a plurality of times with the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected. Is set to The second table is also capable of executing, at a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%), a fluctuation display including a complete loss fluctuation display for a plurality of times with the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command. Set to be selected.

  In the non-reach mode lottery, the sub-control board 940 selects the execution of the fluctuation display including the complete loss fluctuation display for a plurality of times for the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command. Execute a variable display that includes multiple displays.

  If the fluctuation display indicated by the reach fluctuation pattern received from the main control board 920 subsequently generates a special game state (that is, a special symbol lottery is won), the sub-control board 940 displays the complete loss fluctuation display. Is controlled so that the stop symbol (fixed display) in the variable display composed of the combination of the symbols is a big hit symbol.

  FIG. 23 illustrates the case where the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is an integral multiple of the variable display time of the complete loss variable display, but the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is completely lost. If the variable display time is not an integral multiple of the variable display time of the variable display, the sub-control board 940 extends or shortens the variable display time of one or a plurality of complete loss variable displays, so that the total variable display time becomes the main variable display time. Control is performed so that the fluctuation display time (variation display including the reach display) corresponding to the reach fluctuation pattern received from the control board 920 becomes the fluctuation display time.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol lottery is won while being held for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If there is a hold, a variable display is performed with a predetermined probability that the variable display does not include the reach display (ie, the complete loss variable display) for a plurality of times with the same variable display time as the selected variable display. It is configured to be.

  In this way, by making it difficult to execute the variable display including the reach display, it is possible to suppress the event that the player stops firing the game ball when the reach display appears, and thus the first special symbol is used. In addition, it is possible to easily increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the second special symbol (easy to store the holding). Therefore, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned holding full tank effect is performed, since the holding for each special symbol is easily accumulated, the holding full tank effect becomes easy to appear, so that the player cannot see the holding full tank effect. This makes it less likely to cause dissatisfaction and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

  Only when there is a special symbol lottery hold among the special symbol lotteries, a floating display that includes multiple displays that do not include the reach display appears instead of a floating display that includes the reach display. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is held among the special symbol lotteries, the hold is more likely to be accumulated than when there is no special symbol lottery lot. Therefore, when there is a hold that has won the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, it becomes easier to show the full hold effect than when there is no hold that has won the special symbol lottery Thus, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by the appearance of the held full tank effect. As a result, the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the variable display including the variable display including the reach display for a plurality of times appears instead of the variable display including the reach display, the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display does not include the reach display. There is no need to have dedicated display data for the variable display, and display data for the variable display that does not include the reach display can be used for a variable display time shorter than the variable display that includes the reach display. Thereby, the consumption of the storage capacity in the pachinko machine 100 is appropriately suppressed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the decorative symbol is displayed (variable display, stop display) on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, Cylindrical reels 711L, 711M, 711R having decorative symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided side by side, and by rotating each of these reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the decorative symbols are variably displayed. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, a description will be given of a structural configuration of a game board 400X of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a front view of a game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 25A is a front view of a reel device 710, and FIG. It is a front view of 711M.

  Like the game board 400, the game board 400X also has a substantially circular game area formed on the front side of the base 401 by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, and a game ball fired from the firing device 330. When the game ball enters the game area beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404, the game ball moves (falls down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 </ b> X is provided with downflow changing members such as nails 411 and windmills 412, and a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base 401, similarly to the game board 400. In addition, the upper starting winning device 1431 arranged below the central structure 420, the lower starting winning device 1432 arranged below the upper starting winning device 1431, and the lower starting winning device 1432 Large winning a prize device 1434 arranged on the lower side, and starting devices 1436A and 1436B arranged on both left and right sides of the central structure 420 are provided. Here, the upper starting winning device 1431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left starting winning device 1431A and the right starting winning device 1431B) are integrated like the middle starting winning device 431.

  The game board 400X includes switches (detection means) for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B, the lower starting winning device 1432, and the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B, respectively. (Not shown) are provided, and it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch.

  Specifically, a left start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the left starting winning device 1431A, a right start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1431B, and a game that has entered the lower starting winning device 1432. A lower start winning switch for detecting a ball, a large winning switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning device 1434, a left start switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the left starting device 1436A, and a right starting device 1436B. A right start switch for detecting a game ball is provided on the game board 400. These switches are connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the general prize switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10) for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

  In the following, for convenience, the above-mentioned left start winning switch, right starting winning switch, lower starting winning switch, big winning switch, left starting switch, and right starting switch are referred to as “left starting winning switch 1441A”, “ Also referred to as "right start winning switch 1441B", "lower start winning switch 1442", "big win switch 1444", "left start switch 1446A", and "right start switch 1446B".

  The entrance portion of the game ball in the left starting winning device 1431A, the right starting winning device 1431B, the lower starting winning device 1432, and the big winning device 1434 constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is formed on the base 401. Through the formed through hole, it is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. On the other hand, game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). For each of the above winning devices, the entrance portion of the game ball in the left starting device 1436A and the right starting device 1436B constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged into the game area.

  The left starting winning device 1431A is a starting device according to a first special symbol, similarly to the left middle starting winning device 431A, and the right starting winning device 1431B is a starting device according to a second special symbol, similar to the right middle starting winning device 431B. Device. That is, the upper starting winning device 1431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device according to a first special symbol and a starting device according to a second special symbol.

  The upper starting winning device 1431 includes a distribution unit (not shown in FIG. 24) that distributes a game ball entered from the entrance 1611 to either the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B. The distribution unit is provided on the back side of the base 401, and a game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 is guided to the back side of the base 401 by a passage (not shown), and is used for distribution by the distribution unit. .

  Similar to the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit of the upper starting prize device 1431 is configured such that the prize devices 1431A and 1431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched every time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611. . As a result, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning device 1431 basically alternately enter the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B.

  The upper starting winning device 1431 is configured so that the probability of entering the entrance 1611 does not change. On the other hand, the upper starting winning device 1431 has a very low probability that a part of the game ball entered from the entrance 1611 is formed at a predetermined position without entering the left or right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B. It has a function of discharging from the outlet to a collection and discharge passage (not shown). That is, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 through the entrance 1611 is discharged to the collection / discharge passage without entering any of the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B. The probability that the game ball entered from the entrance 1611 is discharged to the collection and discharge passage without entering the start winning devices 1431A and 1431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000. It may be.

  The lower starting winning device 1432 is a starting device according to the second special symbol, similarly to the right starting winning device 432. Like the right start winning device 432, the lower starting winning device 1432 has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. Note that the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball need not be provided only in the lower starting prize device 1432, but instead or in addition to one or another of the prize devices such as the upper starting prize device 1431. A plurality may be provided. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  Like the right starting winning device 432, the lower starting winning device 1432 includes an entry restricting mechanism 1452 that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by a transition between an entry allowable position and an entry prohibited position, and an entry restriction device. An entry control solenoid (not shown) for driving the mechanism 1452 is provided. The entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1452 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). In the following, the above-described entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1452 is also referred to as “entry control solenoid 1462” for convenience.

  The entry control mechanism 1452 includes two movable pieces driven by the entry control solenoid 1462. When the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces narrow the entrance (winning opening). Although the game ball cannot enter the lower starting winning device 1432 by taking the (or closing) arrangement, when the entry restricting mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable position, the two movable pieces are separated by the distance between their tip portions. The game ball can enter the lower starting prize winning device 1432 by adopting an arrangement in which is enlarged.

  The entry control mechanism 1452 is used when a game ball that has entered the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 1446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”). Then, in response to the drive by the entry control solenoid 1462, the state is shifted to the entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  The large prize winning device 1434 is, similarly to the upper winning prize device 434, an entry restriction mechanism 1454 for restricting a game ball from entering into the inside thereof by a transition between an entry allowable position and an entry prohibited position, And an entry control solenoid (not shown) for changing the posture. The entry control solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry control mechanism 1454 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10). In the following, the above-described entry control solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry control mechanism 1454 is also referred to as “entry control solenoid 1464” for convenience.

  The entry control mechanism 1454 includes a plate-shaped movable piece that is disposed on the front side of the big winning device 1434 and is driven by the entry control solenoid 1464. When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition position, The game ball cannot enter the big prize winning device 1434 because the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening). However, when the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece is moved forward with the lower side as an axis. By being pushed down and opening the entrance, the game ball can enter the special winning device 1434.

  The large prize winning device 1434 allows a game ball to enter when a large hit lottery is won. Specifically, when a game ball that has entered the left start winning device 1431A related to the first special symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the left start winning switch 1441A (that is, a first special symbol lottery), or A lottery based on detection of a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1431B or the lower starting winning device 1432 according to the second special symbol by the right starting winning switch 1441B or the lower starting winning switch 1442 (that is, the second lottery). When a special symbol lottery is won, the entry control solenoid 1464 of the special winning device 1434 operates. By this operation, the entry restricting mechanism 1454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 24, a reel device 710 is provided in the opening of the central structure 420 as a device for displaying a decorative symbol (variable display, stop display) instead of the decorative symbol display device 479 on the game board 400. Is provided. The reel device 710 is attached to a plate-shaped base 701 disposed on the back side of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the reel device 710 includes three rotating bodies arranged side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a left reel 711L, a middle reel 711M, and a right reel (right symbol row) formed in a cylindrical shape. ) 711R. Note that the left reel 711L forms a left symbol row, the middle reel 711M forms a middle symbol row, and the right reel 711R forms a right symbol row.

  Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel 711L, 711M, 711R. The rotation axes of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are disposed on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction.

  Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is connected to a reel drive motor (not shown in FIG. 25), each of which is a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive of each reel drive motor. In the following, for convenience, the drive motors for the reels connected to the left reel 711L, the center reel 711M, and the right reel 711R are referred to as “reel drive motor 721L”, “reel drive motor 721M”, and “reel drive motor 721M”, respectively. Also referred to as “reel drive motor 721R”.

  The reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R are all connected to the sub-control board 940, and are independently driven by the control of the sub-control board 940. Thus, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can rotate individually, that is, each independently.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, and by rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R individually, the decorative symbol is displayed. A variable display is realized. The decorative symbol is composed of a main symbol 712 and a sub symbol 713 formed smaller than the main symbol 712.

  The main symbol 712 is a symbol that can constitute a big hit symbol. The main symbol 712 is configured as a symbol including information (hereinafter, this information is referred to as “numerical information”) defining individual numerical values, such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers. In the present embodiment, “1” is used. To "9", and the big hit symbol is constituted by a combination of three identical main symbols 712.

  The main symbols 712 are sequentially arranged such that each number from “1” to “9” goes around each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. More specifically, in the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, each of the main symbols 712 to which the numbers except for a part (specifically, “4”) among “1” to “9” are attached, The reels 711L and 711R are arranged so as to change in a descending order when the reels 711L and 711R rotate clockwise as viewed from the front left side. On the other hand, in the middle reel 711M, each of the main symbols 712 to which respective numbers from “1” to “9” are attached changes in ascending order when the middle reel 711M rotates clockwise as viewed from the front left side. Are arranged as follows. In addition, a configuration in which the sub symbol 713 is arranged at a location corresponding to “4” will be exemplified. However, a main symbol 712 numbered “4” is included in each reel 711L, 711M, and 711R. Is also good.

  The sub symbol 713 is a symbol that cannot constitute a big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the sub symbol 713 is configured as a symbol of a predetermined pattern that does not include numerical information. The sub-symbol 713 includes a first sub-symbol 713A provided on each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, and a second sub-symbol 713B provided only on the middle reel 711M as shown in FIG. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second sub-design 713B is arranged between the main design 712 with the number “3” and the main design 712 with the number “5” on the middle reel 711M. Is done. The second sub symbol 713B is provided in place of the symbol “4” in the main symbol 712, and is large in size so that the player can easily recognize it compared to the first sub symbol 713A as the other sub symbols 713. It is constituted by.

  The first sub-design 713A is a reel 711L, 711M, 711R, except for a portion between the main design 712 with the number “3” and the main design 712 with the number “5” on the middle reel 711M. Are arranged between the main symbols 712 arranged in the.

  Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is disposed with its front side protruding forward from the front surface of the base body 701, and has a substantially semicircular cross section when viewed from the front left side, and has a light transmissivity extending in the left-right direction. Is covered with a resin cover having The resin cover is configured as a light guide plate in which a predetermined decorative design (for example, a school of fish) is formed by fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side), and at least one of the upper, lower, left and right sides (for example, By irradiating light from light-emitting portions (not shown) provided on both upper and lower sides, an image of the predetermined decorative design can be displayed so as to be visible from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 includes a holding lamp 720 for displaying the number of holdings of unit games relating to the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), inside the opening of the central structure 420. And is provided at a lower position with respect to the reel device 710. The holding lamp 720 is configured by a number (eight in the present embodiment) capable of emitting light corresponding to the sum of the upper limit values of the number of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided on the back side of each holding lamp 720, and the sub-control board 940 controls the light-emitting means. The unit is configured to be turned on or off. The hold lamp 720 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off according to the control of the sub-control board 940 according to the increase or decrease of the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol.

  In the gaming board 400, a lottery result display device 730 is provided inside the opening of the central structure 420 and on the right side of the holding lamp 720. The lottery result display device 730 is a device that suggests the lottery result of the reserved full effect to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (In this embodiment, four lamps). The lottery result display device 730 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off under the control of the sub-control board 940.

  Here, the operation of the lottery result display device 730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device 730. In FIG. 26, the reel device 710 and the holding lamp 720 are shown together.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery result display device 730 includes four lamps 730A to 730D. The first lamp 730A is the smallest lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D, and is arranged on the leftmost side. The second lamp 730B is the second smallest lamp, and is arranged on the right side of the first lamp 730A. The third lamp 730C is the second largest lamp, and is disposed on the right side of the second lamp 730B. The fourth lamp 730D is the largest lamp and is disposed on the right side of the third lamp 730C.

  While the decorative symbol is being displayed by the reel device 710, that is, while the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are rotating, the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is held reaches the upper limit. Then, as shown in FIG. 26A, the lottery result display device 730 displays one of the lamps 730A to 730D one by one in the rightward direction (arrow Q direction) from the first lamp 730A like a roulette wheel. After the lamp is illuminated so as to sequentially move and the fourth lamp 730D is illuminated, the display returns to the first lamp 730A again, and repeats a pattern of sequentially moving rightward from the first lamp 730A and illuminating (hereinafter, this fluctuation display). The display is also referred to as “ramp fluctuation display”).

  The above-described lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 is such that the moving speed of the lighting lamp (lamp lighting interval) in the lamps 730A to 730D fluctuates quickly, and then the moving speed gradually decreases, and the lamp fluctuation is gradually reduced. At the timing when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed from the start of the display, the lamps corresponding to the lottery result of the hold full effect among the lamps 730A to 730D are turned on to finally stop (stop display).

  More specifically, when the appearance of the hold full tank effect is selected in the hold full tank effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 26B, the lottery result display device 730 displays the lamps of the lamps 730A to 730D. After performing the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed by turning on the fourth lamp 730D. On the other hand, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected in the reserved full tank production lottery, the lottery result display device 730 displays a lamp other than the fourth lamp 730D, that is, the first lamp 730A and the second lamp 730B. , Or the third lamp 730C.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is determined after the reach display appears in the variation display of the decorative symbol performed on the reel device 710, and the final display is performed. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a “reach effect period”), the variable display time of the variable display (ramp variable display) by the lottery result display device 730 is provided.

  Specifically, when the lottery result display device 730 starts ramp change display due to the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached the upper limit, the lamp change display is displayed. On the other hand, the timing at which the predetermined basic variable display time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses (that is, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730) is the reach in the decorative display variable display performed on the reel device 710. In the case of the effect period, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is extended.

  The sub control board 940 is executing when the lottery result display device 730 starts ramp fluctuation display by the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is a variable display including the reach display.

  Next, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed is the variable display including the reach display, the sub-control board 940 determines whether the lamp variable display has been performed for the basic variable display time. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variation display of the running decorative symbol.

  Further, the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the timing to stop and display on the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed arrives. The variable display time of the lamp variable display is extended so that the timing of the stop display is reached after the end of the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed (that is, after the final display is performed).

  For example, the lamp fluctuation display is changed so that the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the timing at which the final display is displayed in the fluctuation display of the running decorative symbol. Extend the variable display time. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended so that the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes at the timing when the fixed display is displayed in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol being executed.

  Alternatively, a period from the timing at which the lamp variation display is stopped and displayed on the lottery result display device 730 in the case of performing the basic variation display time to the timing at which the final display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed ( Hereinafter, this period is also referred to as the “reach effect remaining period”), and the variable display time of the lamp variable display may be extended by a uniform time. In such a case, for example, if the remaining reach effect period is 5 seconds or less, the variable display time of the ramp change display is extended by 6 seconds, and if the remaining reach effect period is 5 seconds or more and 10 seconds or less, the lamp change display is not displayed. The variable display time may be extended by 11 seconds.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 27 to 29, a look-ahead effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the "look-ahead effect" is a kind of suggestive effect, and when the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is reserved, the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the reservation is performed. On the basis of the result, an effect of giving a notice of a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that occurs after the unit game performed by the completion of the hold is completed.

  Here, as a look-ahead effect that gives a preview of a specific game state that occurs after the end of the unit game, an effect that always transitions to a specific game state when the effect occurs, or the effect In some cases, the game may transition to a specific game state when the game state occurs, but may also be performed when the game does not transition to the specific game state. including. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the effect of notifying a specific game state that occurs immediately after the end of the unit game in which the effect was executed, but a specific game state that occurs after at least one variable display is executed. It may be a production that gives notice.

  FIGS. 27 and 28 are schematic diagrams showing the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the second sub-symbol advance notice is performed. FIG. 29 is the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the countdown notice is performed. FIG.

  The second sub-symbol advance notice and the countdown advance notice are both types of look-ahead effects. The sub-control board 940 determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect based on the predetermined effect object information received from the main control board 920, and what kind of a look-ahead effect to execute when performing the look-ahead effect. decide.

  Specifically, when a special winning (first special symbol or second special symbol) winning start occurs, the main control board 920 determines the special winning (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the value of the random number acquired based on the occurrence of the special winning winning. A corresponding special symbol lottery is performed, and a variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is determined. This determination is made before the start of the variable display executed based on the start winning. The main control board 920 includes information corresponding to whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery has been won (hereinafter, also referred to as “prize / failure correspondence information”), and a determined or determined variable display time. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “variable display time correspondence information”) as rendering target information, and outputs a command including the rendering target information to the sub-control board 940.

  Here, the production target information may be information selected or determined by the main control board 920 based on the value of a random number acquired based on the occurrence of a winning prize, for example, information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred and fluctuations. The information indicating the display time may be the production target information, for example, information indicating the rough change display time such as whether or not the change display including the reach display as the change display time is output as the change display time corresponding information. Is also good. Further, the acquired random number value itself is used as the production target information, the main control board 920 outputs the acquired random number value itself to the sub control board 940, and the same selection is made for both the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940. A configuration including control for determining a lottery result of the special symbol lottery and a variable display time by a method may be adopted.

  Note that the command including the effect target information may be a hold command or a command dedicated to outputting the effect target information. Further, the effect target information may not include the variable display time correspondence information, and may be configured only with the success / failure information. When receiving the production target information from the main control substrate 920, the sub-control board 940, based on the production target information and the number of times the right of the unit game pertaining to the special symbol is reserved, is set to the unit game corresponding to the production target information. It is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect for notifying a gaming state that occurs after the end. When determining to execute the look-ahead effect, the sub-control board 940 determines the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed. When the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the unit game of the special symbol corresponding to the effecting target information corresponding to the prefetching effect is also referred to as “variable display of the prefetching effect”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the second sub-symbol predictor notice will be described. In the second sub-symbol advance notice, after the loss symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is displayed as a stop symbol on the middle line L2, which is one of the activated lines, a variable display of the prefetch target is executed. This is a look-ahead effect in which the middle reel 711M is kept stationary without fluctuating (rotating). The control of the second sub-symbol advance notice is performed by the sub-control board 940, and the control of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R described below is performed by the sub-control board 940.

  The “effective line” is a line that shifts to the special game state when a big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on the line. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the uppermost upper line L1, the lowermost lower line L3, and the middle line L2 between the upper line L1 and the lower line L3. Valid line is set. Note that the number of active lines is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be more, such as five active lines including two diagonal lines that are diagonally upward and downward, or may be as small as, for example, only the middle line L2. May be.

  For example, when a special symbol to be pre-read is activated in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, as shown in FIG. 27, the variable display immediately before the pre-read target is started as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the variable display ends when the lost symbol including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 which is one of the effective lines as a stopped symbol.

  More specifically, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target is stopped in a state where the middle reel 711M displays the second sub-symbol 713B on the middle line L2. To control. Since the second sub-symbol 713B is a symbol that does not constitute a big hit symbol, the large hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 by displaying the second sub-symbol 713B on the middle line L2. The player is informed that the lost symbol has already been stopped and displayed as the stop symbol that is stopped and displayed in L2.

  When the middle reel 711M stops, the left reel 711M is then controlled to stop with the main symbol 712 displayed on the middle line L2. In each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. In this state, the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711R is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, so that the symbol of the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711R in any of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3. The reach display is not formed with the symbol of, and it is indicated to the player that the losing symbol has already been stopped and displayed on all the activated lines L1 to L3.

  After the left reel 711L stops, control is performed so that the right reel 711R stops. The right reel 711 </ b> R controls the stop symbol displayed on the middle line L <b> 2 to be different depending on whether the display is the variable display of the prefetch target or the variable display performed before the prefetch target. In the case of the variable display performed before the prefetch target, control is performed such that the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol 713 which does not become the reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2 is stopped. I do. Therefore, in the fluctuation display two objects ahead of the prefetching target, a state in which the reach display is not formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R on any of the activated lines is shown to the player, and the fluctuation display is stopped in a lost symbol. indicate.

  After the end of the variable display two items before the prefetch target, the variable display (the variable display immediately before the prefetch target) in the next reserved special symbol unit game is started. In the change display, the left and right reels 711L, 711L, 711M are stopped without changing (rotating) the middle reel 711M (ie, while the state in which the second sub-design 713B is displayed on the middle line L2). The fluctuation of 711R is started.

  The “state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating)” is not limited to the case where the middle reel 711M is completely stopped, and the second sub-design 713B may be in a predetermined range including the middle line L2. It may be accompanied by an operation such as swinging, for example, in a state where the second sub-pattern 713B moves up and down and stops within a range overlapping the virtual straight line as the middle line L2 in a front view. Alternatively, this state may be a state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating).

  First, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuating display immediately before the prefetch target are controlled so that the left reel 711L stops in a state where any one of the main symbols 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. Therefore, also in the variable display, similarly to the above-described variable display immediately before the prefetching target, it is determined that the loss symbol has already been stopped and displayed on all the activated lines in a state where the right reel 711R is variable displayed. The display of reach display is suppressed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  Here, in the pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, only the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are changed, and whether the reach display is formed by the two reels 711L and 711R, and whether the reach display is performed, In order to allow the player to pay attention to whether the main reel 712M is formed by the main symbol 712, a fluctuation display is set so as not to change the middle reel 711M. In this case, if a part of the combination of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711M, the player recognizes that the effect is to pay attention to the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R. There is a possibility that a reach display is formed by the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and that it is expected to develop into a special effect. For this reason, during execution of the look-ahead effect, when the left reel 711L stops, control is performed so that the reach display is not formed depending on the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711M.

  Note that the look-ahead effect is controlled by changing the probability (expected degree) of transition to the special game state according to how many times before the time-varying display has started the look-ahead effect with respect to the variable display of the look-ahead target. It is preferable to control so that the probability (expectation) of transition to the special game state is set to be higher as the number of times the variable display is continuously executed is large, and a main symbol 712 as a big hit symbol is set. The number of award balls (for example, the number of rounds) that can be obtained by the player in the special game state according to the type of the special game state is set differently, or the game state that transits after the special game state is the main symbol 712 as a big hit symbol. It is preferable to set differently according to the type so that the type of the main symbol 712 constituting the reach display stopped and displayed on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R in the look-ahead effect can be noticed. Arbitrariness.

  After the left reel 711L is stopped, the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol which does not become the reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2, similarly to the variable display before the variable display being executed. The right reel 711R is controlled to stop so that 713 is stopped and displayed. Thus, in the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the reach of each of the activated lines L1, L2, and L3 is achieved by the left and right reels 711L and 711R, similarly to the above-described variable display before the prefetch target. A state in which no display is formed is shown to the player, and the variable display is stopped and displayed in a lost pattern.

  Here, as the stop control of the right reel 711R during the look-ahead effect, the player can take time to pay attention to whether the reach display is performed in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L or not. The main symbol 712 (the same main symbol 712 in the present embodiment) of the right reel 711R, which can form a reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L, is positioned near the middle line L2 and slightly above the upper side. To move slowly, and control so as to be even slower so as to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2. Then, in the variation display before the prefetch target, the main symbol 712 moves from the state where it seems to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2 to the lower side, and the main symbol 712 stops at the lower line L3, and the middle line L2 May be controlled so that the sub-symbol 713 stops.

  After the end of the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started. Also in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are fluctuated in a state where the middle reel 711M is stopped without fluctuating, similarly to the above-described fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target are controlled so that a reach display is formed on the middle line L2 and stopped and displayed. For example, in the variation display of the prefetch target, like the above variation display before the prefetch target, it is likely that the main symbol 712, which is the same as the main symbol 712 stopped on the left reel 711L, overlaps with the middle line L2. It may be controlled so that the speed becomes even slower, and thereafter, from a state where it is likely to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2, the main design 712 and the main symbol 712 are stopped so as to stop at the middle line L2.

  After the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed while forming the reach display in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, the fluctuation of the middle reel 711M is started, and thereafter, the fluctuation of the prefetch target is caused by stopping the middle reel 711M. The display ends. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 due to the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display (that is, after the end of the variable display of the prefetch target), the gaming state transits to the special gaming state. . On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 due to the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display, the game state is changed to the normal game state without transitioning to the special game state.

  In addition, as for the second sub-symbol advance notice, in the above description, the case where the special winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2 has been described. When a special symbol to be prefetched is activated in a state where the number of retained games is one, or when a special symbol to be prefetched is activated in a state where the number of retained special game units is three or more, the special game to be prefetched is activated. In the case of occurrence, the second sub-symbol predictor may be similarly notified.

  Next, a countdown notice will be described with reference to FIG. The countdown notice is a look-ahead effect in which the number of times of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target is counted down by the number included in the main symbol 712. . The control of the countdown notice is performed by the sub control board 940.

  For example, when a special symbol to be prefetched is activated in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 29, the variable display three times before the prefetching object is started as shown in FIG. After that, after the main display 712 with the number “3” on the middle reel 711M is stopped in a state where the main symbol 712 is positioned on the middle line L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are displayed on the respective effective lines L1 and L2. , L3, the process is terminated by stopping the stop symbol so as to become a lost symbol.

  After the end of the fluctuation display three times before the prefetch target, the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target) in the unit game of the special symbol held next is started. The variable display is performed after the main symbol 712 with the number “2” on the middle reel 711M is stopped in a state where the main symbol 712 is positioned on the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are set to the respective effective lines L1, L2 and L3. In this case, the stop symbol is stopped so as to become a lost symbol.

  After the end of the variable display two objects ahead of the prefetch target, the variable display immediately before the prefetch object starts, and the main display 712 with the number “1” on the middle reel 711M is a middle line. After being stopped in the state of being located at L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped so that the stop symbols are lost symbols in the respective effective lines L1, L2 and L3.

  After the end of the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started, and the big hit symbol or the lost symbol is stopped as a stop symbol. In the variable display of the prefetch target, the left reel 711L, the right reel 711R, and the middle reel 711M stop in this order.

  Note that, in the above description, the case where the special symbol to be prefetched and the start winning prize is generated in the state where the number of hold times of the special symbol unit game is 3 is described above, but the number of hold times of the special symbol unit game is described above. In the case where the special symbol to be pre-read is generated in a state where is 2 or the case where the special game to be pre-read is generated in the state where the number of hold times of the unit game of the special symbol is 4 or more, May also be configured to give a countdown notice in the same manner. Further, a countdown notice may be provided when a special symbol to be prefetched and a winning start occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is two.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit, the lamp change display is performed for a predetermined change display time on the lottery result display device 730, and then the lamps 730A to 730D are turned on. Since the lottery result of the hold full effect lottery is notified by the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suitably amplify the sense of expectation for the execution of the hold full effect in the period in which the ramp fluctuation display is executed. .

  In particular, the position of the stop-displayed lamp is different between the case where the appearance of the hold full effect is selected and the case where the appearance of the hold full effect is not selected in the hold full effect lottery, The user can easily and intuitively determine whether or not the appearance of the held full effect has been selected based on the position of the stop-displayed lamp. In addition, since the stop display for reporting the lottery result of the holding full tank production lottery is performed within the range of the lamps 730A to 730D constituting the lottery result display device 730, the player's line of sight is It is difficult to disperse, and the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result display device 730 displays the lottery result of the hold full tank production lottery, a stop display (that is, the display of the lottery result of the hold full tank production lottery) is performed. The timing is configured to deviate from the reach production period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 from being performed during an effect that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a suggestion effect performed during the reach effect period. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player's interest on the effects such as the suggestion effects performed during the reach effect period, so that the player's expectation of the fluctuation display during the execution by the suggestion effects is appropriately improved. Can be done. In addition, since the display time of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 does not overlap with the display time of the suggestion effect, the player misses the lottery result of the held full tank effect lottery displayed by the lottery result display device 730. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a second sub-symbol precursor notice, after the loss symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, it is displayed before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target. In the variable display performed on the left and right, the variable display of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is performed while the middle reel 711M is stopped, so that the player can change the left and right reels 711L and 711R. By the start of the display, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target that comes after that.

  In particular, the middle reel 711M, which has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, starts to fluctuate in synchronization with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. It strongly impresses that the end time of the variable display of the prefetch target (that is, the display of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target) is approaching, thereby further increasing the expectation of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target. be able to.

  Also, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the middle reel 711M stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R is synchronized with the subsequent formation of the reach display on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Therefore, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the middle reel 711M that fluctuates in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, and it is possible to appropriately increase the expectation of the lottery result for the fluctuation display of the prefetch target. .

  In the second sub-symbol advance notice, the second sub-symbol 713B that is continuously stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target constitutes a big hit symbol. Since the symbol is not displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target, that is, before the variable display of the prefetch target is performed. .

  Further, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, in the fluctuation display prior to the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, a part of the symbol that does not constitute the big hit symbol, such as the second sub-symbol 713B, is a middle symbol row of the middle line L2 ( On the middle reel 711M), the variable display is continued for the entire period of the variable display, so that the player recognizes that the big hit symbol is not displayed on the middle line L2 in the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target, and thereby, thereafter, Can be further increased in expectation for the variable display of the look-ahead to be read.

  In particular, in the second sub-symbol advance notice, the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 is the second sub-symbol 713B provided solely on the middle reel 711M among the sub-symbols 713. Therefore, it is easy to attract the player's attention, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-symbol predictor notice has started. Further, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice of the present embodiment, the second sub-symbol 713B is a middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 located at the center among the plurality of activated lines L1, L2, L3. In this regard, it is also easy to attract the player's attention in this respect, and to make the player easily aware that the second sub-symbol predictor notice has been started.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the countdown notice, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, the number of variable displays performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is set to the middle reel 711M. The player counts down by the number included in the main symbol 712 of the main symbol 712, so that the player visually recognizes the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M in the variable display during execution until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed thereafter. It is possible to grasp the number of times of the variable display to be executed. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target that gradually approaches.

  Further, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is performed is performed by changing the main symbol 712 of the reel for displaying the decorative symbols (the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713) in a variable manner. Since the countdown is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

  Also, in the countdown notice, the middle reel 711M, which counts down the number of times of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is executed, is stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since the reel to be performed (middle reel 711M) is easily distinguished from other reels (left and right reels 711L and 711R), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a plate-shaped member having a light transmitting property (light transmitting property), and the characteristic of the base 401 is used to make the game entertain. Ingenuity has been applied. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the display area of reel device 710 exceeds the display area of reel device 710 by using a display area in which reel apparatus 710 can be visually recognized in a front view and an outer portion thereof using substrate 401 having light transmittance. A school of fish as an example of the luminous display for an effect displayed as follows will be described. FIG. 30A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device 710 in the gaming board 400X, and FIG. 30B is a simplified main configuration of the gaming board 400X along the line AA in FIG. FIG. FIG. 31A is a simplified cross-sectional view of a main configuration including the reel device 710 taken along the line BB of FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is a front view for explaining the fish school displayed by it.

  30 (a), 30 (b), and 31 (b), illustration of the central structure 420 is omitted. In FIG. 30B, for reference, a part of the nail 411 provided on the base 401 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. 223 is indicated by a dashed line. In FIG. 31A, the rear plate 223 is shown by a dashed line for reference. Also, in FIGS. 30B and 31A, hatching of the cross section is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a light-transmitting flat plate-shaped member. As shown in FIG. 30A, an opening 401D that forms an opening to which the central structure 420 is attached is formed in the base 401. The central structure 420 is made of a resin material having a light-transmitting property so that a part of the fish school displayed on the back side is attached by being fitted into the opening 401D from the front so as to be visible. In FIG. 30, illustration is omitted.

  On the front surface of the base 401, a picture pattern 741 of a fish constituting a part of a school of fish (a school of fish) facing leftward is drawn in various sizes on the left and right sides with respect to the reel device 710. It is drawn by printing colored paint having light properties. The fish pattern 741 drawn on the base 401 includes a pattern partially cut off by the periphery (edge) of the opening 401D, like the pattern 741A.

  The base 701 disposed on the back side of the gaming board 400 is also configured as a light-transmitting flat plate-like member, similarly to the base 401. As shown in FIG. 30A, a part of a school of fish facing the left side together with the fish drawn by the picture 741, on the front side of the base 701, inside the opening 401D and on the left and right sides with respect to the reel device 710. Are drawn in various sizes.

  The fish pattern 742 drawn on the base 701 is, like the pattern 742A, a part of the fish itself, but is paired with the pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) which is partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D. It also includes a picture that constitutes one fish when viewed from the front.

  Also, the fish pattern 742 drawn on the base 701 includes a pattern partially cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710, such as the patterns 742B, 742C, and 742D. In addition, the pattern 742B drawn on the left side of the resin cover 715 and the pattern 742D drawn on the right side of the resin cover 715 may be one side and the other side of the pattern in which one fish is divided into right and left, Thereby, it can be displayed to the player easily that the pattern expresses a fish school as an integrated object continuously in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, a panel light emitting device 490A, which is a part of the panel light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the base 401. The panel light emitting device 490A is arranged such that the light emitting means E1 such as an LED can emit light toward the front where the base 401 is located. Therefore, by turning on (emitting) the light emitting means E1 disposed on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base 401, the pattern 741 floating in the light can be displayed.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the base 701, a panel light emitting device 490B, which is a part of the panel light emitting device 490, is provided. The panel light-emitting device 490B includes a light-emitting means E2 such as an LED or the like and a light-emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31A) directed to the base 701. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E2 disposed on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base 701, the pattern 742 floating in the light can be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, between the opening 401D of the base 401 and the peripheral edge of the base 701, a light-transmitting plate-shaped member extending in the front-rear direction substantially perpendicular to the bases 401 and 701 is provided. Side wall portion 702 is provided. On the surface of the side wall portion 702 (the surface facing the inside of the opening 401D), a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and a pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742A) paired with the pattern 741 ) Are drawn (not shown). Thus, it is possible to prevent the fish constituted by the combination of the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 from being cut off by the step between the base 401 and the base 701.

  A panel light emitting device 490C, which is a part of the panel light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the side wall portion 702 (outside the opening 401D). The panel light-emitting device 490C includes a light-emitting unit E3 such as an LED provided to be able to irradiate light toward the side wall 702. Therefore, by turning on the light-emitting means E3 disposed on the back side of the region where the pattern is drawn on the side wall portion 702, the pattern floating in the light can be displayed.

  The resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is a light-transmitting (light-transmitting) cover that covers the front side of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. As shown in FIG. 31A, the resin cover 715 of this embodiment is formed in an arc shape whose side cross section is curved along the cross section of each reel such as the middle reel 711M. The resin cover 715 includes a light-transmitting outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701, and a light guide plate 715B disposed on the rear side of the outer cover 715A.

  In the light guide plate 715B, a fish pattern 743 constituting a part of a fish school facing left is formed by fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the rear surface side) of a resin plate having light transmittance. The light emitting means E4 such as an LED provided on the panel light emitting device 490B is arranged along the upper end of the light guide plate 715B along the upper end thereof, and along the lower end of the light guide plate 715B below the lower end thereof. Are arranged.

  When the light emitting unit E4 is not turned on, the light guide plate 715B allows the back side to be viewed from the front side, and the player can use the resin cover 715 (the outer cover 715A and the light guide plate 715B) as shown in FIG. , The reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be visually recognized. On the other hand, when the light emitting means E4 is turned on, the light emitted from the light emitting means E4 enters the upper and lower ends of the light guide plate 715B, whereby the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) is placed on the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715). As shown in (b), a picture 743 of a fish constituting a part of the fish school is displayed.

  The fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B is a pattern in which only a part of the fish is drawn by itself, like the patterns 743B and 743C, but is partially cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715. 742 (for example, pictures 742B and 742C) and a picture which constitutes one fish when viewed from the front is also included.

  A pattern 743 such as the patterns 743B and 743C, which constitute one fish in combination with the pattern 742 partially cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715, is a predetermined pattern below the top of the resin cover 715 located at the forefront. Are formed so as to be displayed within the range of the regions R1 and R2.

  Note that the “predetermined region” is, for example, two-fifths of the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the top of the resin cover 715 (the top of the outer cover 715A) and the upper and lower ends of the outer cover 715A. It is a lower region, preferably a region below 1/2 from the top side in the elevation difference, and may be a region below 3/5 from the top side in the elevation difference. The end of the “predetermined region” on the side of the base 701 may or may not be in contact with the base 701, but is preferably in contact with the base 701.

  Since the regions R1 and R2 are closer to the surface (front surface) of the base 701 than to the vicinity of the top of the resin cover 715, the patterns 742 (for example, the patterns 742B, 742C) and a pattern 743 (for example, the patterns 743B and 743C) paired with the pattern 742 can be kept low. Therefore, since the distortion when the pair of the patterns 742 and 743 are viewed from the front can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for the fish pattern formed by the pair of the pattern 742 and the pattern 743 to feel uncomfortable.

  Here, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 has a shape that protrudes in an arc shape toward the front side when viewed from the side, and the light guide plate 715B (the resin cover 715) also has the respective reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. Is formed in a shape that bulges in a circular arc shape toward the front side along the shape of the surface. For this reason, each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711M, 711M is positioned so as to be located between the base 401 forming the game area in which the game ball flows down and the transparent plate (rear plate 223) located on the front side thereof or near the front thereof. Even if the front ends of the light guide plate 715B and the light guide plate 715B (the resin cover 715) are arranged, the upper and lower ends of the display area of the reel device 710 that can be visually recognized in a front view are shifted behind the front surface of the base 401. It will be. The base 701 is arranged in a plane so as to be substantially the same front and rear ends as the upper and lower ends of a display area visible in a front view of the reel device 710, and thereby the fish displayed on the light guide plate 715B. The sense of unity of the picture 743 and the picture 742 displayed on the base 701 can be expressed, and the symbols of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R located inside the base 701 when viewed from the player side are displayed on the base 701. It can be displayed in an emphasized manner in comparison with the picture 742 to be displayed, and the result of the success or failure can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to turning on the light emitting means E4 to display the fish pattern 743 on the light guide plate 715B, by turning on the light emitting means E1 to E3, the fish school which faces to the left is The image can be displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. At this time, by controlling the lighting timing of the light emitting units E1 to E4, it is possible to perform an effect in which the school of fish moves from right to left in a wide area sandwiching the reel device 710.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of a configuration in which a player can visually recognize a flowing path of a game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

  FIG. 32A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower starting winning devices 1431 and 1432 in the gaming board 400X of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 32 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 400X taken along the line CC of FIG. 32 (a), and FIG. 32 (c) is a top view of FIG. 32 (a) as viewed from above. FIG. 32D is a diagram showing how the vicinity of the information display unit 753 looks when a player who is playing the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment views the lower left direction obliquely.

  In FIG. 32A, the distribution unit 1620 is schematically illustrated. In FIG. 32 (c), the right side portion of the upper starting winning device 1431 is omitted, and the upper surfaces of the guide passage 1612, the first passages 1613A and 1613B, and the second subsidiary passage 1614A are omitted.

  In addition, in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the nails 411 are illustrated, except for the nails 411A (part of the nails 411) arranged in a lower right direction from the upper side of the left information display portion 753 in the game machine front view. And the illustration of the lower starting winning device 1432 is omitted. In FIG. 32 (b), for reference, one of the nails 411A is illustrated including a portion buried in the base 401, and the other nail 411A is a portion protruding to the front side of the base 401. The back plate 223 is shown by a one-dot chain line. In FIG. 32 (c), for reference, a portion of the nail 411A protruding to the front side of the base 401 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is shown by a one-dot chain line.

  32 (b) and 32 (c), for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is shown, and a part of the game ball in the upper starting prize device 1431 is shown. Are shown by arrows.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 of the game board 400X, a game ball which has entered the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611 to the distribution unit 1620. A first passage 1613A, 1613B on the left and right where game balls distributed by the distribution unit 1620 flow, and second passages 1614A, 1614B branched from the first left and right passages 1613A, 1613B, respectively. Is provided.

  Each of these passages 1612, 1613A, 1613B, 1614A, 1614B is formed by a passage forming member 1631 provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401, as shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c). You. The passage forming member 1631 is made of a resin having a light transmitting property.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the guide passage 1612 penetrates the base 401 so as to guide the game ball (for example, the game ball P1) entered from the entrance 1611 to the back side of the base 401. A path that guides the game ball downward above the distribution unit 1620 after being guided from the formed opening 401C to a position above the distribution unit 1620 to the rear side (rearward side).

  The game balls that have passed through the guide passage 1612 are used for distribution by the distribution unit 1620. Note that the distribution unit 1620 corresponds to the distribution unit of the upper starting winning device 1431 in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. That is, the distribution unit 1620 alternately switches the distribution destination each time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611, similarly to the distribution unit 620.

  Specifically, the distribution unit 1620 transfers the game ball guided by the guide passage 1612 to the left first passage 1613A located on the left side with respect to the distribution unit 1620 in the gaming machine front view, or the gaming machine front view. It is alternately distributed to the right first passage 1613B located on the right side with respect to the distribution unit 1620.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the left first passage 1613A is an upstream passage 1613A1 that constitutes an upstream passage in the left first passage 1613A, and a game ball that has passed through the upstream passage 1613A1 will be described later. And a downstream passage 1613A2 through which game balls that have not entered the second left passage 1614A flow.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the upstream passage 1613A1 guides the game balls (for example, the game balls P2) distributed to the left side by the distribution unit 1620 to the left side and then to the back side (rear side). It is a passage that guides, and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction (vertically from the front to the back in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32C, the downstream passage 1613A2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the left second passage 1614A branched from the upstream passage 1613A1. The downstream passage 1613A2 guides the game ball guided substantially vertically downward by the upstream passage 1613A1 to the collection / discharge passage (not shown) after being continuously guided substantially vertically downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C, the left second passage 1614A is a passage that is formed by branching leftward at a portion of the upstream passage 1613A1 that extends downward. The left second passage 1614A guides a game ball (for example, a game ball P3) entered from the left first passage 1613A (upstream passage 1613A1) to the left, and then guides the ball substantially vertically downward like the game ball P4. Then, it is guided to the collection and discharge passage.

  The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the second left passage 1614A is much lower than the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613A2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the left start winning switch 1441A is provided so as to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613A2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the downstream passage 1613A2 from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is detected by the left start winning switch 1441A.

  Therefore, the game ball distributed to the left first passage 1613A by the distribution unit 1620 enters the left starting winning device 1431A by passing through the downstream passage 1613A2, is detected by the left starting winning switch 1441A, and is detected by the first special winning switch 1441A. The winning start of the symbol.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the left second passage 1614A from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is not detected by the left start winning switch 1441A. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the second passage 1614A on the left without entering the downstream passage 1613A2, the first special symbol does not win.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32A, the right first passage 1613B includes an upstream passage 1613B1 constituting an upstream passage of the right first passage 1613B, and a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1. A downstream passage 1613B2 through which a game ball that has not entered the second right passage 1614B described below flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, the upstream passage 1613B1 guides the game balls distributed to the right side by the distribution unit 1620 to the right side, and then goes to the back side (rear side) similarly to the upstream side passage 1613A1. , And then a path that is guided substantially vertically downward.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the downstream passage 1613B2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the second right passage 1614B that branches off from the upstream passage 1613B1. The downstream passage 1613B2 guides the game ball guided substantially vertically downward by the upstream passage 1613B1 to the collection / discharge passage after being continuously guided substantially vertically downward.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the right-side second passage 1614B is a passage formed to branch rightward at a portion of the upstream passage 1613B1 extending downward. The second right passage 1614B guides the game ball that has entered from the first right passage 1613B (upstream passage 1613B1) to the right, then to the substantially vertical downward direction, and then to the collection and discharge passage.

  The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the second right passage 1614B is extremely lower than the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613B2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the right start winning switch 1441B is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613B2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters the downstream passage 1613B2 from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is detected by the right start winning switch 1441B.

  Accordingly, the game ball distributed to the right first passage 1613B by the distribution unit 1620 enters the right starting winning device 1431B by passing through the downstream passage 1613B2, is detected by the right starting winning switch 1441B, and is detected by the second special winning switch 1441B. The winning start of the symbol.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters the right second passage 1614B from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is not detected by the right start winning switch 1441B. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B without entering the downstream passage 1613B2, the winning of the second special symbol is not obtained.

  A region J in the base 401 corresponds to a range surrounded by a thick line in FIG. 32A, and in this range, an image such as the above-described pattern 741 is not drawn, but a region where an image or the like is drawn. It is configured as a region where the visibility when viewing the rear side from the front side is higher than that of the area. As shown in FIG. 32A, the region J includes the entire left and right upstream passages 1613A1 and 1613B1 and the front side of each of the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 and a part of the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B. Is provided at a position overlapping with.

  As described above, since the passage forming member 1631 forming each of the passages 1613A1, 1613B1, 1613A2, 1613B2, 1614A, and 1614B is made of a resin having a light transmitting property, the player can enter the upper starting winning device from the entrance 1611. The flowing path of the game ball that has entered 1431 can be visually recognized through the region J of the base 401.

  Therefore, when the game ball enters the entrance 1611, the player visually recognizes the flowing path of the game ball through the area J of the base 401, and the game ball can be moved to the left or right by the distribution unit 1620. , And whether the vehicle has entered a passage in which a special symbol starting prize is generated (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32A, information display portions 751 to 754 for notifying a player of a characteristic area on the game board 400X are provided.

  The information display section 751 is provided near the entrance 1611 on the front surface of the upper starting winning device 1431. The character string “IN” is displayed on the surface of the information display section 751. Therefore, the player can recognize that the area in which the game ball has entered is the entrance 1611 of the upper starting winning device 1431 by looking at the character string of “IN”. That is, the character string of “IN” displayed on the information display unit 751 allows the player to recognize that the area to which the information display unit 751 is attached (that is, the entrance 1611) is the entrance of the upper starting winning device 1431. Function (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “start-up prize device entrance information”).

  The information display portion 752 is provided on the front surface of the base 401 so as to overlap with a position near the branch position between the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 with the second passages 1614A and 1614B. A character string of “lucky” is displayed on the surface of the information display section 752.

  Therefore, the player sees the character string “lucky”, and the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) starts the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It can be recognized that this is a winning area. That is, the character string of “lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752 indicates that the area to which the information display unit 752 is attached (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) starts the special symbol when the game ball enters. It functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “start-up winning area information”) by which the player can recognize that the area is where a winning occurs.

  The information display portion 753 is formed of a passage wall constituting a passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A, 1614B in the passage forming member 1631 so as to slightly overlap the entrances of the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B. It is provided on the back side of a passage wall (for example, passage wall portion 1631A in FIG. 32 (c)) on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front. The character string “OUT” is displayed on the surface of the information display section 753.

  Therefore, the player can recognize that the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the second passages 1614A and 1614B) has entered the area where the special symbol does not become the starting prize by seeing the character string of “OUT”. . That is, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 indicates that the area to which the information display unit 753 is attached (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B) has a special design even if the game ball enters. This function functions as information that allows the player to recognize that the area does not cause the start winning (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “non-start winning area information”).

  The information display unit 754 is provided on the front surface of the lower start winning device 1432 so as to overlap the game ball that has entered the lower start winning device 1432 with the opening 1432A for guiding the back side (rear side) of the base 401. A character string “GO” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 754.

  Since the game ball that has entered the opening 1432A is detected by the lower start winning switch 1442, the player sees the character string “GO”, and the area in which the game ball has entered is the start winning prize of the second special symbol. Can be recognized. That is, the character string “GO” displayed on the information display unit 754 functions as start winning prize area information similar to “lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752.

  Of the information display sections 751 to 754, on the surface of the information display sections 751, 752, and 754, information that gives the player an expectation for the start winning of the special symbol, such as the start winning device entrance information and the start winning area information, is provided. Is displayed. The information display portions 751, 752, 754 are provided at positions such as the upper and lower starting prize winning devices 1431, 1432 and the front surface of the base 401 so that the player can directly view them via the front plate 222 and the rear plate 223.

  Therefore, since the information display portions 751, 752, and 754 are arranged at positions that are relatively easy to be visually recognized, when a game ball enters a region corresponding to each of the information display portions 751, 752, and 754, a special feature held by the player is provided. It is possible to suitably amplify the expectation for the winning of the symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), five nails 411A lined down to the right are arranged from the upper side to the right side of the left information display portion 753. As shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the left information display portion 753 is provided in any of a vertical range and a horizontal range in which these five nails 411A are arranged. It is also provided to fit.

  When the nail 411A is erected in such an arrangement with respect to the left information display unit 753, when a player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 obliquely looks in the lower left direction while playing a game, As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the player sees the left information display portion 753 overlapping the rear side of the five nails 411A.

  Accordingly, the visibility of the left information display portion 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping the front side. On the surface of the information display section 753, information such as a character string of “OUT” (that is, non-start winning area information) that reduces a player's expectation for starting winning of a special symbol is displayed. Since the visibility of the information display portion 753 is impaired by the nail 411A, the impression of the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 hardly remains for the player.

  Even when the game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 enters the area corresponding to the information display portion 753 (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B), a special symbol starting winning does not occur. This can prevent the information display unit 753 from strongly impressing the player. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the discourage of the player for the fact that the game ball has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 but the special symbol has not been started.

  As for the right information display portion 753, similarly to the left information display portion 753, five nails 411B arranged in the lower left direction are arranged from the upper side to the left side of the information display portion 753 (FIG. 32 (a)). )), The information display section 753 is provided so as to be included in any of the vertical range and the horizontal range in which the five nails 411B are arranged.

  Therefore, when the player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 obliquely looks in the lower right direction during the game, the right information display unit 753 is provided to the player after the five nails 411B. Since the information display portion 753 appears to overlap on the side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side. As a result, similarly to the case of the above-described information display section 753 on the left side, it is possible to suppress the discourage of the player for the fact that the winning of the special symbol has not been won.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32A, in each of the left and right information display portions 753, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the surface thereof has a nail 411A or a nail 411B corresponding to each information display portion 753. Are arranged along the arrangement direction. That is, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the left information display portion 753 is arranged in the lower right like the arrangement of the nails 411A, and the character string of “OUT” displayed on the right information display portion 753 is , Like the nails 411B.

  Thus, by arranging the character strings displayed on the information display portion 753 along the arrangement direction of the nails 411A or 411B, for example, as shown in FIG. Since it is possible to overlap the nail 411A on the rear side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 can be suitably reduced.

  Further, since the information display portion 753 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 as shown in FIG. 32C, the visibility of the information display portion 753 viewed through the base 401 is: The visibility is lower than the visibility of the information display portions 751, 752, 754 which can be visually recognized without the intervention of the base 401.

  In particular, in front of the information display portion 753, not only the base 401 but also a passage wall portion such as the passage wall portion 1631A, which constitutes a passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B, and the front and rear in the front view of the gaming machine. , The visibility of the information display portion 753 is further reduced.

  Therefore, since the base 401 and the passage wall portion 1631A overlap the front side of the information display portion 753, the impression of the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 hardly remains in the impression. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress discouragement of the player in a case where the first special symbol does not result in the start winning prize even though the game ball has entered the upper starting prize winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the upstream passage 1613A1 is configured as a passage for guiding the game ball to the left and then to the back, so that the passage wall forming the left end of the upstream passage 1613A1. The portion 1631B is configured as a wall surface that is substantially perpendicular to the base 401 and extends in the up-down direction. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage wall portion 1631B is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the left information display portion 753 in the field of view of the player obliquely looking at the lower left direction, so that the information display portion 753 can be viewed. The performance is hindered by the passage wall portion 1631B overlapping the front side. Therefore, also in this respect, since the impression of the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 is less likely to remain in the player, it is more preferable for the player to be discouraged that the special symbol has not been activated. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a continuous school of fish facing left is displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. Since the fish school can be displayed by using only the light guide plate 715B of the resin cover 715, the effect of displaying the school of fish can be more impressive.

  In particular, since the base 701 is also configured to display the picture 742 constituting a part of a continuous school of fish facing leftward, the opening 401D of the base 401 and the light guide plate are provided like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Even when a structural gap is generated between the light guide plate 715B and the light guide plate 715B, the discontinuity that occurs between the pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 741 displayed on the base 401 is reduced by the pattern 742. I can make up for it. Thereby, the effect by the school of fish displayed beyond the display area by the light guide plate 715B can be realized as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

  In addition, since one fish with the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 is displayed at the boundary between the periphery of the opening 401D in the base 401 and the base 701 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a series of fish schools facing leftward is displayed. It is possible to suppress the nature from becoming unnatural at the boundary. Similarly, since one fish with the design 743 and the design 742 is displayed at the boundary between the light guide plate 715B and the base 701 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the continuity of the fish school facing leftward is the same. Unnaturalness at the boundary can also be suppressed.

  In addition, a pattern (not shown) connecting the pattern 741 partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and the pattern 742 paired with the pattern 741 is also displayed on the side wall portion 702. The discontinuity in the height direction (front-back direction) due to the difference in height between the base and the base 701 can be compensated for by the picture displayed on the side wall 702. Therefore, the unnaturalness due to the discontinuity in the effect by the fish school which is continuous toward the left can be more suitably suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left or lower right direction is different from the nails 411A and 411B that overlap the front side of the information display unit 753. Or the passage wall 1631A or the passage wall 1631B, so that the player does not win a special symbol even though the game ball has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611. Disappointment can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the information display unit 753 is provided at a position where the nails 411A and 411B do not overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, when the information display unit 753 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the word “OUT” is displayed. It can be sufficiently viewed. Therefore, the information display unit 753 indicates that, for a player viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the area to which the information display unit 753 is attached is an area where a special symbol start winning does not occur even if a game ball enters. Can be suitably reported.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, half mirrors 761A and 761B capable of reflecting light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the like are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33A is a front view of a reel device 710 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device 710 taken along line DD in FIG. . FIG. 33C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 100 cut in a vertical direction at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 33D shows the pressing operation device 261 and the wave motion. It is a top view of the lamp 771.

  33B, illustration of the light guide plate 715B and the panel light emitting device 490B is omitted. FIG. 33C also shows the island 10 on which the pachinko machine 100 is installed. In FIG. 33C, the head of the player X during the game is shown for reference, and the optical path of the light emitted by the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and the pressing operation device 261 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Is shown in FIG. 33B and 33C, cross-section hatching is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, one surface of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 (in this embodiment, the front side of the outer cover 715 </ b> A) is one of the effective lines arranged in the vertical direction. A half mirror 761A and a half mirror 761B are provided above and below the display area of the middle line, respectively, while leaving the display area of the middle line. Although the resin cover 715 of this embodiment has a configuration including the light guide plate 715B (not shown in FIG. 33B), it may be a simple transparent cover without the light guide plate 715B.

  The half mirrors 761A and 761B are semi-transmissive mirrors that transmit light from the back side (rear side) of the resin cover 715 to the front while reflecting light from the front side (front side) of the resin cover 715. Can be. In addition, as the half mirrors 761A and 761B, a transparent plate on which aluminum is deposited can be used as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is configured as a hollow cylindrical body having a transparent decorative pattern drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R has a common internal configuration. Hereinafter, the internal structure of the middle reel 711M will be representatively described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33B, inside the middle reel 711M, three light emitting devices 718A to 718C for irradiating light from inside to a region visible from the resin cover 715 on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. Is provided.

  Among the light emitting devices 718A to 718C, the light emitting device 718A disposed at the uppermost position is a light emitting device that irradiates light to an upper line region of the symbol effective lines on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. A light emitting means E6 such as an LED or the like directed slightly upward is provided. By turning on (light emitting) the light emitting means E6, the symbols located on the upper line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M can be displayed by light emission.

  On the other hand, the lowermost light emitting device 718C is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the lower line in the effective line, and includes a light emitting unit E8 such as an LED slightly forward-facing downward. I have. By turning on the light-emitting means E8, it is possible to illuminate and display the symbol located on the lower line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M.

  The light emitting device 718B disposed between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the middle line region of the effective lines, and emits light such as an LED or the like directed substantially horizontally forward. Means E7 are provided. By turning on the light emitting means E7, of the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M, the symbol located on the middle line can be displayed by light emission.

  Lighting (light emission) and light-off of these light emitting devices 718A to 718C are independently controlled by the sub control board 940. Therefore, the symbol located on the upper line, the symbol located on the middle line, and the symbol located on the lower line can be independently lit and displayed.

  A partition wall 719A is provided between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B. The partition wall 719A prevents light emitted from the light emitting device 718A (light emitting means E6) from entering the area of the middle line, and light from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) enters the area of the upper line. It has a function to prevent that.

  In addition, a partition wall 719B is provided between the light emitting device 718B and the light emitting device 718C. The partition wall 719B prevents light emitted from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the lower line area, and light from the light emitting device 718C (light emitting means E8) enters the middle line area. It has a function to prevent that.

  When the light emitting device 718A is turned on (emit light), the half mirror 761A provided above the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting unit E6 forward, so that the symbol located on the upper line is displayed. It becomes visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718A or the like is turned off, the half mirror 761A at that position becomes a mirror on the front side (front side) because light is no longer irradiated from the back side (rear side), thereby causing the front side (rear side) to become a mirror. Side).

  Similarly, when the light emitting device 718C is turned on, the half mirror 761B provided below the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting unit E8 forward, and thereby the symbol located on the lower line. Becomes visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718C or the like is turned off, the half mirror 761B at that position does not emit light from the back side (rear side), so that the front side (front side) becomes a mirror, thereby, the front side (rear side). Side).

  As shown in FIG. 33C, the resin cover 715 that covers the front side of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R protrudes forward from the base 701 in an arc shape in a side sectional view. Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided along the surface of the resin cover 715 (outer cover 715A) on the upper portion and the lower portion of the resin cover 715, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side includes the light emitting device. When 718A or the like is turned off, it functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and upward in a side sectional view. When the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper portion of the resin cover 715 is separated from the upper central frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper central edge 211A of the front decoration 210 (see FIG. 5). The emitted light is reflected, and the reflected light is provided at a position where the player playing the game can visually recognize the reflected light. Thereby, when the upper central frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the emitted image G1 of the upper central frame light emitting device 271 reflected on the half mirror 761A, as shown in FIG. .

  The pressing operation device 261 of the present embodiment is configured to be turned on (emit light) or turned off under the control of the sub-control board 940. That is, in the pressing operation device 261, the operation unit pressed and operated by the player is configured as a light-emitting unit having a light-transmitting property, and a light-emitting unit such as an LED provided on the back side of the light-emitting unit is provided with Lighting or extinguishing is performed by controlling by 940.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player playing the game. It is provided in a suitable position. Thereby, when the pressing operation device 261 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light-emitting image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33D, wave lamps 771 are provided on the left and right of the pressing operation device 261. The wave lamp 771 includes three lamps 771A to 771C arranged outward from the side of the pressing operation device 261. Each of the lamps 771A to 771C constituting the wave lamp 771 is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and is controlled by the sub-control board 940 to overlap the front side of the light emitting means. The light-emitting portion having a light-transmitting property is configured to be turned on or off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761AB provided on the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the wave lamp 771 (the lamps 771A to 771C), and reflects the reflected light during the game. It is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize it. Thus, when the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the emitted image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG.

  Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are not arranged in the display area of the middle line in the resin cover 715, the light emitting device 718B and the like are always turned on, so that the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are located in the middle line. The symbol can be always visually recognized by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 33C, the hold lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side (the side closer to the base 701) of the lower half mirror 761B. Since the lower half mirror 761B is formed as a convex surface that faces forward and lower in a side cross-sectional view, the light of the holding lamp 720 is easily reflected downward by the half mirror 761B, and is hardly seen by the player.

  Therefore, the visibility of the image G2 (the image of the pressing operation device 261) and the image G3 (the image of the wave lamp 771) reflected on the half mirror 761B can be suppressed from being hindered by the image of the hold lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B. .

  Further, while the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are located on the lower front side of the resin cover 715, the holding lamp 720 is located on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761 </ b> B and the pressing operation device 261. It is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the wave lamp 771.

  Therefore, while the image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 and the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 can be visually recognized in the front area (the area on the top of the resin cover 715) of the half mirror 761B, the holding lamp 720 that can be visually recognized by the player. Is limited to the rear end side of the half mirror 761B. Therefore, even when the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B is visually recognized by the player, the image of the holding lamp 720 hardly hinders the visibility of the images G2 and G3.

  Although not shown in FIG. 33C, the lottery result display device 730 is also located on the rear end side (the side closer to the base 701) of the lower half mirror 761B, similarly to the hold lamp 720. Since it is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, the visibility of the images G2 and G3 is hardly hindered by the image of the lottery result display device 730 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, substantially along the circumferential direction of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. A circular partition 717 is provided. The partition portion 717 is fixedly provided so as not to rotate independently of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and a reel side lamp 717A is provided in a region on the front side of the partition portion 717 which is on the back side of the half mirror 761B. Is provided.

  The reel side lamp 717A is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED at the back side thereof, and the light emitting means is controlled by the sub-control board 940, so that the light transmitting means overlaps the front side of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit as the lamp 717A is configured to be turned on or off.

  In the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is, for example, a color (same color, specific color) corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at a timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. ). Since the reel side lamp 717A is provided on the back side of the half mirror 761B, when the reel side lamp 717A is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light of the reel side lamp 717A transmitted through the half mirror 761B.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper half mirror 761A serving as a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and upward in a side sectional view reflects light emitted from the upper central frame light emitting device 271 and reflects the reflected light. The game player is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize the game. Therefore, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A, and does not shift the line of sight to the upper center frame light emitting device 271. 271 can be recognized, and the color of the light emitted from the upper center frame light emitting device 271 can be recognized.

  The frame light emitting device provided on the upper center edge portion 211A such as the upper center frame light emitting device 271 may emit light as a part of the suggestive effect performed during the period in which the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the display of the decorative symbol, even if the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is emitted as a part of the suggested effect, The player can recognize the light emitting state of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 from the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A while watching the display of the change of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the lower half mirror 761B, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and lower in a side sectional view, reflects light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, and reflects the reflected light during the game during the game. It is provided in a position that can be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player visually looks at the image G2 or the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B, and shifts his / her eyes to the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. In addition, it is possible to recognize that the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 emit light, and in what color the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 emit light.

  The pressing operation device 261 may emit light in synchronization with an operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated or a notification period in which the operable period is reported before the operable period. As the operable period, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to display a special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to perform volume adjustment, This includes a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to change the music played during the game.

  Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the variable display of the decorative symbol, even if the pressing operation device 261 emits light during the variable display of the decorative symbol, The user can recognize the light emission state of the pressing operation device 261 from the image G2 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the change display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation time (operable time) of the pressing operation device 261 without noticing the light emission of the pressing operation device 261.

  Similarly to the pressing operation device 261, the wave lamp 771 may emit light in synchronization with the operable period of the pressing operation device 261 or the notification period for the operable period. However, even when the wave lamp 771 is illuminated during the decorative pattern change display, the player recognizes the light emitting state of the wave lamp 771 from the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the decorative pattern change display. It is possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the pressing operation device 261 without noticing the emission of the wave lamp 771.

  Further, regardless of the operation time of the pressing operation device 261, even when the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are illuminated as a part of the suggestion effect, the player can watch the half-mirror while watching the change display of the decorative symbol. The suggested effect can be recognized by visually recognizing the image G2 or the image G3 reflected in the image 761B.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A sets the color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at the timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Is configured to emit light. Therefore, the operation timing is notified not only by the reflected light from the half mirror 761B (that is, the images G2 and G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B) but also from the reel side lamps 717A provided between the reels that are easily noticed by the player. Since it is performed by the direct light, it is possible to more appropriately suppress the player from overlooking the notification of the operation time.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 34A is a front view of the reel device 710 in a case where the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is a basic display area, and FIG. , 711M, and 711R are front views of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is a reduced display area. FIG. 34C is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and FIG. 34D is a schematic view showing a state where the display area of the symbol row is reduced. It is a top view of the reel device 710 shown typically. In FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the gears 781 to 783 are shown as circles in which the shapes of the teeth are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, basically, the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged such that the central axes of the respective reels are on the same line. Thus, the symbol rows of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are arranged in a line in the left-right direction without overlapping each other in a basic state. Therefore, in the basic state, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured to have the width of the length W1 (the length in the left-right direction).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R moves, and as a result, FIG. As shown in (1), the width of the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is shorter than the length W1. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be reduced by operating the predetermined operation unit by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, substantially along the circumferential direction of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. A circular partition 717 is provided. The two partitions 717 support the rotation axis of the middle reel 711M so that the middle reel 711M can rotate.

  An extension 786 is provided on the rear side of one of the two partitions 717 (in this embodiment, the right partition 717), extending substantially horizontally in the rear side across the rotation axis of the middle reel 711M. . On the right side surfaces of the right partition portion 717 and the extension portion 786 (that is, the surface on the side away from the middle reel 711M), a rack gear (not shown) in which the teeth of the gear 781 are cut is provided in a substantially horizontal direction. Are formed linearly.

  The gear 781 is connected to a driving mechanism (not shown) driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940, and operates by driving control of the driving mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 781 is provided so as to mesh with the rack gear formed on the partition portion 717 and the extending portion 786, whereby the rack formed by the gear 781 and the rack gear formed on the partition portion 717 and the extending portion 786 is provided. The middle reel 711M can be moved in the front-rear direction by the and pinion mechanism.

  The left reel 711L is provided with an extension 787 extending substantially horizontally to the left from the rotation axis of the left reel 711L. On the rear side surface of the extension portion 787, a rack gear (not shown) in which the teeth of the gear 782 are cut is formed linearly in a substantially horizontal direction.

  The gear 782 is connected to a driving mechanism (not shown) driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940, and operates by driving control of the driving mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 782 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the extending portion 787, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the extending portion 787 and the gear 782 causes the left reel 711 </ b> L to rotate. Can be moved in the left-right direction.

  The right reel 711R is provided with an extension 788 extending substantially horizontally to the right from the rotation axis of the right reel 711R. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 788, a rack gear (not shown) in which the teeth of the gear 783 are cut is formed linearly in a substantially horizontal direction.

  The gear 783 is connected to a driving mechanism (not shown) driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940, and operates by the driving control of the driving mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 785 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the extending portion 788. Thus, the right reel 711R is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the extending portion 788 and the gear 783. Can be moved in the left-right direction.

  When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in a state where the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is as shown in FIG. Then, the center reel 711M moves rearward (in the direction of the arrow M1) so as to be behind the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R.

  Next, the gear 782 and the gear 783 operate, whereby the left reel 711L moves rightward (direction of arrow M2) and the right reel 711R moves leftward (direction of arrow M3). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the movement amounts of the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are substantially the same.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 34B, the left reel 711L moving rightward and the right reel 711R moving leftward display the middle reel 711M located behind these reels 711L and 711R. The area is reduced to the extent that the numeric information of the main symbol can be recognized. Therefore, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is reduced in the width direction (left-right direction).

  In the state where the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), the left and right After operating the reels 711L and 711R to open in the left-right direction, the middle reel 711M moves forward and returns to the state shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be reduced by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) by the player. Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that it is difficult to see the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  When the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is reduced, a left symbol row (left reel 711L) and a right symbol row (right reel 711R), which are the symbol rows that can constitute the reach display, are provided. , Is located on the front side of the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M), so that the reach display can be displayed with a symbol having the same size as that before the reduction of the display area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the reach display from being lost due to the reduced display area of each symbol row.

  Also, when the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the middle reel 711M moves rearward (backward) and the left and right reels 711L, 711R are almost the same in the direction in which they approach each other. It is configured to move by a distance of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center of the display area of each symbol row from moving due to reduction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from moving left or right due to the reduction in the display of the variation of the decorative symbol due to the reduction of the display area of each symbol row.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B having a curved portion is configured to be able to be suitably assembled. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400X viewed from the front side. In FIG. 35, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 mounted on the back side of the game board 400X are also shown. In FIG. 35, some of the structures disposed on the front side of the base 401 such as the inner and outer rails 402 and 403 and the nail 411 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the gaming board 400X, a drum base 801 holding a reel device 710 is provided behind the base 401. A reel device 710 including three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R is mounted on the drum base 801 from the rear side (back side) of the drum base 800. The resin cover 715 is mounted on the front side of the drum base 801 as a light guide plate unit 810 described later together with the base 701 and the like.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the drum base 801 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 35, the drum base 801 is a resin base having substantially the same outer shape as the base 401. In the drum base 801, an opening 801 </ b> A is formed at a position where the reel device 710 is mounted. The reel device 710 is mounted on the drum base 801 by inserting the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R from behind the opening 801A and fixing them with fixing members (not shown) such as screws.

  On the left and right sides of the opening 801A, a substrate 803 on which a light emitting unit 802 such as an LED is mounted is provided. The light emitting unit 802 is located behind the region where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base 401 and the region where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base 701, and can emit light toward these regions. Means. That is, the light emitting means 802 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E1 (see FIG. 30B) and the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. . The light emission of the light emitting means 802 is controlled by the sub control board 940.

  The board 803 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is one of the panel light-emitting devices 490A (see FIG. 30B) and the panel light-emitting device 490B (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. They correspond to left and right portions with respect to the reel device 710. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the illustration of the substrate corresponding to the panel light emitting device 490C (see FIG. 30B) is omitted.

  A holding unit 809 is provided below the opening 801A. The holding unit 809 includes a board (not shown) on which the holding lamp 720, the lottery result display device 730, and the like are mounted, and a light-transmitting cover that covers the front surface of the board.

  A light guide plate unit 810 is provided in front of the substrate 803 and the holding unit 809. The light guide plate unit 810 includes an outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701, a light guide plate 715B disposed on the rear side of the outer cover 715A (see FIG. 36), and a curved portion of the light guide plate 715B that is formed by bending the outer cover 715A. A pressing member 811 (see FIG. 36) capable of pressing the left and right sides of the portion, a light source unit 812 including a light emitting unit (not shown) for irradiating the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B with light, and a light guide plate 715B. And a light source unit 813 including a light emitting means 834 for irradiating light to the lower end surface of the light source.

  On both the left and right sides and the upper side of the outer cover 715A of the base 701, a picture seal 703 and a picture seal 704 on which a fish picture 742 is printed with a colored paint having translucency are attached to the front side. A light emitting unit 802 capable of irradiating light toward the picture seal 703 is located behind the picture seal 703. Further, behind the pattern seal 704, a light emitting unit 825 such as an LED arranged on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822 (see FIG. 36) of the light source unit 812 and capable of irradiating light toward the pattern seal 704 is provided. positioned.

  By turning on (light emitting) the light emitting means 802 located on the rear side of the picture sticker 703 and the light emitting means 825 located on the rear side of the picture seal 704, the picture 742 floating in the light can be displayed. . The light emitting means 825 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. The light emission of the light emitting means 825 is controlled by the sub control board 940.

  A region 701A on the back side of the position where the pattern seal 703 is affixed on the base 701 is subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) having fine irregularities. Although not shown in FIG. 37 and FIGS. 39 and 40 to be described later, the light diffusion processing similar to that of the region 701A is also applied to the region on the back side of the sticking position of the pattern seal 703 on the base 701. By performing such light diffusion processing, the entire area of the pattern seal 703 or the pattern seal 704 can be illuminated by irradiation light from the light emitting unit 802 or the light emitting unit 825.

  As shown in FIG. 35, on the upper front side of the light guide plate unit 810, a substrate 806 on which a light emitting means 804 such as an LED and a light emitting means 805 are mounted is provided. The light emitting unit 804 is a light emitting unit that is located behind the upper portion of the central structure 420 and emits light forward. The light emitting unit 805 is a light emitting unit that is located on the rear side of the upper portion of the base structure 401 above the central structure 420 and emits light forward. The light emission of these light emitting means 804 and 805 is controlled by the sub-control board 940. On the front side of the substrate 806, a lens 807 for diffusing light emitted from the light emitting means 804, 805 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the light guide plate unit 810 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the front side. 39 and 40 are exploded perspective views of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. 38 and 40, illustration of screws 871A, 871B, 872A, 872B, 881A, 881B, 882A, 882B, 896 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, an outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701 is disposed in front of the light guide plate unit 810. The front surface of the outer cover 715A has a curved portion 715A1 that curves along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and a side portion 715A2 that is provided between the left and right ends of the curved portion 715A1 and the base 701. Is provided.

  A region 715A3 on which light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) having fine unevenness is performed is provided on a lower portion of a rear surface (a back surface) of the curved portion 715A1 (a surface facing the reel device 710). 39 (see FIG. 39). Similarly to the region 715A3, a band-like region (not shown) that has been subjected to light diffusion processing and has fine irregularities is provided on the upper surface of the curved portion 715A1 on the rear surface.

  A region 715A3 formed on the lower side of the curved portion 715A1 and a band-shaped region similar to the region 715A3 formed on the upper side are respectively a lower line L3 (see FIG. 27) and an upper line in a front view of the gaming machine. It is provided so as not to overlap with each symbol stopped and displayed at L1 (see FIG. 27). Further, the inner surface of the left and right side portions 715A2 (the surface facing the reel device 710) is also subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) having fine irregularities.

  On the rear (back side) surface of the base 701 connected to the outer cover 715A, protruding portions 891 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward are provided along left and right edges of the outer cover 715A. I have. At approximately the center of the projection 891, a screw hole is formed in which a screw 896 used for fixing the holding member 811 can be screwed. The screw hole and the screw 896 are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is in the front-rear direction. After the pressing member 811 is arranged at a position separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A, the screw 896 is gradually tightened. , And can be integrated so that the relative positions in the front-rear direction are close to each other.

  Projections 892, 893 (see FIG. 39) project rearward from the rear surface of the base 701 on the upper and lower sides of the projections 891 provided on the left and right sides of the outer cover 715A, respectively. The two protrusions 892 located on the upper side are protrusions respectively inserted into the through holes 843A and 843B (see FIG. 38) of the light source unit 812. On the other hand, the two protrusions 893 located on the lower side are protrusions respectively inserted into the through holes 853A and 853B of the light source unit 813.

  At approximately the center of the protrusion 892, a screw hole into which screws 871A and 871B (see FIG. 39) used for fixing the light source unit 812 can be screwed is formed. On the other hand, a screw hole into which screws 881A and 881B (see FIG. 39) used when fixing the light source unit 813 are screwed is formed substantially at the center of the projection 893. These screw holes and the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is in the front-rear direction, and the light source units 812, 813 are arranged at positions separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A. The light source units 812, 813 and the outer cover 715A are integrated so that there is no separation between the front and rear by the fixing operation (temporary fixing) of the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B. In addition, it is possible to perform a complete fixing operation while gradually correcting the deformation of the light guide plate 715B described later to integrate the light guide plate 715B.

  Around the outer cover 715A, a through hole 701B through which a screw (not shown) for fixing the light guide plate unit 810 to the drum base 801 is formed. After the assembly of the light guide plate unit 810 is completed, a screw inserted from the rear side of the through hole 701B is screwed into a screw hole (not shown) formed at a predetermined position on the back side of the drum base 801 to guide the light. The light plate unit 810 can be fixed to the drum base 801.

  A light guide plate 715B is disposed behind the outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701. The light guide plate 715B is curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and is located above the curved portion 715B1 and the curved portion 715B1 disposed behind the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. It has a flat portion 715B2 and a flat portion 715B3 located below the curved portion 715B1. The fish pattern 743 displayed by light emission is formed by fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the curved portion 715B1.

  Here, since the light guide plate 715B is provided to be curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, the light guide plate 715B is entirely forwardly provided along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710. A fish pattern 743 displayed on the curved portion 715B1 by light emission can be arranged at a position separated by a certain distance. For this reason, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the height, posture, or the like of the player, the position where the fish picture 743 overlaps and is displayed in front of the reel device 710 may be greatly shifted. Instead, the fish pattern 743 can be displayed at an appropriate position located a certain distance in front of the surface of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R.

  A light source unit 813 that irradiates light to a lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is disposed below the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 813 includes a substrate base 831 disposed on the rear side of the lower flat portion 715B3 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 832 held by the substrate base 831, and a reflector disposed on the front side of the flat portion 715B3. 833.

  The substrate base 831 is provided with a concave portion 831A (see FIG. 38) whose lower side and front side are open to accommodate the substrate 832, and the substrate 832 is accommodated and fixed in the concave portion 831A. On the substrate 832, a plurality of light-emitting units 834 are arranged on a surface on the upper side of the substrate 832 along a longitudinal edge on the front side of the substrate 832.

  The light emitting unit 834 is a light emitting unit that emits light to the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and is configured by a light emitting unit such as an LED that has directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction). The light emitting means 834 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. The light emission of the light emitting means 834 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs the light irradiation direction toward the lower end surface 715B4 below the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B (that is, upwards). T) are provided so as to be arranged along the lower end surface 715B4. Therefore, when the substrate 832 is housed in the recess 831A, the plurality of light emitting units 834 project forward from the front surface 831B of the substrate base 831 as shown in FIG.

  The reflector 833 has a surface 833B (see FIG. 39) facing the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween, and a light-opaque surface having a mirror-finished surface (for example, chrome plating) on the surface. It is constituted as. Similarly, the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 is also configured as a light-opaque surface whose surface is mirror-finished. Accordingly, in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting unit 834 irradiated from the lower side of the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B toward the lower end surface 715B4 is output from the surface 831B and The light reflected by the surface 833B is guided to the lower end surface 715B4 so as to be appropriately incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B.

  A through hole 851A is provided on the left end side of the board base 831 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 852A is provided inside the through hole 851A (on the right side of the through hole 851A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). I have. On the other hand, a through hole 851B is provided on the right side of the board base 831 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 852B is provided inside the through hole 851B (on the left side of the through hole 851B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). Have been.

  A through-hole 853A communicating with the through-hole 851A when the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the left end side of the reflector 833 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. On the other hand, a through hole 853B that communicates with the through hole 851B when the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the right end side of the reflector 833 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  A projection 854A (see FIG. 39) that projects rearward from a rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided inside the through-hole 853A of the reflector 833 (on the right side of the through-hole 853A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). Have been. When the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854A is inserted into the through hole 862A formed on the lower left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 852A of the board base 831. It is.

  On the other hand, on the inside of the through hole 853B in the reflector 833 (left side of the through hole 853B in the front view of the gaming machine), a projection 854B protruding rearward from a rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When attaching the light source unit 813 to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854B is inserted into a through hole 862B formed on the lower right side of the light guide plate 715B when the gaming machine is viewed from the front and a through hole 852B of the board base 831. It is a projection.

  A screw hole capable of screwing the screw 882A is formed substantially at the center of the protrusion 854A, and a screw hole screwable with the screw 882B is formed substantially at the center of the protrusion 854B. Accordingly, after the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 are combined so that the protrusion 854A is inserted into the through-hole 862A and the through-hole 852A, and the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through-hole 862B and the through-hole 852B, the screw 882A is protruded. By screwing into the screw hole of the portion 854A and screwing the screw 882B into the screw hole of the projection 854B, the light source unit 813 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG.

  Here, the screws 882A, 882B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-back direction. For this reason, the fixing operation (temporary fixing) of the screws 882A and 882B is performed so that the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 are unified before and after the separation, and then the relative positions of the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B are reduced. The angle and the angle can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation while slowly adjusting the position so as not to cause excessive deformation.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the through-hole 862A formed in the light guide plate 715B is configured such that the displacement of the position of the protrusion 854A inserted into the through-hole 862A with respect to the through-hole 862A is hardly allowed in any of the vertical and horizontal directions. The projection 854A is formed in a substantially circular shape having a size matching the outer diameter of the projection 854A. Therefore, the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 862A.

  On the other hand, the through hole 862B has the maximum height H3 in the vertical direction equal to the maximum height in the vertical direction of the through hole 862A, but the maximum width W4 in the horizontal direction is larger than the maximum width W3 in the horizontal direction of the through hole 862A. It is formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the left-right direction than the outer diameter of the projection 854B. Therefore, the protrusion 854B inserted into the through hole 862B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, similarly to the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A. , The allowable range of positioning is larger than the vertical direction. Accordingly, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting units 834 provided in the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 is formed by the light guide plate 715B. The light-emitting display can have good appearance with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

  When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 communicates with the through hole 853A of the reflector 833, and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 communicates with the through hole 853B of the reflector 833. . A screw 881A inserted into the communicating through holes 851A and 853A and a screw 881B inserted into the communicating through holes 851B and 853B are screwed into a projection 893 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base 701. Thus, the light source unit 813 fixed below the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the through hole 853A of the reflector 833 and the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through hole 853A have a maximum height H5 in the vertical direction larger than the maximum width W5 in the horizontal direction. It is formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the portion 893. Note that the maximum height H5 is larger than the maximum height H3 in the up-down direction in the through holes 862A and 862B. Similarly, the through-hole 853B of the reflector 833 and the through-hole 851B of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through-hole 853B also have the same shape as the through-hole 853A, that is, slightly in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the projection 893. It has a large slot shape.

  Therefore, the through-holes 851A and 853A that communicate with each other and the protrusion 893 that is inserted into the through-holes 851B and 853B that communicate with each other have vertical displacements with respect to the through-holes 851A and 853A or the through-holes 851B and 853B in the horizontal direction. Allowed compared to displacement. Thus, the allowable range of the positioning of the light source unit 813 with respect to the base 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction.

  Above the light guide plate 715B, a light source unit 812 that irradiates light to the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is arranged. The light source unit 812 includes a substrate base 821 disposed on the rear side of the upper flat portion 715B2 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 822 held by the substrate base 821, and a reflector 823 disposed on the front side of the flat portion 715B2. And

  The substrate base 821 has a concave portion 821A whose upper side and front side are open to accommodate the substrate 822, and the substrate 822 is accommodated and fixed in the concave portion 821A. On the substrate 822, a plurality of light-emitting means (not shown) are arranged on a surface on the lower side of the substrate 822 along a longitudinal edge on the front side of the substrate 822. In the following, for convenience, the light emitting means provided on the lower surface of the substrate 822 is also referred to as “light emitting means 824”.

  The light emitting unit 824 is a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B, and includes a light emitting unit such as an LED having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), like the light emitting unit 834. You. The light emitting means 824 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. The light emission of the light emitting means 824 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  In a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs the light irradiation direction to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 (that is, downward). ) It is provided so that it may line up along the said upper end surface 715B5. Therefore, the plurality of light emitting units 824 protrude forward from the front surface 821B of the substrate base 821 when the substrate 822 is housed in the concave portion 821A.

  The substrate 822 is provided with a light emitting unit 825 such as an LED that irradiates light toward the picture seal 704 (that is, toward the front) on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822.

  The reflector 823 has a surface 823B (see FIG. 39) facing the surface 821B of the substrate base 821 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween, like the surface 833B of the reflector 833, and has a mirror-finished light-impermeable surface. It is configured as a surface. The surface 821B of the substrate base 821 is also configured as a light-opaque surface whose surface is mirror-finished. Accordingly, in a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting unit 824 emitted from the upper side of the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 becomes the surfaces 821B and 823B. Is guided to the upper end face 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B so as to be appropriately incident on the upper end face 715B5.

  A through hole 841A is provided on the left end side of the board base 821 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842A is provided inside the through hole 841A (on the right side of the through hole 841A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). I have. On the other hand, a through hole 841B is provided on the right end side of the gaming machine front view of the substrate base 821, and a through hole 842B is provided inside the through hole 841B (left side of the through hole 841B in the gaming machine front view). Have been.

  A through hole 843A having the same shape as the through hole 841A, which communicates with the through hole 841A when the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the left end side of the reflector 823 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. . On the other hand, a through-hole 843B having the same shape as the through-hole 841B, which communicates with the through-hole 841B when the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the right end side of the reflector 823 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. ing.

  Further, a projection 844A that projects rearward from a rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided inside the through hole 843A of the reflector 823 (on the right side of the through hole 843A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844A is inserted into the through hole 861A formed on the upper left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 842A of the board base 821. It is.

  On the other hand, on the inside of the through hole 843B of the reflector 823 (on the left side of the through hole 843B in the front view of the gaming machine), a projection 844B protruding rearward from the rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided. When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844B is inserted into the through hole 861B formed on the upper right side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 842B of the board base 821. It is.

  A screw hole capable of screwing the screw 872A is formed substantially at the center of the projection 844A, and a screw hole screwable with the screw 872B is formed substantially at the center of the projection 844B. Therefore, after combining the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 so that the protrusion 844A is inserted into the through-hole 861A and the through-hole 842A, and the protrusion 844B is inserted into the through-hole 861B and the through-hole 842B, the screw 872A is projected. By screwing into the screw hole of the portion 844A and screwing the screw 872B into the screw hole of the protrusion 844B, the light source unit 812 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG.

  Here, the screws 872A and 872B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-back direction. Therefore, by fixing (temporarily fixing) the screws 872A and 872B, the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 are integrated so that there is no separation before and after, and then the relative positions of the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B. The angle and the angle can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation while slowly adjusting the position so as not to cause excessive deformation.

  Like the through hole 862A, the through hole 861A formed in the light guide plate 715B is such that the displacement of the position of the projection 844A inserted into the through hole 861A with respect to the through hole 861A is hardly allowed in any of the vertical and horizontal directions. And a substantially circular shape having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the protrusion 844A. Therefore, the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 861A.

  The through hole 861B is also formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the left-right direction than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844B, similarly to the above-described through hole 862B. Therefore, the protrusion 844B inserted into the through hole 861B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, similarly to the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A. , The allowable range of positioning is larger than the vertical direction. Accordingly, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting units 824 provided in the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made almost constant, and the fish pattern 743 by the light guide plate 715B is A good appearance can be obtained with less variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

  When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 841A of the substrate base 821 communicates with the through hole 843A of the reflector 823, and the through hole 841B of the substrate base 821 communicates with the through hole 843AB of the reflector 823. . A screw 871A inserted into the communicating through holes 841A and 843A and a screw 871B inserted into the communicating through holes 841B and 843B are screwed into a protrusion 892 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward from the base 701. Thus, the light source unit 812 fixed above the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

  The through-holes 843A and 843B of the reflector 823 and the through-holes 841A and 841B of the substrate base 821 corresponding to the through-holes 843A and 843B, respectively, are similar to the above-described through-holes 853A, 853B, 841A and 841B. It is formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the portion 892. Therefore, the allowable range of the positioning of the light source unit 812 with respect to the base 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, as in the case of the light source unit 813 described above.

  At the rear side of the light guide plate 715B, pressing members 811 are arranged on both left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B. The pressing member 811 protrudes rightward or leftward as viewed from the front of the gaming machine from a pressing portion 811A configured to follow the curved shape of the bending portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and a frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. Mounting portion 811B. The attachment portion 811B is provided at a position corresponding to the projection 891 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward from the base 701, and has a through hole communicating with the screw hole of the projection 891. Therefore, the holding member 811 can be fixed to the base 701 by screwing the screw 896 inserted through the through hole of the attachment portion 811B into the screw hole of the projection 891.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, after the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B to which the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed is disposed behind the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, Prior to fixing the light source units 812 and 813 to the base 701 by 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B, the right and left pressing members 811 are fixed to the base 701 with screws 896.

  The pressing portion 811A is a portion for pressing the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B against the curved portion 715A1 (toward the curved portion 715A1) in a state where the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base 701. The pressing portion 811A is configured to have a front end along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. Therefore, when the holding member 811 is fixed to (attached to) the base 701, the bent portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is separated from the gap between the predetermined bent portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A. In this case, the pressing portion 811A presses the left and right ends of the curved portion 715B1, whereby the shape of the curved portion 715B1 is held in a corrected state so as to match the shape of the curved portion 715A1.

  Here, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B does not necessarily need to contact at least one of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811. It may be set to a design dimension that only contacts, or may be set to a dimension that always contacts one of them.

  When the right and left pressing members 811 are fixed to the base 701 with the screws 896, the gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 is formed by screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B on the rear side. The screw 896 is fixed so as to become narrower as the screw is fixed. For this reason, the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 can gradually correct a certain amount or more of deformation of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B, and furthermore, the correction. In this case, the force generated by tightening the screw 896 can be used, so that the operator can easily perform the work of attaching the pressing member 811 while suppressing damage to the light guide plate 715B and the like.

  The pressing member 811 is formed in a mesh shape having an opening through which light can pass from one surface to the other surface, between the pressing portion 811A and the frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. Light emitted from the reel device 710 and the light guide plate 715B inside the member 811 passes through the pressing member 811 to the outside. The side portion 715A2 of the outer cover 715A emits light by the light.

  In this embodiment, as described above, before the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B, the holding member 811 is fixed to the base 701 by the screw 896. However, after temporarily fixing the light source units 812 and 813 to the base 701 with the screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B, the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base 701 with the screw 896, and then the screws 871A, 871B, The light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base 701 by the 881A and 881B. By performing the temporary fixing with the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B, the position of the light guide plate 715B with respect to the outer cover 715A can be substantially positioned, so that the light guide plate 715B can be attached with high accuracy.

  Also, screws 872A for integrating the light source units 812, 813 and the light guide plate 715B within a range of four corners where the light source units 812, 813 are fixed to the base 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B. Fixed positions are provided at which 872B, 882A, and 882B are arranged. Specifically, the light source unit 812 is fixed to the base 701 near each of the two screws 872A and 872B for integrating the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B, on both outer sides sandwiching the screws 872A and 872B. Fixing positions (screw 871A, 871B). Further, near each of the two screws 882A and 882B for integrating the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B, a fixing position for fixing the light source unit 813 to the base body 701 on both outer sides sandwiching the screws 882A and 882B. (Screw 881A, 881B). For this reason, the shape in which the light source units 812 and 813 and the light guide plate 715B are integrated can be easily held without being changed in a situation where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the base 701, and the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B can be suppressed. The fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be displayed with good appearance and light emission.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B formed on the left and right sides of the upper light source unit 812 are vertically moved with respect to the outer diameter of the protrusion 892 formed on the base 701. It is configured in a long hole shape slightly larger in the direction. Similarly, the through holes 851A, 853A and the through holes 851B, 853B formed on both the left and right sides of the lower light source unit 813 also vertically extend with respect to the outer diameter of the projection 893 formed on the base 701. It is configured in a slightly longer slot shape.

  Therefore, the allowable range of the positioning of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the base 701 is relatively allowable in the direction in which the plate surfaces of the light guide plate 715B are continuous (vertical direction). By fixing the light plate 715B to the base 701 via the light source units 812 and 813, even when the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like, the light guide plate 715B The displacement in the direction (vertical direction) in which the plate surfaces continue is allowed. Therefore, even if manufacturing variation of the light guide plate 715B is largely allowed in order to suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide plate 715B including the curved portion, the light guide plate 715B may be curved when integrated with the base 701 and the outer cover 715A. It is possible to suppress the application of a vertical load (that is, a force that stretches or compresses the curved portion 715B1) to the portion 715B1, and it is possible to prevent the light guide plate 715B from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right of the upper side of the light guide plate 715B are all protruding portions 844A of the light source unit 812 inserted into the through holes 861A and 861B. , 844B in such a size that vertical displacement of the position with respect to the position is almost not allowed. Similarly, through holes 862A and 862B formed on the lower left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B also have vertical positions relative to the protrusions 854A and 854B of the light source unit 813 inserted into the through holes 862A and 862B. Is configured to have a size in which the displacement is hardly allowed.

  Therefore, the light source units 812 and 813 can be positioned and integrated with the light guide plate 715B at a suitable position in the direction (vertical direction) in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B is continuous. Thereby, the position of the light emitting unit 824 with respect to the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B and the position of the light emitting unit 834 with respect to the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B are suitably set. Since they can be matched, it is possible to suppress the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B due to the displacement of the light emitting unit 824 or the light emitting unit 834, and it is possible to display the fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B with good appearance.

  Note that, of the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right above the light guide plate 715B, one of the through holes 861A is configured to have such a size that displacement in the left and right directions with respect to the corresponding protrusion 844A is hardly allowed. On the other hand, the other through-hole 861B is configured such that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 844B is relatively allowed. Similarly, of the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the lower left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B, one of the through holes 862A has a size such that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854A is hardly allowed. On the other hand, the other through-hole 862B is configured such that the lateral displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854B is relatively allowed.

  Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the installation position of the projections 844A and 844B in the light source unit 812 or the installation position of the projections 854A and 854B in the light source unit 813, the manufacturing error is reduced by the through hole 861B or the through hole 862. Can be absorbed by the lateral displacement permitted by the above. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a manufacturing error of the protrusions 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source units 812, 813 with respect to the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after pressing the left and right sides of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B on which the light source units 812 and 813 are attached up and down against the curved portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811, The units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701.

  Therefore, the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A in a state where the shape of the curved portion 715B1 has been corrected to the shape of the curved portion 715A1 in advance by the pressing member 811. Even when the portion 715B1 is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like, when the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base 701, a vertical load is applied to the bending portion 715B1 (that is, the bending portion 715B1 is stretched or compressed. Force) can be suppressed. Also in this respect, it is possible to prevent the light guide plate 715B from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment is characterized in that the light guide plate 715B shines. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 41A is a schematic diagram illustrating the traveling direction of light that has entered the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the light guide plate 715B illustrating an example of how light is emitted. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has a left and right width smaller than the left and right width of one light emitting unit 834 in front view (or in a direction along the thickness direction of the light guide plate 715B). A plurality of trapezoidal concave portions Z having a width are formed in a continuous shape. Further, the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has trapezoidal concave portions Z formed in the left and right widths smaller than the light irradiation width of the one light emitting unit 834. And a plurality of concave portions Z are formed. It is preferable that five or more recesses Z are provided in the irradiation width of light by one light emitting means 834, and it is preferable that ten or more recesses Z are provided. The width of the trapezoid forming each recess Z is preferably set to 0.5 mm or less, and more preferably to 0.1 mm or less.

  The concave portion Z includes a substantially horizontal side Z1 serving as a bottom of the concave portion Z, a side Z2 connected to the left end C1 of the side Z1 and extending in the lower left direction, and a side Z1 connected to the right end C2 of the side Z1 and formed in the lower right direction. And an extending side Z3.

  As described above, the light emitting unit 834 disposed below the end surface 715B4 is configured by a light emitting unit having directivity in a light irradiation direction (output direction) such as an LED. Therefore, the side Z1 of the concave portion Z is substantially orthogonal to the light irradiation direction (output direction) of the light emitting unit 834 when the light source unit 813 is attached to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B. That is, since the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is incident on the side Z1 of the concave portion Z substantially perpendicularly, the light incident on the side Z1 is substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 (direction of the arrow F1). The light travels through the light guide plate 715B.

  Since the light guide plate 715B is made of a resin having a refractive index (absolute refractive index) greater than 1, such as an acrylic resin, the light guide plate 715B enters from the side Z2 or the side Z3 that is inclined with respect to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting unit 834. The light is refracted according to the relationship of (sin (incident angle φ1) / sin (refractive angle φ2)) = (refractive index of light guide plate 715B / refractive index of air). In this case, the incident angle φ1 is an incident angle of light incident on the light guide plate 715B (side Z2 or Z3) from the air, and the refraction angle φ2 is a refraction angle of light incident on the light guide plate 715B. .

  For example, when the light guide plate 715B is made of acrylic resin, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is approximately 1.5, which is the refractive index of the acrylic resin. In the following, the calculation is performed with the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B set to 1.5 for convenience. On the other hand, since the refractive index of air is substantially 1 (hereinafter, the refractive index of air is set to 1 for convenience), light incident from the side Z2 or Z3 is (sin (incident angle φ1) / sin ( It is refracted according to the relationship of refraction angle φ2)) = 1.5.

  The incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting means 834 to the side Z2 of the concave portion Z is equal to the angle θ1 between the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction and the substantially horizontal side Z1 in the concave portion Z, that is, the incident angle φ1 = angle Since it is θ1, the refraction angle φ2 of the light incident from the side Z2 is a value of φ2 satisfying sin (refraction angle φ2) = (sin (angle θ1) /1.5). For example, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41 °, the refraction angle φ2 is approximately 26 °.

  That is, when the angle θ1 between the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction and the side Z1 is approximately 41 °, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is approximately 41 ° relative to the side Z2 of the concave portion Z in the light guide plate 715B. , And refracted at a refraction angle φ2 of about 26 °, and travels in the light guide plate 715B in the direction of arrow F2. Accordingly, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41 °, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (the direction of the arrow F2) is leftward with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (the direction of the arrow F1). The direction is inclined by an angle θ2 of about 15 °.

  The magnitude of the angle θ2 changes according to the magnitude of the angle θ1. Therefore, by changing the angle (that is, the angle θ1) formed between the adjacent sides Z1 and Z2 in the concave portion Z, the angle formed by the traveling direction of each light incident from the sides Z1 and Z2 (ie, the angle formed by the sides Z1 and Z2) , Angle θ2) can be changed. For example, by setting the angle θ1 between the side Z1 and the side Z2 to approximately 60 °, the angle θ2 between the traveling directions of the light incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2 can be set to approximately 25 °. it can.

  As for the side Z3 of the concave portion Z, similarly to the side Z2, the incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting unit 834 to the side Z3 is equal to the angle formed by the side Z3 inclined in the lower right direction and the substantially horizontal side Z1 in the concave portion Z. . Therefore, according to the angle of the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z3 (the direction of the arrow F3) can be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (the direction of the arrow F1). .

  In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the angle between the side Z1 and the side Z3 is equal to the angle θ1 between the side Z1 and the side Z2, and therefore, the light enters from the side Z1 and the side Z3, respectively. The angle formed by the traveling directions of the respective lights is equal to the angle θ2 formed by the traveling directions of the respective lights incident from the sides Z1 and Z2. Therefore, when the angle θ2 is approximately 15 °, the light incident from the concave portion Z is different from the light traveling in the direction (the direction of the arrow F1) substantially equal to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting unit 834, and The light is separated into light traveling in a direction inclined by approximately 15 ° (in the directions of arrows F2 and F3). Note that the angle θ1 between the side Z1 and the side Z2 and the angle θ2 between the side Z1 and the side Z3 do not necessarily need to be the same.

  Since the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (the direction of the arrow F1) and the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (the direction of the arrow F2) intersect at an angle θ2, the intersection of the side Z1 and the side Z2 (that is, the side In a region D1 extending from the left end C1 of Z1 at an angle θ3 equal to the angle θ2, a region in which neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z2 enters (or the direction of the arrow F1 or the direction of the arrow F2). (A region into which light weaker than light traveling into the region) enters.

  Similarly, since the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (the direction of the arrow F1) and the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z3 (the direction of the arrow F3) intersect at a predetermined angle, the intersection between the side Z1 and the side Z3 is obtained. The region D2 that spreads from the right end C2 of the side Z1 at an angle equal to the angle is also a region where neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z3 enters (or the direction of the arrow F1 or This is an area where light weaker than light traveling in the direction of arrow F3 enters).

  By providing a plurality of the concave portions Z described above continuously on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, light incident from the lower side of the light guide plate 715B can be separated into three directions as shown in FIG. The inside of the light guide plate 715B can be advanced upward.

  That is, the light irradiated to the range K1 of the end surface 715B4 is incident from the side Z1 of each concave portion Z included in the range K1, and is directed in the direction of the arrow F1 (that is, the direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction by the light emitting unit 834). ), A band-like region 981B composed of light entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2, and a band-like region 981B composed of light traveling from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F3. A band-like region 981C constituted by light is formed.

  The light incident from the lower end surface 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B is guided so as to almost escape from the light guide plate 715B around the top X of the curved portion 715B1 that projects forward and curves. The curvature and the thickness of the light plate 715B may be set. In this case, light traveling in the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C disappears near the top X of the curved portion 715B1, and does not reach the upper portion. In addition, it is preferable that the irradiation intensity of the light by the light emitting unit 834 is set so that the light incident from the end face 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B can reach at least the top X of the curved portion 715B1.

  When the light emitting unit 834 is configured by a light emitting unit that can emit light of a plurality of colors, and when the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K1 with light of a predetermined color (for example, red light), the area 981A, the area 981B, And the light of the color can be made to travel in the region 981C. Therefore, when the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light, only the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine irregularities on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B overlap. Is displayed in red by red light traveling upward in these areas 981A, 981B, 981C.

  In addition, as described above, since the concave portion Z is configured to form the regions D1 and D2 where the irradiation light from the light emitting unit 834 does not enter, between the region 981A and the region 981B, the end surface 715B4 An area 982 where the light irradiated to the range K1 does not travel is formed. Similarly, a region 983 in which light irradiated to the range K1 does not travel is formed between the region 981A and the region 981BC. Therefore, in the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1, the light emitting display by the light applied to the range K1 is not performed in the region 982 and the portion in the region 983. Thus, for example, when the range K1 is irradiated with red light, it is possible to perform light emission display with mottled red in the range between the region 981B and the region 98C.

  Further, when a color (for example, blue light) different from the color radiated to the range K1 is irradiated to the range K2 different from the range K1 of the end surface 715B4, the light enters from the side Z1 of each concave portion Z included in the range K2. And a band-shaped region 983A composed of light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C traveling in the direction of the arrow F1, and light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C incident from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2. And a band-shaped region 983C formed of light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C incident from the side Z3 and traveling in the arrow F3 direction.

  Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, only the regions 983A, 983B, and 983C of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine irregularities on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B overlap. Is displayed in blue by blue light traveling upward in these regions 983A, 983B, 983C.

  When the light emitting unit 834 emits red light to the range K1 and the light emitting unit 834 emits blue light to the range K2, the regions 981A and 981B of the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1. , 981C and the regions 983A, 983B, 983C overlap with each other, a purple light is displayed by mixing the red light traveling in the regions 981A, 981B, 981C and the blue light traveling in the regions 983A, 983B, 983C. .

  The upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B is also provided with a trapezoidal concave portion Z in a front view similar to the lower end surface 715B4, as shown in FIG. 41B, from above the light guide plate 715B. The incident light can be separated in three directions and can travel downward in the light guide plate 715B.

  That is, the light irradiated to the range K3 of the end surface 715B5 enters from the side Z1 of each concave portion Z included in the range K3 and is directed in the direction of the arrow F1 (that is, the direction substantially equal to the light irradiation direction by the light emitting unit 824). ), A band-like region 991B composed of light entering from side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2, and a band-like region 991B composed of light traveling from side Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F3. A band-like region 991C constituted by light is formed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 41B, the concave portion Z formed on the upper end surface 715B5 has the light traveling direction in the region 991A (that is, the arrow F1 direction). Is formed between the light traveling direction in the region 981B or the region 981C and the traveling direction of light in the region 991B or the region 991C. It is set to be different from the angle to be formed. That is, the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 and the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 in the recess Z formed on the lower end surface 715B4. Is set to be different from

  The angle between the traveling direction of light in the region 991A (that is, the direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of light in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, the direction of arrows F2 and F3) is defined as the traveling direction of light in the region 981A. By making the angle formed by each light traveling direction in the region 981B or the region 981C different from each other, randomness can be given to the light emission display of the fish pattern 743 in the curved portion 715B1, and the light emission display of the pattern 743 is monotonous. Can be suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 (b), light irradiated on a range K4 located on the left end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine is emitted from the side Z1 of each concave portion Z included in the range K4. A light guide that separates in two directions: a band-shaped region 993A formed by light entering and traveling in the direction of arrow F1 and a band-shaped region 931B formed by light entering from side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2. It is configured so that

  In the light guide, the side Z3 (that is, the side on the left end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1 with respect to the concave portion Z included in the range K4 (that is, the light emitting unit 824). (Substantially parallel to the direction of light irradiation).

  Even if the light emitted from the light emitting means 824 to the range K4 is guided to the left in the game machine front view, the light escapes from the left end of the light guide plate 715B in the game machine front view before reaching the bending portion 715B1. Therefore, there is no point in guiding light in that direction. Therefore, by guiding light in two directions, the region 993A and the region 993B, the light emitted by the light emitting unit 824 can be transmitted to the curved portion 715B1 without waste.

  In addition, the same range as the range K4 located on the right end side in the gaming machine front view of the end surface 715B5 is also configured by the light that enters the recess Z included in the range from the side Z1 and travels in the arrow F1 direction. It may be configured to guide light in two directions, that is, a band-like region formed by light incident from the side Z3 and traveling in the arrow F3 direction. That is, the concave portion Z included in the range may have a shape in which the side Z2 (that is, the side on the right end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1.

  Also, in the lower end surface 715B4, the shape of the concave portion Z included in the predetermined range on the left and right ends when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is changed from the side Z1 similarly to the concave portion Z included in the range K4. And a band-like region constituted by light traveling in the direction of arrow F1 and a band-like region constituted by light entering from side Z2 or Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2 or arrow F3. It may be configured in a light-emitting shape.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the upper end surface 715B5 and the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B are configured to have a plurality of trapezoidal concave portions Z in a front view, the light emitting means 824 is provided. , 825 includes a predetermined direction in which the light incident on the light guide plate 715B does not travel or travels as relatively weak light (the direction in which the regions D1 and D2 are formed). Light is emitted from the light emitting units 824 and 825 so that the light extends more in a region extending in the predetermined direction in a region on both sides (for example, the regions 981A and 981C with respect to the region 982) inclined to one side and the other around the light emitting units 824 and 825. Light can travel (light guide) in the light guide plate 715B. Therefore, the light guide plate 715B can have randomness in how to shine, so that the light emission display of the picture 743 can be prevented from being monotonous, and thereby the display modes of the light guide plate 715B can be diversified. .

<Thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to twelfth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, the structural configuration of the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), and 42 (c). FIG. 42A is a front view of the reel device 710 in a case where each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is in a basic state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is in a basic state, as shown in FIG. 42A, each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. , Ie, the length along the rotation axis of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R in each symbol row is configured to have the same width W11.

  Of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the left and right reels 711L and 711R include a first reel body 1701 located on the side of the middle reel 711M and a second reel body 1702 located on a side away from the middle reel 711M. It is constituted by the combination of

  The first reel body 1701 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an opening on the side away from the middle reel 711M, and the second reel body 1702 has a diameter slightly smaller than that of the first reel body 1701 with an opening on the side of the middle reel 711M. It has a cylindrical shape. By inserting the opening side edge 1702A of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701 from the opening side edge 1701A side, the reels 711L and 711R as one cylindrical body are formed.

  As described above, since the left and right reels 711L and 711R are cylindrical bodies formed by combining the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702, the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 is changed. By doing so, the width of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711R (that is, the width of each reel 711L, 711R) can be changed.

  FIG. 42 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel 711L taken along the rotation axis 1701B through the rotation axis 1701B in a basic state, and FIG. 42 (c) is a view of the left reel 711L. FIG. 13 is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel 711L cut along the rotation shaft 1701B through the rotation shaft 1701B in a state where the width of the symbol row is narrowed (smaller). In FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 42 (c), hatching of the cross section is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the left reel 711L is configured such that the opening side edge 1702A of the second reel body 1702 located on the left side in the game machine front view is shifted to the first reel body located on the right side in the game machine front view. A cylindrical body 1701 is formed by being inserted from the opening side edge 1701A side of 1701.

  At a position on the rotation axis on the side surface of the first reel body 1701, a rotation shaft 1701B extending inward from the side surface is provided. The rotating shaft 1701B is connected to a reel drive motor 721L fixed to a base (not shown) provided inside the first reel body 1701.

  Although not shown, the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 are engaged so that the respective reel bodies 1701 and 1702 do not shift from each other in the circumferential direction. Thus, when the reel drive motor 721L is driven, the first reel 1701 and the second reel 1702 rotate integrally.

  As a configuration for suppressing the circumferential displacement of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702, for example, the first reel body 1701 located outside the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 On the surface on the back side with respect to the outer peripheral surface, a convex portion (not shown) protruding inward from the surface is provided continuously in the left-right direction corresponding to the rotation axis direction, while the second reel body 1702 located on the inner side A concave portion (not shown) corresponding to the convex portion of the first reel body 1701 is provided at a position corresponding to the convex portion of the first reel body 1701, and the convex portion of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 A configuration for engaging with the concave portion is exemplified.

  In such a configuration, at least one pair of protrusions and recesses is formed in the circumferential direction of each of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702. By providing a plurality of the pair of convex portions and concave portions, it is possible to more suitably suppress the circumferential displacement of each of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702, and as the number thereof increases, the circumferential direction of each of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702 becomes larger. The displacement can be suitably suppressed. The installation positions of the pair of convex portions and concave portions are not particularly limited, but by providing the decorative positions drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel 711L so as to avoid the decorative patterns on the left reel 711L, the appearance of the concave portions is reduced. Damage due to formation can be suppressed.

  Further, as another configuration for suppressing the circumferential displacement of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702, for example, a radius smaller than the radius of the outer peripheral surface is provided inside the outer peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a “first inner peripheral surface”), while being slightly smaller than the first inner peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701 inside the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702. A surface in the circumferential direction of the radius (hereinafter, also referred to as a “second inner peripheral surface”) is provided, and a convex portion projecting inward from the inner surface is provided on the inner surface of the first inner peripheral surface. The second inner peripheral surface is provided with concave portions corresponding to the convex portions of the first reel body 1701 at positions corresponding to the convex portions, and these convex portions are engaged with the concave portions. The configuration may be such that

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), an engagement groove 1702B extending over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction is formed on the surface on the back side of the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702. In the present embodiment, the engagement groove 1702B is provided with two protrusions 1702C, which protrude inward from the surface and extend over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, on the surface on the back side of the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702. It is formed by being provided substantially parallel to and separated by the distance of the mating groove 1702B. That is, the engagement groove 1702B is formed of a groove between the two protrusions 1702C. Note that the engagement groove 1702B may be a groove formed on a surface on the back side with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702.

  Inside the left reel 711L, a drive solenoid 1711 serving as a drive source for moving the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 is provided on the outer peripheral surface side of the reel 711L. The drive solenoid 1711 is fixed to a base (not shown) provided inside the first reel body 1701 so as not to change with respect to the rotation of the first reel body 1701 (that is, the rotation of the left reel 711L). And a plunger 1711B that can protrude and retract from the solenoid body 1711A.

  The plunger 1711B is formed in a shape in which the tip on the side away from the solenoid main body 1711A is bent in a substantially L-shape. In the following, the tip of the plunger 1711B on the side away from the solenoid main body 1711A is also simply referred to as “the tip of the plunger 1711B”. The tip of the plunger 1711B is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 1702B formed in the second reel body 1702.

  The drive solenoid 1711 is connected to the main control board 920, and switches between a protruding posture in which the plunger 1711B protrudes from the solenoid main body 1711A side and a immersing posture in which the plunger 1711B is immersed in the solenoid main body 1711A side under the control of the main control board 920. It is configured to be possible.

  The drive solenoid 1711 is maintained in the protruding posture in the basic state, and shifts to the immersive posture when a predetermined timing to narrow the width of the symbol row comes during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the “predetermined timing at which the width of the symbol row is narrowed” is an acceleration period in the variation display of the decorative symbol, that is, the rotation of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is set to a predetermined speed. This is a predetermined timing set within the acceleration period up to this point.

  When the drive solenoid 1711 is in the protruding posture, as shown in FIG. 42A, the width of the left symbol row (that is, the width of the left reel 711L) is the length W11 which is the width of the symbol row in the basic state. It is said.

  On the other hand, when the drive solenoid 1711 is in the immersion posture, the engagement groove 1702B of the second reel body 1702 is pulled toward the first reel body 1701 by the plunger 1711B because the plunger 1711B is immersed in the solenoid body 1711A.

  Since the plunger 1711B is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 1702B, when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the immersion posture during the change display of the decorative symbol (that is, during rotation of the left reel 711L). In, the force pulled toward the first reel body 1701 by the plunger 1711B acts on the entire circumference of the engagement groove 1702B by the rotation of the left reel 711L.

  Therefore, when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the immersion posture, the entire second reel body 1702 moves rightward toward the first reel body 1701, that is, toward the middle reel 711M (ie, FIG. 42 (c)). )). As a result, the amount of insertion of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701 increases as compared with the case where the drive solenoid 1711 is in the protruding posture (that is, the case where the left reel 711L is in the basic state). The width of the symbol row becomes smaller. Specifically, the width of the left symbol row changes from the length W11 to a length W12 shorter than the length W11.

  Note that the drive solenoid 1711 is shifted to the immersion posture during the acceleration period in the variation display of the decorative symbol, that is, during the period in which the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R rotate at a relatively low speed. The force for pulling the reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 is likely to be evenly applied over the entire circumference of the second reel body 1702. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the process of increasing the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701.

  The right reel 711R has the same shape as the left reel 711L shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (c) in which the cross section is reversed left and right. Accordingly, in the right reel 711R, by moving the drive solenoid 1711 to the immersion posture, the moving direction of the second reel body 1702 located on the right side with respect to the first reel body 1701 is opposite to that in the case of the left reel 711L. The operation is similar to that of the left reel 711L, except that the left reel 711L is in a certain left direction (that is, the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow M11). Therefore, the width of the right symbol row (that is, the width of the right reel 711R) changes from the length W11 to W12 when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the immersion posture.

  The drive source for moving the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 does not need to be the drive solenoid 1711, and may be various motors such as a stepping motor and a DC motor. In the case where various motors are used as driving sources, a driving mechanism that is driven by the motor and pulls the entire second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42 (a), FIG. 42 (d), FIG. 42 (e), and FIG. 43, each symbol displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The change in the size of the column display area will be described.

  FIG. 42D is a front view of the reel device 710 when the width of the left and right symbol rows by the left and right reels 711L and 711R is reduced, and FIG. 42E shows the reels 711L, 711M and 711R. It is a front view of the reel device 710 in the case where the display area of each symbol row is reduced by movement.

  The width of the left and right symbol rows is changed during the change display of the decorative symbol as described above. However, in FIG. 42D, each symbol row is stopped so that the shape of the decorative symbol can be easily identified. It is illustrated as if it were done. Similarly, the reduction of the display area of each symbol row by the movement of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is also performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol as described later. Each symbol row is illustrated as if it is stopped so that the shape can be easily identified.

  FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the operation of each component when changing the size of the display area of each symbol row. Note that the timing chart of FIG. 43 conceptually shows the operation order of each component, and the interval between each timing from time t1 to time t8 is not necessarily proportional to the actual time interval.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in a state where neither the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol nor the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is started, the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is reduced.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 43, in a state where the right to play the unit relating to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not reserved, the unit relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. When the variation display of symbols in the game is started (time t1), the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R for the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R start rotating from a stopped state. As a result, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R start rotating, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  The rotation speed of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R is started at time t1, and then gradually increased at time t4 until the rotation of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R reaches a predetermined speed. Thereby, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is gradually accelerated. That is, the period from time t1 to time t4 is the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The drive solenoids 1711 respectively provided on the left and right reels 711L and 711R are driven at a timing of a time t2 which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the time t1 in the acceleration period in the decorative display change display. (Ie, the state is switched from the non-energized state to the energized state), and accordingly, the state is switched from the protruding posture to the immersing posture.

  When the drive solenoid 1711 is switched to the immersion posture, the engagement groove 1702B of the second reel body 1702 in each of the reels 711L and 711R is drawn toward the first reel body 1701 by the plunger 1711B of the drive solenoid 1711. The displacement of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 gradually increases using the rotation of each of the reels 711L and 711R, and reaches a maximum value that can be displaced at time t3.

  Accordingly, when the drive solenoid 1711 is in the protruding posture (that is, in the basic state), the respective widths of the left and right reels 711L and 711 (see FIG. 42 (a)) having the maximum width W11 are changed. At time t3, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the length W12 is the minimum width. Note that time t3 may be a time after the end of the acceleration period.

  Since the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711 is reduced from the length W11 to the length W12, the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M and 711R is in a basic state. The length W21 (see FIG. 42 (a)) changes to a length W22 shorter than the length W21 as shown in FIG. 42 (d).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711 (left and right symbol rows) are displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (more specifically, during the acceleration period in the variation display of the decorative symbol). Is reduced, the size of the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be made smaller than the size of the display area in the basic state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each reel 711L. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R are Arabic numerals displayed on a 7-segment display, that is, one horizontal line extending in a substantially horizontal direction and the horizontal line of the horizontal line. It is a number composed of two vertical lines arranged at both ends.

  Three rows of reels 711L. Of the left and right reels 711L and 711R composed of a combination of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702, two vertical lines constituting the numerals are the respective reel bodies 1701 and 1702. And one horizontal line is drawn over both reel bodies 1701 and 1702.

  Therefore, when the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is reduced by driving of the drive solenoid 1711, as shown in FIG. Since the constituent horizontal lines are only apparently shorter, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the numbers from becoming unnatural by reducing the width of the left and right symbol columns.

  Each reel 711L. The main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R do not necessarily have to be Arabic numerals displayed on a 7-segment display as shown in FIG. Or a number other than Arabic numerals. Each reel 711L. The main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R are not necessarily numbers, and may be symbols corresponding to the respective numerical values.

  Since the sub-designs drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left and right reels 711L and 711R are arranged substantially at the center in the width direction of the design row, the width of the left and right design rows is narrowed as shown in FIG. In this case, it is hidden behind the first reel body 1701 and becomes invisible. Therefore, when the width of the left and right symbol rows is narrowed, the sub symbol disappears in appearance, so that the presence of the main symbol on the left and right reels 711L and 711R can be emphasized.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711R can move rightward or leftward, and the middle reel 711M moves backward, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described tenth embodiment. Since it is configured to be capable of moving, it is possible to reduce the display area of each symbol row by moving each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the rotation speed of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R is accelerated until the rotation of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R reaches a predetermined speed (time t4). 711L, 711M, and 711R are maintained to rotate at the predetermined speed. Accordingly, after time t4, the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed at a predetermined speed until the rotation speed of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R is reduced.

  The gear 781 (see FIG. 34 (c)) under the control of the drive mechanism (not shown) at the timing of the time t5 which is a predetermined time after the time t4 (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol. ) Is started, whereby the middle reel 711M gradually moves backward. Thereafter, the operation of the gear 781 is stopped at time t6, whereby the middle reel 711M stops at a predetermined position behind the left and right reels 711L and 711R.

  At a time t7, which is a predetermined time after the time t6 (for example, 0.5 seconds), the operation of the gears 782, 783 (see FIG. 34 (c)) is started by the control of the driving mechanism (not shown). You. As a result, the left and right reels 711L and 711R gradually move in a direction approaching each other (that is, the center in the direction in which the three rows of reels 711L, 711M and 711R are arranged). That is, as shown in FIG. 42 (e), the left reel 711L gradually moves rightward (arrow M12 direction), and the right reel 711R gradually moves leftward (arrow M13 direction).

  The operations of the gears 782 and 783 started at time t7 are stopped at time t8, whereby the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped at predetermined positions where a part thereof overlaps the front of the middle reel 711M.

  As the three reels 711L, 711M, and 711R move as described above, the width of the display area of each symbol row by these reels 711L, 711M, and 711R reduces the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711. The length W22 thus obtained (see FIG. 42 (d)) changes to a length W23 shorter than the length W22, as shown in FIG. 42 (e).

  When the width of the display area of each symbol row is reduced to the length W23 by the movement of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the player moves these reels 711L and 711R in a direction approaching each other. The stopped symbols by the reels 711L and 711R can be visually recognized at a glance.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is reduced as described above, the width of the display area becomes special. After the start of the variable display of the symbol in the unit game relating to the symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), in a situation where the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is not reserved, after the high-speed variation in the variable display. Therefore, the display is returned to the basic state (see FIG. 42A) before the variable display stops. That is, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is reduced, the width of the reduced display area is maintained while the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is reserved. Is done.

  The procedure for returning the width of the display area of each symbol row to the basic state is, for example, by shifting the drive solenoid 1711 to the protruding posture during the deceleration period from the high-speed fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. The width of the symbol row (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is increased to the width (length W11) in the basic state, and then, after the variable display is stopped, each of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R. 42 may be returned to the basic state (the arrangement shown in FIG. 42 (a)), and the arrangement of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is performed while the variable display of the decorative symbol is a high-speed change. , The width of the left and right symbol rows may be returned during the deceleration period of the variable display. Alternatively, both the width of the left and right symbol rows and the arrangement of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R may be returned to the deceleration period of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the left and right reels 711L and 711 are configured to be variable in width, the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711 is reduced to reduce the width of the three reels 711L and 711L. The display area of each symbol row by 711M and 711R can be reduced (more specifically, the width of the display area of each symbol row can be reduced). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the entire display area of the decorative symbol change display into the field of view of the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the decorative symbol change display is difficult to see.

  Also, by reducing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711 and then moving each of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R, the display area of each symbol row can be further reduced. The entire display area can be more easily and more easily put into the field of view of the player.

  The display area of each symbol row is reduced by reducing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711, and the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving each reel 711L, 711M and 711R. In the configuration in which the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed before the middle reel 711M, the player, after stopping one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, stops the one reel. While visually recognizing the symbol (the number which is the main symbol), the movement of the other reel can be visually recognized while expecting that the reach display is constituted by the symbol of the other reel. Therefore, during the period until the left and right reels 711L and 711R stop, the player can concentrate on the expectation for the formation of the reach display without greatly moving the line of sight, and can display the variation display of the decorative symbols during the period. You can enjoy in minutes.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (e), when the left and right reels 711L and 711R overlap in front of the middle reel 711M, some of the numbers of the main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M are left and right. It is hidden by the reels 711L and 711R. Therefore, since it is difficult to determine the content of the stop symbol by the middle reel 711M, it is difficult for the player to determine the lottery result of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), but the special symbol display device 471 or The lottery result can be grasped by looking at the confirmed display displayed on the special symbol display device 472.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the width of the reduced display area is a special symbol (the first symbol). The right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is maintained while the right is reserved. Therefore, while the right of the special symbol unit game is reserved, the player can enjoy the variable display of the decorative symbol without greatly moving the line of sight while the variable symbol display is continuously performed. it can.

<14th embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth embodiment has a feature in how the light guide plate 715B shines, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to thirteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.
First, the structural configuration of the light guide plate 715B included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44A is a perspective view of the light guide plate 715B of the present embodiment viewed from the rear side, and FIG. is there. Note that FIG. 44B also shows the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the projection 1721 of the light guide plate 715B. In FIG. 44B, hatching of the cross section is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), a projection 1721 is provided substantially at the center in the left-right direction of each of the flat portions 715B2, 715B3 on the back surface (rear surface) of the upper and lower flat portions 715B2, 715B3 in the light guide plate 715B. It is protruding. The protrusion 1721 is disposed above the light guide plate 715B and below the light source unit 812 (see FIG. 40), and above the light source unit 813 (see FIG. 40) disposed below the light guide plate 715B. To position. The projection 1721 has an engagement hole extending forward from the rear end face, and the plunger 1731B of the drive solenoid 1731 is engaged with the engagement hole as shown in FIG.

  The drive solenoid 1731 includes a solenoid main body 1731A fixed to a base (not shown) provided on the base 401, and a plunger 1731B that can protrude and retract from the solenoid main body 1731A. As shown in FIG. 44B, the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the upper projection 1721 is attached so that the plunger 1731B faces downward, and the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the lower projection 1721 is attached to the plunger 1731B. Is mounted so as to face upward.

  The plunger 1731B is formed in a shape in which the distal end on the side away from the solenoid main body 1731A is bent in a substantially L shape. In the following, the tip of the plunger 1731B on the side away from the solenoid main body 1731A is also simply referred to as “the tip of the plunger 1731B”. The plunger 1731B is engaged by inserting its tip into the engagement hole of the projection 1721.

  The drive solenoid 1731 is connected to the main control board 920, and switches between a protruding posture in which the plunger 1731B protrudes from the solenoid main body 1731A side and an immersing posture in which the plunger 1731B is immersed in the solenoid main body 1731A side under the control of the main control board 920. It is configured to be possible.

  The driving solenoid 1731 is maintained in the protruding posture in the basic state, and shifts to the immersion posture when a predetermined timing comes. The “predetermined timing for shifting the drive solenoid 1731 to the immersion posture” is, for example, a start timing of a predetermined effect such as a specific suggestion effect among various effects using light emission display by the light guide plate 715B. The timing may be the start timing of an effect selected with a predetermined probability, or the timing at which a player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261).

  When the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the immersion posture, as shown in FIG. 44B, the upper side of the light guide plate 715B is upward (in the direction of arrow M31) by the plunger 1731B engaged with the engagement hole of the projection 1721. , And the lower side of the light guide plate 715B is pulled downward (in the direction of the arrow M32). Accordingly, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is elongated in the vertical direction, so that the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 is larger than before the actuation of the drive solenoid 1731 (that is, when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture). .

  Since the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light source unit 812 is displaced upward together with the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B even when the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the immersion posture. Similarly, since the light source unit 813 is also fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light source unit 813 is displaced downward together with the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B even when the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the immersion posture.

  Therefore, the positional relationship between the light emitting unit 824 of the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 and the positional relationship between the light emitting unit 834 of the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 are all determined by the posture of the drive solenoid 1731 (projecting posture or immersion posture). Irrespective of posture). That is, the output of the light incident on the upper end surface 715B5 from the light emitting unit 824 and the output of the light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 from the light emitting unit 834 are substantially constant regardless of the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 (c), 44 (d), and 45, how the light guide plate 715B shines according to the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731 will be described. FIG. 44C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper part of the light guide plate 715B when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding state, and FIG. 44D is the case where the drive solenoid 1731 is in the immersion state. FIG. 14 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an upper portion of a light guide plate 715B.

  The light incident on the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 812 utilizes the critical angle between the material (for example, acrylic resin) of the light guide plate 715B on the front and back of the light guide plate 715B and air, and the light inside the light guide plate 715B. Is guided downward while refracting the light.

  When the fish pattern 743 is drawn on the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the light guide plate 715B, the position where light guided inside the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the back side of the light guide plate 715B (hereinafter, this position) Is also referred to as a “back-side refraction position”), the portion of the pattern 743 drawn at the position is displayed more luminously than the portion of the pattern 743 drawn at a position different from the position. Therefore, when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture, as shown in FIG. 44C, the pattern 743 is displayed relatively intensely at the position PA which is the back side refraction position on the light guide plate 715B.

  When the drive solenoid 1731 shifts from the protruding posture to the immersing posture, the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 changes (more specifically, the radius of curvature increases) as shown in FIG. 44D. As described above, the back side refraction position on the light guide plate 715B changes from the position PA when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture to the position PB. As a result, the position where the picture 743 is displayed with relatively strong light emission changes to a position different from the case where the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture.

  FIG. 45 is a front view of a screen portion of the light guide plate 715B. When the screen portion of the light guide plate 715B (that is, the curved portion 715B1) is viewed from the front, the positions are PA1, PA2, and PA3 (see FIG. 45A) when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture. The back side refraction position changes to a position PB1, a position PB2, and a position PB3 (see FIG. 45B), respectively, as the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the immersion posture.

  In addition, the position where light that is incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 813 and guided downward in the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the back side of the light guide plate 715B (that is, the back side refraction position). ) Changes according to the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731 below the top X of the curved portion 715B1 similarly to the light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 813.

  Specifically, the light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B is at the position PC1, position PC2, and position PC3 (see FIG. 45A) when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture. The bending position changes to the position PD1, the position PD2, and the position PD3 (see FIG. 45B), respectively, as the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the immersion posture.

  As described above, by changing the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 by the operation of the drive solenoid 1731, the position of the fish pattern 743 that can be displayed on the light guide plate 715B that emits a strong light (that is, the position where the pattern 743 shines) is changed. Can be done.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by changing the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1, the position at which the fish pattern 743 shines can be changed, and thus the light pattern of the fish pattern 743 illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 715B. And uniform coloring can be suppressed. Therefore, since the light emission display of the picture 743 can be suppressed from being monotonous, it is possible to realize a variety of display modes on the light guide plate 715B.

  Further, since the change of the light emission display of the light guide plate 715B is realized by the change of the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1, the light emission display of the light guide plate 715B can be changed while using the installed light guide plate 715B as it is.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment, diversification of the effect by the light-emitting display of the light guide plate is achieved by using the two light guide plates 1751 and 1771. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to fourteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 46 is a front view of two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 overlapping in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 46, a light guide plate support portion 1772 and a gear 1773 for moving one light guide plate 1771 are also shown. Further, in FIG. 46, some components such as the light guide plate 1771 are shown by bold lines for easy understanding of the drawing.

  The light guide plate 1751 is a flat light guide plate having light transmittance. The light guide plate 1751 is arranged on the front side of a display device such as the decorative design display device 479 having a screen capable of displaying the decorative design so as to overlap the display device.

  On one side (for example, the back side) of the light-transmitting resin plate constituting the light guide plate 1751, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), a fish pattern 1761 constituting a part of a fish school facing leftward is provided. It is formed by fine irregularities.

  Above and below the light guide plate 1751, light-emitting means (not shown) such as LEDs for emitting light to the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751 are arranged along the upper end surface or the lower end surface. By controlling the light emission of the light emitting means by the sub-control board 940, it is possible to illuminate and display the fish pattern 1761 on the light guide plate 1751.

  Specifically, by turning off the light emitting means, the fish pattern 1761 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 46A, and by turning on the light emitting means, as shown in FIG. The picture 1761 can be displayed by light emission. Thereby, for example, by controlling the timing of turning on and off the light emitting means arranged along the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751, the fish school by the picture 1761 moves from right to left in the light guide plate 1751. It is possible to perform an effect that looks as if it is.

  The light guide plate 1771 is a flat light guide plate having a light transmissivity and configured to have a smaller width in the left-right direction than the light guide plate 1751. The light guide plate 1771 overlaps the light guide plate 1751 behind the light guide plate 1751. At the same time, it is arranged in front of a display device such as the decorative design display device 479 so as to overlap with the display device.

  On one side (for example, the back side) of the light-transmitting resin plate constituting the light guide plate 1771, as shown in FIG. It is formed by fine irregularities.

  Above and below the light guide plate 1771, light-emitting means (not shown) such as LEDs for emitting light to the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1771 are arranged along the upper end surface or the lower end surface. By controlling the light emission of the light emitting means by the sub-control board 940, the light guide plate 1771 can emit and display a fish pattern 1781. Specifically, by turning on the light emitting means, the picture 1781 of the fish can be displayed by light emission as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). By turning off the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the fish picture 1781 from being displayed by light emission.

  Above the light guide plate 1771, there is provided a light guide plate support portion 1772 that extends in the left-right direction and supports the light guide plate 1771 to which the light emitting means is attached from above. On the upper side surface of the light guide plate support portion 1772, a rack gear (not shown) in which the teeth of the gear 1773 are cut is formed linearly in the left-right direction.

  The gear 1773 is fixed to a base (not shown) provided on the base 401. The gear 1773 is connected to a driving mechanism (not shown) driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940, and operates by the driving control of the driving mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 1773 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the light guide plate support 1772, whereby the rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the light guide plate support 1772 and the gear 1773 guides the gear 1773. The light plate 1771 can be moved in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow M41 and the opposite direction).

  A groove-like rail portion (not shown) extending in the left-right direction and slidably supporting the light guide plate 1771 to which the light emitting means is attached from below is fixedly provided below the light guide plate 1771. The lower end of the light guide plate 1771 is guided by the rail when moving in the left-right direction.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46, the light guide plate 1771 moves to a position where the right end of the light guide plate 1771 and the right end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap each other as an initial position, and moves to a position where the left end of the light guide plate 1771 overlaps the left end of the light guide plate 1751. It is configured to be possible. Note that the initial position of the light guide plate 1771 is not limited to the position where the right end of the light guide plate 1771 and the right end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap, and the right end of the light guide plate 1771 is on the right side of the right end of the light guide plate 1751. It may be a position or a position on the left side. Similarly, the end point of the movement range of the light guide plate 1771 is not necessarily limited to the position where the left end of the light guide plate 1771 and the left end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap, and the left end of the light guide plate 1771 is located closer to the left end of the light guide plate 1751. The position may be the left side or the right side.

  As described above, since the light guide plate 1771 is provided so as to be movable in the left and right directions by the operation of the gear 1773, by moving the light guide plate 1771 in which the picture 1781 of the fish is displayed in the light emitting direction to the left, the school of fish with the picture 1761 is formed. Can produce an effect that looks as if the school of fish is moving from right to left. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the light guide plate 1771 that emits and displays the fish pattern 1781 is moved in a state where the fish pattern 1761 is not displayed and emitted on the light guide plate 1751, thereby displaying the image on the light guide plate 1751. It is possible to show the player an effect of moving a school of fish that is smaller than the size of the school of fish that is possible (that is, the width of the school of fish is narrower).

  Further, since the light guide plate 1771 is relatively movable with respect to the light guide plate 1751, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the fish pattern 1781 is displayed with the fish pattern 1761 illuminated on the light guide plate 1751. When the light guide plate 1771 on which light emission is displayed is moved, the school of fish with the picture 1781 (the school of fish displayed on the light guide plate 1771) is different from the school of fish with the picture 1761 (the school of fish displayed on the light guide plate 1751). It can appear as if it is moving at a relative speed. Accordingly, the behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751 can be compared with the case where the fish school by the pattern 1761 appears to move from right to left on the light guide plate 1751 with only one light guide plate 1751. Can be complicated.

  After the light guide plate 1771 is moved to the left (M41 direction), after the effect using the light emission display of the light guide plate 1771 ends, the light emitting means is turned off (that is, the state in which the fish pattern 1781 is not displayed by light emission). After that, the gear 1773 is operated to move rightward to the initial position.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to the light guide plate 1751, the light guide plate 1771 that is relatively movable with respect to the light guide plate 1751 is provided. The behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751 can be complicated as compared with the case where the display is performed. Also, the behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751 is compared with the case where the two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 are fixedly provided (that is, one is not moved relatively to the other). Can be complicated. Therefore, the variation of the display mode of the fish school which can be visually recognized by the player from the front is increased, and the display mode of the image by the light guide plate can be diversified.

  In addition, since the light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are provided so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, a sense of depth can be expressed by the picture 1761 displayed on the light guide plate 1751 and the picture 1781 displayed on the light guide plate 1771. Therefore, also in such a point, it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode of the fish school that can be visually recognized by the player from the front, and thus it is possible to realize the diversification of the display mode of the image by the light guide plate.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment, a device has been devised so that the player can easily grasp the information on the occurrence interval of the start winning. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to fifteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 47A is a screen diagram for explaining a display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47 (a), a suspended count display area 1810 is provided on the lower side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The number-of-times-of-suspension display area 1810 is an area in which a reserve icon 1812 (see FIG. 47B) indicating that the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is reserved is displayed.

  In the number-of-times-of-retention display area 1810, a number (eight in the present embodiment) of icons corresponding to the sum of the upper limit values of the number of times of reserving the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed. Display areas A1 to A8 are provided. Each time the number of times the special symbol is held (the number of times the unit game right related to the special symbol is held) is increased, one icon is moved rightward from the leftmost icon display area A1 (that is, toward the icon display area A8). A hold icon 1812 is displayed in the display area. Accordingly, the player can determine the number of unit game rights related to the reserved special symbol (that is, the number of variable display of the reserved special symbol) from the number of the reserved icons 1812 displayed in the reserved number display area 1810. ) Can be grasped. The number of times the first special symbol is reserved is displayed in the four icon display areas A1 to A4 on the left side, and the number of times the second special symbol is retained is displayed in the four icon display areas A5 on the right. To A8.

  On the upper right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, a platform state icon display area 1820 is provided. The platform state icon display area 1820 is an area where a platform state icon 1821 described later is displayed. Although the details will be described later, the player can determine the state of the pachinko machine 100 on which the platform state icon 1821 is displayed, based on the number of platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820.

  FIG. 47B is a schematic diagram showing a screen transition of the decorative symbol display device 479 as the number of times of suspension increases. The special symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a state in which the special symbol is not changed, the right of the unit game is not reserved, and the special game state is not set (hereinafter, this state is also referred to as a “non-variable state”). , The second special symbol), the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is temporarily held, but the variable display of the special symbol is immediately started. Therefore, with the start of the variable display, the number of times the special symbol is suspended becomes 0 (zero). Hereinafter, the start winning of the special symbol generated in the non-fluctuation state is also referred to as “first starting winning” for convenience.

  When the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning is started, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the reservation schedule icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area until the number of times the special symbol is held becomes one. A1 is displayed. The scheduled holding icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area corresponding to the number of holdings of “current number of holdings + 1” in the icon display areas A1 to A8 until the start winning of the next special symbol is generated. The icon has a predetermined shape (round shape in the example shown in FIG. 47B).

  The hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change its display mode in accordance with the elapsed time from the last (ie, last) start winning award. In the example shown in FIG. 47B, the numerical value displayed in the hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change over time as a numerical value indicating the number of seconds of the elapsed time.

  The start winning interval (that is, the elapsed time since the last winning start) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940, and transmits a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol. The interval of the reception timing of (for example, a hold command) is measured as the interval of occurrence of the start winning. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the last start winning prize, and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub control board 940.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47B, the size of the hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change according to the elapsed time. Specifically, the size of the hold schedule icon 1811 is displayed at a predetermined minimum size at the time of the last occurrence of the start winning prize, and is determined according to the elapsed time from the start winning (the last occurrence of the start winning prize). After a predetermined time from the minimum size (in the example shown in FIG. 47B, 10.0 seconds), the size reaches the maximum size that can be displayed in the icon display areas A1 to A8.

  If the next start winning does not occur even if the scheduled holding icon 1811 reaches the maximum size, the scheduled holding icon 1811 returns to the minimum size, and gradually changes again from the minimum size. The pending schedule icon 1811 repeats the change from the minimum size to the maximum size and returns to the initial size when the size reaches the maximum size until the next start winning is generated.

  Within a period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning prize to the return to the non-variable state, a start winning prize of a new special symbol following the first start winning (hereinafter, the starting prize is referred to as a convenience) (Hereinafter, also referred to as “second start winning”), the number of times of holding for the special symbol is 1, and the icon display area A1 is replaced with the scheduled holding icon 1811 as shown in FIG. A hold icon 1812 is displayed.

  The hold icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 due to the occurrence of the second start winning has the same size as the hold scheduled icon 1811 at the time of occurrence of the second start win, and the first start win is displayed. Contains a numerical value indicating the time elapsed since the occurrence.

  Therefore, the hold icon 1812 is an icon indicating that the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is held, and the display mode has changed in accordance with the lapse of time since the last start winning. This is also a confirmed display of the hold scheduled icon 1811 associated with the occurrence of the next new start winning. Therefore, each of the reserved icons 1812 displayed in each of the icon display areas A1 to A8 indicates the timing of occurrence of a special winning prize corresponding to each of the reserved icons 1812, and the last time (ie, the generation of the special winning prize) with respect to the special winning prize. This is displayed in a display mode that reflects the time interval between the start of the special symbol and the timing of the occurrence of the special winning start.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon 1812 is displayed in a display color different from the hold schedule icon 1811. For example, the hold schedule icon 1811 is displayed in blue and the hold icon 1812 is displayed in red, or the hold icon 1812 is displayed in red. The icon 1811 is displayed in a light color with a transparent background, and the hold icon 1812 is displayed in a dark color with a transparent color. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish whether the icon displayed in the number-of-times-of-holding display area 1810 is the scheduled-to-hold icon 1811 or the held icon 1812 based on a difference in display color. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the display colors of the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are the same, or a configuration in which the shapes of the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are different from each other.

  When the hold icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 is displayed, that is, during the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning prize to the return to the non-change state, the second start winning is achieved. When this occurs, the hold icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A2 corresponding to the hold count of “2” which is “the current hold count + 1”, and the hold icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A1. Similarly, the display mode changes according to the elapsed time from the last start winning.

  If the second start winning does not occur within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning until the return to the non-variable state, the holding schedule displayed in the icon display area A1 The icon 1811 is always or constantly deleted. Examples of the certain condition include a case where the player does not touch the firing operation device 250 and ends the firing operation, or a case where the player wins the jackpot lottery and shifts to the special game state. .

  In addition, when the holding for the special symbol is exhausted, that is, when the variable display during execution ends, the holding icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 is deleted and displayed in the icon display areas A2 to A8. The held icon 1812 moves from the icon display area being displayed to the icon display area on the left side thereof while maintaining the display mode.

  The hold schedule icon 1811 also moves from the icon display area being displayed to the icon display area on the left of the icon display areas A2 to A8 as the hold for the special symbol is exhausted, and the display mode is changed. Continue to change. Then, in a state in which the hold scheduled icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area A1, the next start winning does not occur, and the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning until returning to the non-change state. When the period has expired, the hold schedule icon 1811 displayed in the icon display area A1 is deleted.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the number of times of suspension is 1, a start winning prize of a new special symbol following the second starting prize (hereinafter, the starting prize is referred to as " When the third start winning is generated), the number of times of holding the special symbol is 2, the holding icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A2 as the final display of the holding scheduled icon 1811, and the holding scheduled icon is displayed. 1811 is displayed in the icon display area A3.

  Next, the platform state icon display area 1820 will be described. In an initial state in which the pachinko machine 100 is activated by operating the power switch 909, a predetermined maximum number (10 in the present embodiment) of the platform state icons 1821 are displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820. Have been.

  During a predetermined game period (in the present embodiment, during a firing operation in which a game ball is being fired from the firing device 330 in the normal game state), a start winning prize of 1 is generated, and then a special symbol starting prize is won. If a new starting prize does not occur even after a predetermined first period (for example, 60 seconds) provided in advance as a period sufficient to doubt the possibility of an abnormality related to occurrence of One of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the icon display area 1820 is deleted.

  In other words, during the period in which the game ball is being fired from the launching device 330 in the normal game state, the interval of occurrence of the special winning start winning is a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the special winning winning (ie, , The first period), the number of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 decreases by one until the number thereof becomes zero. Therefore, the smaller the number of the platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820, the higher the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol starting winning.

  The determination as to whether or not the game ball is being fired from the firing device 330 may be made based on detection of contact between the firing handle 252 and the player by the contact sensor 254, or the firing path. A sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the game area via 401B may be provided, and the detection may be performed based on detection of a game ball (game ball that has entered the game area) by the sensor, or may be discharged from the game area. A sensor may be provided in the collection / discharge passage through which the game ball passes, and the detection may be performed based on the detection of the game ball (game ball discharged from the game area) by the sensor.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the game ball is being fired from the firing device 330, a period in which the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the start winning of the special symbol is low is set in advance after the start winning of one is generated. In the case where a new start winning event occurs continuously for a predetermined reference number of times (for example, three times) before a predetermined second period (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first period elapses, Indicates that the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol starting winning is low, so that one platform status icon 1821 is added to the platform status icon display area 1820. When the number of the platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820 has reached the maximum number, the display of the maximum number of the platform state icons 1821 is maintained.

  In a case where the special symbol starting prize occurring at an interval shorter than the second period continues beyond the reference number of times, each time the special symbol starting prize occurs beyond the reference number of times, the platform state icon 1821 is set to one. Are added one by one. After a special symbol starting prize occurring at an occurrence interval shorter than the second period continues for a reference number of times, the number of special symbol starting prizes occurring at an occurrence interval shorter than the second period starts counting from zero again. Each time a special symbol starting prize occurring at an occurrence interval shorter than two periods occurs continuously for the reference number of times, one platform state icon 1821 may be added.

  The number of table state icons 1821 displayed in the table state icon display area 1820 is returned to the initial value (maximum number) until the power switch 909 is turned off (that is, while the pachinko machine 100 is running). Without being updated, it is maintained at the updated value as described above. Therefore, the player refers to the number of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 of each pachinko machine 100, and selects a pachinko machine for playing from among the pachinko machines 100 in which the game is not performed. Machine 100 can be selected. Note that an operating device for returning the number of the platform state icons 1821 to the initial value may be provided, and the number of the platform state icons 1821 may be returned to the initial value when the operating device is operated. As a position where a store clerk can operate and a player cannot operate, for example, the position may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each of the holding icons 1812 displayed in the respective icon display areas A1 to A8 of the holding count display area 1810 indicates whether the special symbol corresponding to each of the holding icons 1812 has a start winning prize, The special symbol is displayed in a display mode reflecting a time interval from the time of the occurrence of the start winning prize of the special symbol immediately before (ie, last generated before the occurrence of the starting winning).

  Accordingly, the occurrence interval of the start winning prize of the special symbol is reflected in the display mode of the hold icon 1812, so that the player can select the one or a plurality of the hold icons 1812 displayed in the hold count display area 1810 based on each display mode. During the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning due to the occurrence of the special winning start in the non-variable state to the return to the non-variable state, the special symbol start winning is generated. It is possible to grasp the degree of easiness (that is, whether or not a special symbol starting winning is likely to occur during the period).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, before the start of the next special winning start, the display schedule is changed according to the elapsed time since the last start winning. Is displayed in the hold count display area 1810, so that the player can intuitively grasp the elapsed time since the last start condition was satisfied from the state of the change in the display mode.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, an interval of occurrence of a special symbol starting winning during a predetermined game period is provided in advance as a period sufficient to doubt the possibility of an abnormality related to occurrence of a special symbol starting winning. The number of the platform state icons 1821 is updated based on whether the predetermined first period has been exceeded or shorter than a predetermined second period provided in advance as a period in which the possibility of occurrence of a special symbol starting winning is low. Is done.

  Therefore, the state of the pachinko machine 100, more specifically, the state related to the occurrence of the special winning start (eg, the state of the nail 411) is the number of the platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820. Therefore, the player can determine the state of the pachinko machine 100 on which the platform state icon 1821 is displayed, based on the number of the platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820.

  In particular, the number of the platform state icons 1821 is updated during a predetermined game period (in the present embodiment, during a period in which a game ball is being fired from the launching device 330 in the normal game state), a special symbol start winning prize. Is updated on the basis of the interval, so that it is possible to exclude an event in which the interval of occurrence of the special winning prize becomes longer because the game is not performed. Therefore, the reliability of the relationship between the number of the table state icons 1821 and the state of the pachinko machine 100 can be increased.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration is added in which a probable change game state that can shift after the special game state and a time reduction game state can be suitably executed. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 48 is an illustration showing the type of the lottery result based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and the specifications such as the fluctuating time, the display effect, the number of open rounds of the special winning opening, the game state transition destination, and the presence or absence of the time reduction state. FIG. The fixed value data corresponding to this specification is stored in the ROM of the main control board 920, and is controlled by the main control board 920 according to the same program as in the above embodiment. In FIG. 48, items that are closely related to other types are displayed with thick frame lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a low probability state and a high probability state are set as a jackpot probability in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are selected. When the lottery is won, one of the big hit 1 and the big hit 2 is selected. The jackpot winning probability is set to, for example, approximately 1/320 in the low probability state and to approximately 1/137 in the high probability state. The selection probability of the jackpot type is, for example, 65% for the big hit 1 and 35 for the big hit 2 % Is set. Note that the fluctuating time, the display effect, and the like illustrate a configuration in which the probability-change game state and the time-short game state can be suitably executed, and are related to the second special symbol in the time-short state in which a start winning is generated by a right-handed game technique. Only the configuration will be described, and a part of the configuration related to the first special symbol and the configuration such as the variable display in the normal game state will be omitted.

  Here, as a specification relating to the first special symbol, as a big hit in the normal game state (low probability state), the game is shifted to the positive change game state after the special game state, and the number of times the positive change game state is continued until the next big hit is unlimited. A jackpot including at least a jackpot that shifts to a state is set. In addition, as a specification related to the first special symbol, other big hits may be included as a big hit in the normal game state (low probability state), for example, a unit of a certain number of times as a big hit that shifts to the positive change game state after the special game state If you do not win a jackpot even if you execute the game, you can set a certain change in the number of times to return to the normal game state. May be set to include a jackpot in which the number of times to return to the normal game state when the game is not won is limited to a time-saving game state.

  The probable change game state and the time saving game state are both time reduction states, and are states in which the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the form in which the variable display is set according to the same selection condition in the probable change game state and the time saving game state is illustrated. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to recognize the transition from the certainty-variable gaming state to the time-saving gaming state with a delay so as to make it difficult for the player to recognize the transition. Specifically, the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed by the player after a certain period of time has elapsed after it has been determined that the game will transition to the normal gaming state unless a jackpot is won in the unit game in 100 time-saving gaming states. Recognizable control, display control of fluctuation display and production at the timing when the remaining number of unit games in the time saving game state corresponding to the 80th unit game is 20 times, fluctuation display at a timing different from the timing, The control is different from the display control of the effect.

  First, with reference to FIG. 48 (a), a description will be given of a basic specification relating to the second special symbol in the time saving state, in which the remaining number of unit games in the time saving game state is not 20 times.

  When the big hit 1 is won, a long-time fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is set from 60 seconds to 120 seconds is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 479 executes a battle effect such as, for example, a warlord of the Sengoku period fighting. As a result, after the effect of the character selected by the player or the character set in advance as the leading role being won is performed, the plurality of symbols stop at the symbol corresponding to the big hit. Then, a special game state of 15 rounds is generated, and after the special game state, the game mode shifts to a probable change game state accompanied by a time saving state, and the probable change game state continues until the next big hit winning unit game is executed.

  When the big hit 2 is won, the result is displayed from the fluctuation display with the fluctuation time set to a short time of approximately 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the large winning device (for example, the lower large winning device 433) is approximately 0.2 seconds. Takes a two-round special game state in which the entry allowable posture is taken twice to open the special winning opening. The interval time between the approach allowable postures is set to approximately 0.6 seconds, and a special game state of approximately 1.0 seconds in total is generated. It is preferable that the entry allowable posture in this special game state is set to a time length equal to or less than half of the firing time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) of the game ball so that the game ball hardly enters the large winning device. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence time of the big hit 2.

  After winning the big hit 2 and finishing the special game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state with a limited number of times, and if the big game is not won in the unit game relating to 100 special symbols, the game shifts to the normal game state. . Within 100 times as a limit of the number of times, if a big hit 1 is won, the game shifts to a probable change gaming state, and if a big hit 2 is won, the unit game is constituted by 100 special symbols corresponding to the upper limit again after the winning. The time-saving gaming state is started.

  Here, for the player, the winning of the big hit 2 during the probability change game state is an opportunity to shift the gaming state from the probability change game state to the time saving game state, and the time reduction game state is limited in the number of times. If the player is immediately made aware of the winning, there is a possibility that the player may feel disappointed, such as reducing the willingness to continue the game. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player not recognize the winning of the big hit 2 immediately, and recognize that the big hit 2 was previously won at the timing near the end of the time saving game state. The configuration is as follows. For this reason, if the big hit 1 corresponding to the shift to the probable change game state in the time saving game state is won, the player does not need to recognize the win of the big hit 2 and the probability that the probable change game state continues is higher than the set probability. Like a thing, it is possible to make the player recognize through the effect.

  When the big hit 2 is won, a display effect similar to that of the loss that has not been won in the special symbol lottery is executed. The change time of the loss is set to approximately 1.5 seconds, and is substantially the same as the total time of the change time of the big hit 2 and the time of the special game state in which the special winning state which is the occurrence time of the special game state is opened. It has become. On the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, the character selected by the player in advance is displayed, and the character "waiting for battle" is continuously displayed. At the end of the display screen, for example, the variable display and the stop display are repeatedly displayed in a symbol such as a very small number such as 3 mm, and the player can visually recognize the variable display and the stop display of the symbol. It is impossible to visually recognize the situation where the “waiting for battle” state continues. In addition, the stop timing of the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the big hit 2 is won is set to about 1.5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation which is the same as the end timing of the special game state, and the stop result is the same as the loss. It is preferable that the symbol display is different from the symbol corresponding to the big hit and that the change display of the loss and the appearance and the time are substantially the same as the change display, thereby also making it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence time of the big hit 2. be able to.

  In the case where the big hits 1 and 2 are not won as a special symbol lottery, a small hit is set as a winning in which the big winning device is operated and the big winning opening is opened. The small hit is a hit where the previous state is maintained without the game state transitioning to another game state, and is set so as to generate a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the large winning device. . For example, a small hit is won with a probability of approximately 1/234, and the big prize winning device operates as in the case of the big hit 2. The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled to have the same (same) display content as in the case of winning the big hit 2. As a special symbol change display, a short-time change display is executed in about 0.5 seconds, and thereafter, the special winning device takes the approach allowable posture of about 0.2 seconds twice to open the special winning opening. Generate a small hitting game state of the round. Thereby, even if the player pays attention to the big prize winning device, the player cannot distinguish between the big hit 2 and the small hit, and it is difficult to recognize the occurrence time of the big hit 2.

  If the special symbol lottery is not won, the result of the loss is a result, and a short-time fluctuation display of about 1.5 seconds longer than the big hit and the small hit is executed, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is performed. The words "waiting for battle" continue to be displayed. Depending on the result of the loss, the gaming state does not shift, and the previous state is continued in the time reduction state.

  Here, in the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the fluctuation display of the special symbol stops fluctuating at a timing of approximately 0.5 seconds, and a stop symbol corresponding to each of the big hit 1, the big hit 2, the small hit and the loss is displayed. Is displayed. For this reason, in the inspection of the gaming machine and the like, the display contents of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are managed so that the accurate transition state of the gaming state can be recognized. In addition, the management device that manages the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a device having an external terminal that externally outputs information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 100, and thereby, a big hit 1, a big hit 2, a small hit, and a loss Corresponding information may be output so that an accurate transition state of the game state can be managed at the game hall.

  Next, referring to FIG. 48 (B), it is a specification relating to the second special symbol in the time saving state, and the remaining number of unit games in the time saving game state is 20 (hereinafter also referred to as “special effect time”). The specifications set for are described. In addition, the specifications set for the special production times are different from those set for other times in the setting of the fluctuating time and the display effects, and the number of rounds to open the special winning opening, the destination of the game state and The setting of the time saving state is the same.

  In the case of winning one big hit in the special production time, the same fluctuation display and control of the production as in the non-special production time timing are performed, the battle performance is finally won, and the game shifts to the 15 round special game state. From, the certain change game state is started.

  In the case of winning the big hit 2 in the special performance time, the fluctuation time is set to the same time length as the big hit 1, and up to the middle of the fluctuation display, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is the same as the big hit 1 Character appears, and a battle effect of performing a battle is displayed. Then, in the latter half of the variable display, a character that is selected by the player due to the appearance of another character has been defeated, and a situation that is unfortunate for the player has occurred. However, when the big hit 2 is won, the remaining number of unit games in the time-saving game state, which is reduced to the remaining 20 times, is increased to 100 times, which is advantageous for the player as compared with the loss or the small hit. It becomes.

  When a small hit is won in the special effect time, display control is performed in exactly the same way as in the case of the big hit 2, except for the result display of the special symbol display device 472. For this reason, in the special performance time, the player recognizes whether the small hit or the big hit 2 has been won, even if the user sees the decorative symbol display device 479 or confirms the operation of the big win device. Can not. As a result, the player can be made aware of which of the winnings has been made in the next and subsequent 19 time saving game states through the effect.

  For example, after the winning of the big hit 2 and the small hit, a display corresponding to the remaining times of the time saving state in the case of the small hit is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and, for example, "19 remaining time savings" is displayed. After that, the remaining number is subtracted and displayed in synchronization with the execution of the variable display. In the case of a small hit, the time is reduced to "0 times remaining" and the game mode shifts to the normal game mode. In the case of a big hit 2, "resumption of battle" is displayed instead of "0 times remaining". May be suggested to the player that the time-saving gaming state continues. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the transition to the normal game state is established unless the condition for transition to the normal game state is already satisfied and the jackpot is not won in the remaining 19 unit games. it can.

  If the lottery related to the special symbol is not won in the special effect time and the game is lost, the display control is performed in the same manner as the small hit and the big hit 2 except for the result display of the special symbol display device 472. Done. In addition, in the case of the small hit and the big hit 2, since the big winning device operates for about 1.0 second, in the case of a loss, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter accordingly. In the special performance time, whether the small hit, the big hit 2, or the loss is lost cannot be recognized even if the decorative design display device 479 is visually recognized. However, by confirming the operation of the big prize winning device, it is possible to recognize whether it is a losing or other. Further, even after the loss, a display corresponding to the remaining number of times in the time saving state may be displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation time in the big hit 2 and the small hit and the fluctuation time of the loss are different from each other in the time corresponding to the time (approximately 1.0 second) in the special game state and the small hit game state in which the big winning opening is opened. It is not necessary, and the same fluctuation time may be set. In addition, since the ratio of the difference in the fluctuation time increases in a short-time fluctuation, for example, a fluctuation time of about 2 seconds or less is set by setting a time difference, and the fluctuation time exceeding 2 seconds is set. For example, a variation time may be set in which a time difference is provided only in a part, such as setting without providing.

  Next, the invincible time effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the invincible time effect, a character indicating “invincible time” as a predetermined effect display and a timer indicating a period of the “invincible time” (hereinafter also referred to as an invincible period) are displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display. By doing so, a display condition (so-called mission) for instructing execution of a battle effect within a certain time is issued, and the change display that satisfies the display condition becomes a big hit. This invincible time production refers to the remaining number of time-saving gaming states, and if the battle production that is to be executed in the special production is displayed during the invincible period that ends before the special production, a big hit Is set as an effect that generates

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the display effect setting process S2000 which is a part of the flowchart in the main process of the sub control board 940. The display effect setting process S2000 is stored as a control program which is a part of the fixed value data in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, and is performed at regular time intervals as a part of the main process after the initial processing of the sub-control board 940 is completed ( For example, the processing is executed every 10 ms.

  In the display effect setting process S2000, first, it is confirmed whether or not the employee is in a time saving state (S2001). The time-saving state includes both the time-saving game state and the probable changing game state. If the time-saving state is not in effect (S2001: N), the processing from S2002 to S2015 for setting execution of the invincible time effect is skipped, and the invincible time effect After performing other processing S2016 for performing display control other than the above, the display effect setting processing S2000 is ended. In the process of S2016, the display control of the effect including the update of the display content of the invincible time effect is performed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the vehicle is in the time saving state (S2001: Y), it is determined whether or not the invincible time is during the already set invincible period (S2002). Whether or not the invincible time is set is determined by referring to a flag (a partial area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940) that is turned on during the invincible period. If it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the invincible time is set during the invincible time (S2002: Y), the processing of S2003 to S2015 for setting execution of the invincible time effect is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2016. Transition.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the game is not invincible (S2002: N), a lottery counter value that generates a random value (for example, 0 to 65535) generated within a certain range for effect setting. (Part of the RAM of the sub-control board 940) is acquired (S2003), and by using the lottery counter value, preparations are made to determine whether or not to perform the invincible time effect and the length of the period by lottery. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S2004, it is determined whether or not an invincible time is set (S2004). This determination is made, for example, by determining whether or not the lottery counter value is within the range of “0 to 655”. If it is determined that the invincible time is not set, for example, if the value is outside the range (S2004: N), the process proceeds to S2016.

  In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the time is within the range of the value for setting the invincible time (S2004: Y), the remaining number of times in the time reduction state (remaining number) is acquired (S2005). The remaining number of times in the time-saving state is confirmed by monitoring the progress of the unit games in 100 times in the time-saving game state by the sub-control board 940, and when in the probability-changing game state, the unit games in the time-saving state in 100 times or more Since the remaining number of times exists, the subsequent determination is made as 100 times.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the remaining number is 70 or more (S2006). In the variation display in the time reduction state, a short-time variation of approximately 1.5 seconds is performed each time. Therefore, if the remaining number is 70 or more (S2006: Y), the remaining number of times in the time reduction state is 20 times. By the time of the special effect, 50 or more variable displays are executed. Therefore, approximately 75 seconds, which is obtained by multiplying the remaining number of times “50” by the variation time of “approximately 1.5 seconds”, it takes time before the special effect. In this case, the lottery counter value is a multiple of “7” to determine whether to set “60 seconds”, which is an invincible period shorter than the time required for the special performance. Is determined (S2007), and if it is a multiple of “7” (S2007: Y), the setting to start the invincible time is performed (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2016. Thus, when it is determined that the invincible time is to be set, and in a situation where it takes about 75 seconds or more before the special stage, the invincible period with a certain probability (approximately 1/7) and an invincible period of “60 seconds” The time is set.

  In the case where it is determined in the processing of S2006 that the remaining number of times in the time saving state is less than 70 (S2006: N), and in the case where the lottery counter value is not a multiple of “7” in the processing of S2007 (S2007: N), it is determined whether or not the remaining number is 50 or more (S2009). If the number of remaining times is 50 or more, approximately 45 seconds obtained by multiplying “30” by “approximately 1.5 seconds” require time until the special stage. In this case, the lottery counter value is a multiple of “5” to determine whether to set “40 seconds”, which is an invincible period shorter than the time required for the special performance. (S2010), and if it is a multiple of “5” (S2010: Y), a setting is made to start an invincible time of “40 seconds” (S2011), and the process proceeds to S2016.

  In the case where it is determined in the processing of S2009 that the remaining number of times in the time saving state is less than 50 (S2009: N), and in the case where it is determined in the processing of S2010 that the lottery counter value is not a multiple of “5” (S2010: N), it is determined whether or not the remaining number is 40 times or more (S2012). If the remaining number of times is 40 or more, approximately 30 seconds obtained by multiplying “20” by “approximately 1.5 seconds” require time until the special stage. In this case, the lottery counter value is a multiple of “3” in order to determine whether to set “20 seconds”, which is an invincible period shorter than the time required for the special performance. It is determined (S2013). If it is a multiple of “3” (S2013: Y), a setting to start an invincible time of “20 seconds” is made (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2016.

  If it is determined that the time is not a multiple of “3” in the processing of S2013, the setting to start the invincible time of “10 seconds”, which is the invincible period shorter than approximately 30 seconds which is the minimum time required for the special effect, is set. (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2016.

  Here, the length of the invincible period is determined so as to be set with a higher probability as the shorter the invincible period, and the lottery is set as the lower probability as the longer the invincible period. On the other hand, a long invincibility period is rarely generated, and the occurrence of the invincible period occasionally strongly expects the start of the battle effect for a long time.

  The invincible period is not limited to the four types of “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “40 seconds”, and “60 seconds”, and the number of types may be increased or decreased. The length may include a different setting. Further, in the process of S2004, if the winning start has already occurred and the winning of one big hit has been determined, the invincibility period may be set with a higher probability than when the winning is not determined. As a result, the big hit 1 easily occurs after the invincible period occurs, so that the invincible time effect can be made desirable for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an operation including a transition of a game state and display contents in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a time chart showing the relationship between the transition of the game state and the display content, and illustrates a case where the state progresses to the right according to the elapsed time. FIG. 50 (a) shows an example in which the game shifts to the normal game state without a big hit 1 occurring in the time saving game state after the big hit 2, and FIG. 50 (b) shows a time saving game state after the big hit 2 is won. In FIG. 50C, an example in which the jackpot 1 is won and the probability changing game state is executed is shown, and FIG. 50 (c) is different from FIG. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), first, in the normal game state (in FIG. 50, “normal” is displayed), the decorative symbol display device 479 performs a change based on the start winning according to the special symbol 1 as a normal effect. An effect of display is performed. When a big hit that shifts to the probable changing game state in the normal game state is won, a big hit game of, for example, 15 rounds is performed as a special game state, and the effect during the big hit is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. After the special game state, the game state is changed to the positive change game state, and the variable display based on the start winning according to the special symbol 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed gaming method. If the variable display does not win the big hit 1 and the big hit 2, The display “waiting for battle” is continuously displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  When the jackpot 2 is won during the probable change game state, the time-saving game is performed through a short special game state (not shown) of about 1.0 second, in which the game ball can hardly enter the big winning device. Move to state. The display of "Battle waiting" including the short special game state is continuously displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and it is difficult for the player to notice that the state has shifted to the time reduction game state. . The jackpot probability is reduced by shifting to the time-saving game state, so that the player can expect the long-lasting gaming state to continue for a long time, but it is easy to set the jackpot probability to a low value, It is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-play game with reduced play.

  After shifting to the time-saving game state, the unit game is executed 80 times in a non-winning jackpot, and when the remaining number of times in the time-saving state reaches 20 times, a fluctuation display of a long battle effect is executed and the battle is lost. Is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. With this display, the player recognizes that the jackpot 2 has already been won and the time-saving gaming state ends with the remaining 20 unit games, and the display of the battle end is displayed on the display screen in the subsequent 20 unit games. The actual result indicating how many battles have been won since the start of the probable game state is displayed, and the game state advantageous to the player including the time-saving game state ends, and the game returns to the normal game state.

  Here, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 50 (a), when a big hit is won during the battle standby period before the remaining 20 times of time saving, at that timing, a battle effect is executed and the battle is won. An effect is displayed, and a big hit game of 15 rounds is started as a special game state. For this reason, the battle effect that occurs during the period of the battle standby before the remaining 20 hours will be a battle effect that always results in a battle victory, and during this period, the start of the battle effect is the period corresponding to the occurrence of one big hit. Has become. For this reason, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 50 (a), during the battle standby before the remaining 20 time reductions, “invincible time” is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and the remaining time as the invincible period is displayed. Even if an invincible time effect in which is displayed is subtracted, if a battle effect occurs during this period, it means that a big hit has been won during this invincible period. In other words, since it is an invincible period in which the battle is not lost, an invincible time effect can be set.

  The “invincible time” is set by the above-described display effect setting process S2000 (see FIG. 49) at a timing that always ends before the battle defeat effect is executed, as shown in FIG. After the end of the time, the result of losing the battle after the battle effect is started is displayed, and after the display, the advantageous game state including the time-saving game state ends. The player can visually recognize the battle performance itself after visually confirming the state in which the execution of the battle performance is instructed as invincible time, so that the player can experience the contents of the battle performance and perform the next game. It is possible to motivate the game by imagining specific contents.

  FIG. 50 (b) shows a case in which, during the battle standby before the remaining 20 hours of time saving, the jackpot is won and the time saving game state is established, and thereafter, the big hit 1 is won and the probability changing game state is established again. I have. Also, FIG. 50 (c) shows a case in which the big hit 1 is won without the big hit 2 being won and the probability change game state is generated (continued) as compared with FIG. 50 (b). When comparing FIG. 50 (b) and FIG. 50 (c), although the transition of the game state is different, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 after the change of the special symbol 2 is started is a big hit in the state of the battle standby. No. 1 has been won, and the display contents are the same. For this reason, the winning of the big hit 2, which is an opportunity to shift to the normal game state, is continued even in the unit game in which the battle standby effect is won in the big hit 2, so that the player can not recognize it. Therefore, it is easy to give an impression that the probable change game state has continued, and the transition from the probable change state to the time saving game state has been performed, or the remaining number of times of the time reduction game state has been subtracted, and the transition to the normal game state is approaching. It is possible to suppress the opportunity to know the situation.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, a special jackpot that shifts to the certain-variable gaming state after the special gaming state is won, and a special gaming state and an unlimited number of times (no upper limit set) are generated. , A special game state and a time-saving game state occur. The time-saving gaming state is defined as a limit of the number of times that the unit game based on the establishment of the start condition is executed 100 times, or at least the number of times that the unit game is continued until the jackpot is won during the execution of the 100 unit games (upper limit setting). It is a time-saving game state. Then, when the jackpot 2 is won in the probable game state, the display of the battle standby as the display content displayed when the jackpot 2 is not won in the probable game state is continuously displayed. For this reason, even if the player is visually recognizing the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479, the player cannot recognize that the game has shifted from the certainty-variable game state to the time-saving game state, and after that, 79 non-winning unit games are won. After executing, visually recognize the effect of battle defeat as a predetermined effect display in the 80th unit game, win the jackpot 2, and return to the normal game state after completing the 100 jackpot non-winning unit games. Can be recognized with a delay.

  On the other hand, even if the player wins the jackpot 2 and shifts to the time-saving game state in the probability change game state, if the player wins the jackpot 1 before the battle defeat effect is displayed, the special change state is passed to the probability change game state. Then, the probability change game state is started anew, and in this case, the effect display of the battle defeat at the timing when the planned 100 jackpot non-winning unit games are finished is not displayed. Therefore, for the player, by visually recognizing the effect display of the battle defeat, it is possible to reduce the chance of recognizing the situation in which the jackpot 2 is won and the possibility of returning to the normal game state is increased by the display content. Can be. Therefore, the probability of visually confirming the effect display of the battle defeat can be suppressed as compared with the probability of winning the big hit 2 returning to the normal gaming state among the big hits. Is set to be low, and it is easy to give an impression that the gaming machine has a high probability of the probability change game state continuing. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect display suitable for the player while suppressing the transition probability to the advantageous game state and the continuation probability of the advantageous game state.

  In the time-saving game state in which the upper limit number is limited to 100 times, the period of the invincible time is set according to the remaining number of time-saving game states. If the jackpot has not been won until the execution of the 80th unit game after the invincible time period has elapsed, the display of the battle effect in which the character fights and the display of the battle defeat corresponding to the non-winning of the jackpot is displayed. The effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and an effect display in which the character moves is executed. Since the period display indicating the period of invincible time is performed when the number of remaining unit games in the time reduction game state remains more than a certain number, the display of battle defeat is set to be executed always after the period of invincible time can do.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is won within the period of the invincible time, an effect display in which the character wins in the battle in which the character battles is executed. In other words, by displaying the invincible time, when the battle effect is started, the character that transitions to an advantageous gaming state in the event of victory presents display conditions that will always win, and the display conditions It is possible to provide a player with a game property in which a special game state occurs when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, after the display of the invincible time and the invincible period is displayed, it is possible to always generate an opportunity for the player to visually recognize the effect display in which the predetermined character operates, and for the player to pay attention to the effect contents. It is possible to reduce the situation of causing dissatisfaction, and make it easier to continue the game.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a setting change function for setting the ball outgoing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of gaming balls. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a front view of a game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. The game board 400X is provided with a flow-down changing member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412, a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base 401, and the like in the same manner as the game board 400. The middle starting winning device 2431 which is a starting device according to the first special symbol arranged on the lower side, and the right which is a starting winning device according to the second special symbol which is arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420. A start winning device 2432, a lower large winning device 2434 disposed below the middle starting winning device 2431, an upper large winning device 2433 disposed below the right starting winning device 2432, General prize devices 2439A and 2439B arranged on both left and right sides of the prize device 2434 are provided.

  The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches as detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned middle starting winning device 2431 or the like (see FIG. 53), and goes to a predetermined area corresponding to each switch. Of the game ball can be detected. For example, a middle-start winning switch 2441 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle-start winning device 2431, a right-start winning switch 2442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 2432, and a gaming ball that has entered the upper winning device 2433. , A lower winning switch 2444 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower winning device 2434, a combination operating switch 445, a start switch 446, and a non-forming device formed inside the upper winning device 2433. A non-specific path switch 2447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown), and a specific path switch for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433. 2448, general prize switches 2449A and 2449 for detecting game balls that have entered general prize devices 2439A and 2439B, respectively. 49B, and the like are placed on the game board 400X.

  The entrance portions of the game balls of the respective winning devices, specifically, the middle starting winning device 2431, the right starting winning device 2432, the upper winning device 2433, the lower winning device 2434, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B constitute a winning opening. The game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. Further, the game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area.

  A shooting ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 53) is provided in the collection and discharge passage. The fired ball detection switch 451 is configured by, for example, a pass-type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls fired in the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is transmitted to an external terminal board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. 580 (see FIG. 52). The detection of a game ball by the shooting ball detection switch 451 is performed based on the signal state from the shooting ball detection switch 451 in the switch reading process S1209 (see FIG. 55).

  The game ball whose passage is detected by the launching ball detection switch 451 in the collection / discharge passage is passed from the pachinko machine 100 to the game ball circulation device provided in the game hall via a discharge port provided on the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 100. (Not shown). When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 52).

  The right start winning device 2432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 2452 that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a right entry restriction device. And a right entry restriction solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 53) for driving the motor 2452. The right entry restriction mechanism 2452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 2462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening). Although the game ball cannot enter the right starting winning device 2432 by taking the arrangement, when the right approach regulation mechanism 2452 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece is arranged to guide the game ball into the entrance, thereby playing the game. The ball can enter the right starting prize device 2432. The right entry restriction mechanism 2452 is used when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as a “normal symbol lottery”), and the right entry is performed. In accordance with the driving by the regulating solenoid 2462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the upper prize winning device 2433 has an upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance permitted position and an entry prohibited position by transition between the entry permitted position and the entry restricted position, and an upper entry restriction. The upper approach control solenoid 2463 (see FIG. 53) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 2453 and the transition between the non-guidance attitude and the guidance attitude allow the game ball that has entered the upper-level winning device 2433 to enter the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distributing mechanism (not shown) for distributing, and a switching solenoid 2465 (see FIG. 53) for changing the orientation of the distributing mechanism to switch the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 is in the entry-prohibited position, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the upper entry prize apparatus 2433. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 is in the entry permissible posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the upper large winning device 2433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the upper winning award device 2433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided position that projects forward, and is in a guided position in which the distribution mechanism is immersed backward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, a game state (for example, a certain (Game state).

  As shown in FIG. 51, a lower entry prize device 2434 has a lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the lower entry prize device 2404 by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a lower entry restriction device. A lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 53) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 2454 is provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 is in the entry prohibition position, the game ball cannot enter the lower large prize winning device 2434 by closing the entrance (winning opening) by the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454, but the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454. Is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower big winning device 2434.

  A game ball can enter the upper winning prize device 2433 and the lower winning prize device 2434 when a jackpot lottery is won. Specifically, a lottery based on the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol detected by the middle start winning switch 2441 (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”) is won. In this case, the lottery based on detection of the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol by the right starting winning switch 2442 (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won. In this case, at least one of the upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 and the lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 is operated. By this operation, at least one of the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the upper entry control mechanism 2453 to the entry allowable posture, and further switches after a predetermined time from the transition to the guiding posture. When the solenoid 2465 stops, it returns to the non-guidance posture.

  Further, on the gaming board 400X, a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 53) constituted by a 7-segment display can be visually recognized in a state where the front block 102 is opened to the intermediate block 103 ( For example, it is provided at the upper left corner of the game board 400). The nail state level display device 474 is configured to be invisible or invisible to a player, and to be invisible to the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, , A position that overlaps the back side of the front block 102 and deviates from the light-transmitting viewing portion of the central panel 220).

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, a game ball enters a specific passage (an internal passage of the upper winning prize device 2433) during a special game state shifted based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state shifts after the special game state. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game state is shifted to a time-saving game state (that is, a game state in which the player is in a time-saving state and has a low probability). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to the certain-variable game state (that is, the game state where the time is reduced and the probability is high).

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to have the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a gaming state different from each of the above-described gaming states, or a configuration in which a transition between gaming states is performed under a condition different from the above-described conditions.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400X will be described generally in chronological order. In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the middle-start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the middle-start winning switch 2441 (see FIG. 53), the first special symbol starts to win. At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol is started in the gaming board 400 in the same manner as the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol.

  When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning, a case where a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning on the gaming board 400. Similarly, the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) corresponding to the big hit winning of the first special symbol lottery is determined based on the obtained big hit symbol random numbers.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected as in the case of the gaming board 400. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable effect) on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started in the same manner as in the gaming board 400, The symbols are continued, and the stop symbols relating to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed as the variable display time elapses.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 of the upper large winning device 2433 become the entry permissible posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 2443 and 2444, or a predetermined maximum during the allowable entry positions of the upper entry control mechanism 2453 and the lower entry control mechanism 2454, respectively. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the upper entry control mechanism 2453 or the lower entry control mechanism 2454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 or the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Only one of the upper entry control mechanism 2453 and the lower entry control mechanism 2454 takes an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in (). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture of the last round and after a predetermined standby time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432 relating to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the second special symbol is a start winning. The control of the unit game based on the winning start of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game related to the normal symbol is performed in the same manner as in the case of the game board 400. If the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restriction of the right starting winning device 2432 after the fixed symbol is displayed. The mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once. Specifically, in a case of winning in a non-time-saving state (a normal game state and a special game state), the right starting winning device 2432 allows the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 2432 is in the non-time-saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time is longer (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the case of winning in the time-saving state (the time-saving game state and the probable change game state). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right approach restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach prohibited attitude without waiting for the maximum allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to first win in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start prize device 2432 in a state where the right starting prize device 2432 is allowed to enter based on the winning. Must. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time of the entry permitted state of the right start winning device 2432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely shorter than the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, so that the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is much smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probable game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly greater than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays a game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends. Therefore, in the normal game state, the player plays a game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the sure-change game state, performs the game by the right-handed game method. Further, since the upper winning award device 2433 and the lower winning award device 434 are disposed on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed game technique even in the special game state.

  FIG. 52 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, a back setting switch 905 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The back setting switch 905 is a setting valid for validating a setting operation for setting the throwing rate of the pachinko machine 100 to any one of a plurality of predetermined steps (for example, 6 steps or 9 steps). Device.

  A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the back setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial position), thereby changing the setting of the throwing rate. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the change in the throwing rate is enabled in this way, the setting change in the throwing rate is effectively performed.

  When the setting change of the throwing rate is performed effectively, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, it can be said that the change in the setting of the throwing rate by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change in the game mode.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the initial hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is set in accordance with each step set by the change of the throwing rate (that is, the change of the setting of the game mode). And the probability of continuation (in the present embodiment, the probability of transition to the probable change game state after the special game state when transitioning to the special game state via the second special symbol lottery in the probable change game state) Any of the nine types of game modes different in combination with can be selected. Therefore, when the setting change of the throwing rate (change of setting of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are performed so that the initial hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage are obtained. By changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability), the pitching rate is adjusted.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the top type in which the probability of initial hit is significantly low but the probability of continuation is significantly high, and the middle type in which the probability of initial hit is medium and the probability of continuation is medium You can select the type and the bottom type, whose initial hit probability is significantly lower but the probability of change is much higher. Furthermore, in each of these types, a three-stage probability state (hereinafter, also referred to as a probability setting state) in which the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided into smaller widths than the width of the initial hit probability between the types, that is, A first-stage probability having the lowest initial hit probability among the three stages, a second-stage probability having the second lowest initial hit probability, and a third-stage probability having the highest initial hit probability can be selected.

  In the top type, the number of prize balls accompanying the prize to the middle start prize device 2431 and the right start prize device 2432 is smaller than that of the other types, but the prize ball according to the prize to the upper large prize device 2433 and the lower large prize device 2434. The number is higher than other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls accompanying the prize to the middle start prize device 2431 and the right start prize device 2432 is larger than that of other types, but it is accompanied by the prize to the upper large prize device 2433 and the lower large prize device 2434. The number of prize balls is smaller than other types.

  Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same number in any of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type based on the number of prize balls, and the gaming ability for estimating the setting of either type is extended for a long time. Can be added.

  In addition, the profit rate for the player changes according to the stage of the probability setting state for any of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for any type, The profit rate for the player is set substantially the same. For this reason, even if the setting of the probability is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall can be easily predicted, and the management of the game hall can be facilitated.

  It should be noted that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the throwing rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the initial hit probability and the probability change inrush rate as described above. Any of the inrush rates may be used. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the first hit probability and the probability of intrusion rate, such as the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery , The probability of a small hit being selected, the probability of intrusion rate (in the present embodiment, the rate of intrusion into the probability of change game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability of change game state shifted after the special game state (For example, the probability that the end of the probable game state is selected in the drop lottery performed every time the symbol is changed during the probable game state), and the like. May be a combination of two or more.

  Above the back setting switch 905, a setting display device 906 is provided. When the change of the throwing rate (change of the setting of the game mode) is effectively performed by operating the back setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. . The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabet character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type is represented by an alphabetic character of “T”, “M”, and “B”, respectively. In each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by “1”, the second-stage probability is represented by “2”, and the third-stage probability is represented by “3”.

  Therefore, for example, when the game mode is the top-type first-stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “T1”, and when the middle-type third-stage probability game mode is set. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “M3”, and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom-type second-stage probability game mode is “B2”.

  As shown in FIG. 52, an external terminal plate 580 is provided at the upper right end of the rear block 104 as viewed from the rear. The external terminal plate 580 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal during a special game state, an output terminal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451, and the like.

  FIG. 53 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the back setting switch 905 and the setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903.

  The signal relay unit 903 relays an ON-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated clockwise by approximately 90 ° by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows the game mode to be changed in response to receiving the ON-state setting signal from the back setting switch 905. The signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

  Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing main processing (main control main processing in FIG. 54) of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment.

  The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started upon returning from the power failure state, like the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, portions different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, after the start-up standby processing S1003, the output state of the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 of the power supply / emission control board 900 Is determined in step S2001.

  Specifically, when the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in an ON state indicating that the back setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (S1005: Y), information on substantially the entire area of the RAM is stored. Is performed, a RAM clear process S2002 for erasing is performed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is deleted.

  The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined (9 types in the present embodiment) game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM. ing. Therefore, by the RAM clear processing S2002, the information of substantially all areas except the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM of the main control board 920 is erased, and the setting change is permitted.

  When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal for identifying a game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

  Next, a setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is performed until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off when the back setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

  The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives the initialization signal based on the depression of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, an order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example,... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Are determined in advance, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

  Each time the change is performed, a value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM as setting correspondence information. Each time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is displayed on the setting display device. 906 is displayed.

  Accordingly, a setting changer such as a manager of a game arcade operates the initialization switch 907 until the game mode desired to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After the pressing is repeated, the game starting ball is won by the middle starting winning device 2431, whereby the selection of the game mode can be completed. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when a game ball is won in the middle-start winning device 2431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

  When the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), the RAM is changed to newly initialize various types of information in the RAM except for information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information). The setting process S2005 is executed. Thereby, the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is determined that the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

  After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 of outputting a set command indicating completion of RAM setting to the payout control board 930 is executed. Upon receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to a normal game process, and recognizes in which game mode it operates. it can.

  After the set command output processing S2006, processing after the special game state return preparation processing S1015 is executed. After the start-up standby process S1003, if the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S1005: N), the processes after the determination process S1004 are executed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is periodically performed (this embodiment is similar to the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment). In this case, the main processing is interrupted and executed (in a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)).

  Hereinafter, portions different from the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, as a part of the process executed when the game progress is not stopped (S1207: N). The nail state-related processing S2020 described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021 described later with reference to FIG. 57 are executed before the interrupt permission processing S1222.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the nail state related processing S2020. The nail state-related processing S2020 is processing for detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, and displaying and outputting a result based on the detection. Specifically, the nail state-related processing S2020 includes first half processings S1401 to S1405 related to the detection of the state of the nail 411 and second half processings S1501 to S1504 related to the display of the result based on the detection.

  In the nail state-related processing S2020, as shown in FIG. 56, first, the number of game balls that have entered the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B (hereinafter, referred to as “general prize number”), and the game balls fired in the game area. It is determined whether or not a period for counting the number (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of shot balls”) (hereinafter, referred to as a “counting period”) is in progress (S1401). In this way, by counting the number of general winnings and the number of shot balls only during the counting period, the ratio of the number of general winnings to the number of shot balls (that is, the game to the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B with respect to the number of shot balls). When calculating the ball entry ratio), the calculation result is less likely to be adversely affected by irregularities or averaging of numerical values.

  Note that the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined counting validity period in the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901; The period may be a period excluding a predetermined count invalidation period from the entire period.

  The “counting valid period” may be, for example, a period during which a game ball is fired from the firing device 330. Whether or not a game ball is being fired from the firing device 330 is determined by, for example, a variable resistor 253 that detects a rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 or a contact that detects that a player is touching the firing handle 252. The determination may be made based on the presence or absence of a predetermined firing operation based on the detection state of the sensor 254. For example, when it is detected by the variable resistor 253 that a rotation operation is performed on the firing handle 252, it may be determined that the game ball is being fired from the firing device 330, or the contact sensor 254 may be determined. When the contact with the firing handle 252 is detected by, the game ball may be determined to be fired from the firing device 330.

  In addition, the “counting valid period” may be a case where a predetermined launch operation is being performed or a gaming ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 within a flow-down elapsed time after the execution is completed. The elapsed time after the execution of the predetermined firing operation is the maximum time (for example, 15 seconds) that passes through the route that takes the longest time among the times detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is fired. ) Is preferably set, and the elapsed flow time is preferably set to the maximum time actually measured and a sufficient time in consideration of the variation in design. In addition, a certain time after the predetermined firing operation is started is not set as a counting validity period, for example, a path having the shortest time among the times detected by the fired ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is fired. The counting validity period may be set to a time excluding the shortest time (for example, 5 seconds) passing through.

  The “count invalid period” may be, for example, during a special game state. Whether or not the game is in the special game state can be determined, for example, based on the output state of a signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, the period from when the signal indicating that the special game state is being started to output from the external terminal board 580 to when the output of the signal ends is determined to be during the special game state.

  In addition, the “count invalid period” may be, for example, a period in which the previous block 102 is in an open state (that is, the previous block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103). Whether or not the front block 102 is open can be determined based on the output state of a signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 53).

  When the front block 102 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is not a game ball that has flowed down the game area and entered properly, but has been inspected by a factory shipping inspector while playing a game. (Hereinafter, referred to as a cheating person) or a person involved in the game arcade (eg, an employee of the game arcade) may put the game ball into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B. By excluding the period in which the previous block 102 is in the open state from the counting period, the game balls inserted into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B can be excluded from the counting target.

  Alternatively, for example, when it is detected that game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, a predetermined period thereafter may be set as the count invalidation period. Thus, after the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B can be excluded from the counting target by the further continuous injection.

  It should be noted that whether or not game balls have been continuously thrown into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is determined by, for example, the number of game balls that have entered each of the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B within a predetermined time, and the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B. The detection may be performed based on the entry interval of the game balls that enter.

  For example, when a game ball enters each of the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B in a predetermined number (for example, 10) within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the game sphere is continuously transmitted to the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B. It may be detected that it has been inserted. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more game balls enter the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 second interval), the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B receive a game. It may be detected that the balls have been continuously thrown.

  On the other hand, the “predetermined period”, which is a counting invalid period after the continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, may be, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), or thereafter. May be a period during which game balls are thrown into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. The “period during which game balls are thrown into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B continuously thereafter” is, for example, after continuous throwing is detected, subsequent to the continuous throwing, continuous throwing is detected under the same conditions as the detection. Period. Alternatively, in consideration of the fact that continuous dosing is performed intermittently, continuous dosing is performed for several tens seconds to several minutes (for example, about 30 seconds or about one minute) under the same conditions as the detection of continuous dosing. The detected period may be referred to as a “period during which game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B”.

  An invalid period (for example, 3 seconds) after a game ball is detected with respect to each of the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is a count invalid period for invalidating the count for the entry of the game ball. , The first predetermined invalid number (for example, one ball or two balls) may be counted, and the entry of a certain number of subsequent game balls may be invalidated. The entry of all the game balls continuously inserted including the predetermined invalid number may be excluded from the counting target and invalidated. This invalid period may be set in consideration of the probability that the game ball enters the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B. For example, a launch operation with the highest game ball entry probability (for example, a left-handed game method or In any of the right-handed gaming techniques), the invalid period may be set shorter as the probability increases, and the invalid period may be set longer when the probability is low, in accordance with the probability that the game ball continuously enters in any one of the right-handed game techniques. In addition, a time corresponding to the number (payout number) to be paid out when a game ball enters the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B may be set, for example, a prize device with a small number of payouts (for example, three balls). , A short invalid period (for example, approximately 1.2 seconds) is set, and a long invalid period (for example, approximately 2.4) is set for a winning device having a large number of payouts (for example, 15 balls). Second). In addition, as the counting invalid period, a time corresponding to the firing time interval of game balls (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be set. For example, the invalid period (approximately twice or more the firing time interval of game balls). 1.2 seconds or more), or a four-fold or more invalid period (about 2.4 seconds or more) may be set. Further, it is preferable that the predetermined invalid number is set to be larger as the probability of entering the game ball is higher, and is set to be smaller when the probability of entering the game ball is lower. Then, for each of a plurality of winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439A and the general winning device 2439B), a general winning number counter and a firing ball number counter are provided, respectively, so that the nail state level can be output separately. In this case, in each of the winning devices in which the counting is performed, at least one of the high and low of the probability of entry of the game ball and the number of payouts is set differently, and corresponding to the setting, the length of the invalid period or the predetermined invalid number is set. It is preferable that at least one of the settings is different.

  When the previous block 102 is in the open state and continuous throwing of game balls into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, a combination of a plurality of conditions, such as setting a subsequent predetermined period as a count invalidation period, is used. May be generated when the condition is satisfied. Thereby, the game balls continuously thrown into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B by the players on the game hall side can be appropriately excluded from the counting target.

  Alternatively, the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among all periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. The “predetermined counting start condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting start time (for example, 11:00 am or 3:00 pm), or every predetermined period (for example, every two hours). May be the timing to start counting. Further, the “predetermined counting start condition” is, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the winning random number counter related to the first or second special symbol becomes a predetermined value predetermined as the counting start condition). Or a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a counting start condition). Note that the counting start time, the interval between the counting start times, and the predetermined timing are not necessarily required to be the same every day or every time, and any one of a plurality of different types of preset settings is selected. The selection order may be selected in a predetermined order (for example, different settings for each day of the week), or may be determined by lottery. You may make it change at random. Further, the counting start condition may be satisfied a plurality of times a day.

  Further, the “predetermined period”, which is a counting period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, may be, for example, a period until the predetermined counting end condition is satisfied. The “predetermined counting end condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting end time (for example, 1:00 pm or 6:00 pm), or may be a predetermined timing. The timing predetermined as the counting end condition may be, for example, a timing at which a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed as a counting period, or a winning random number counter according to the first special symbol may be a counting end condition. The timing may be a timing determined in advance as a timing, or may be a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a counting end condition.

  Note that the counting start condition and the counting end condition may be appropriately combined with the above-described conditions. For example, a predetermined counting start time may be set as a counting start condition, and a predetermined counting end time may be set as a counting end condition, and the winning random number counter according to the first special symbol is determined as a counting start condition. The timing may be set as a counting start condition, and the timing at which a predetermined period (eg, 30 minutes) has elapsed as a counting period may be set as a counting end condition.

  Alternatively, after the power supply from the power supply unit 901 to the pachinko machine 100 is started, a winning random number counter related to the special symbol (a winning random number counter related to the first special symbol or a winning random number counter related to the second special symbol) is displayed. The timing at which the value is obtained a predetermined N-th time (N is an integer of 1 or more) may be used as the counting start condition. In such a case, the period as the counting end condition may be determined based on the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired at the Nth time. That is, the counting period may be different based on the value of the winning random number counter acquired at the predetermined N-th time. At this time, the count start condition may be satisfied each time the value of the winning random number counter acquired at the predetermined Nth time is acquired.

  Note that the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 is a predetermined counting valid period or a predetermined counting invalid period among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 described above. It is not necessary that the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among the excluded period or the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. May be adopted.

  In addition, when a predetermined period after a predetermined count start condition is satisfied among all periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 is used as a “counting period” serving as a determination reference in S1401. The predetermined period after a single type of counting start condition is satisfied does not need to be the “predetermined period”, and different types of counting start conditions (for example, a predetermined counting start time and a predetermined counting start time, Each of the predetermined periods after each of the counting start timings) is established may be the “counting period”, or the predetermined period after the counting start condition in which different types of counting start conditions are combined is established as the “counting period”. It may be configured to be a “counting period”.

  If it is determined in S2020 that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), the processing returns to the main control interrupt processing without executing the processing of S1401 to S1405, S1501 to S1504 described below. If it is determined that it is not during the counting period (S1401: N), the control may be started from the process of S1501, and the processes of S1501 to S1504 may be executed before returning to the main control interrupt process.

  On the other hand, in S2020, when it is determined that the counting period is in progress (S1401: Y), it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected (S1402). Specifically, based on detection of a game ball by the general winning switches 2449A and 2449B (see FIG. 53), a general winning switch detection flag (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to each of the switches 449A and 449B. Is set, it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected.

  When it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B has been detected (S1402: Y), the general winning number counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1403), and the determination process S1404 is performed. Execute On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B has not been detected (S1402: N), the processing of S1403 is not performed, and the determination processing S1404 is performed.

  Specifically, in S1403, when either the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449A or the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449B is set, the general winning number is determined. "1" is added to the counter. On the other hand, when both the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449A and the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449B are set, “2” is added to the general winning number counter. I do.

  Since the RAM provided with the general winning number counter is supplied with the backup voltage from the power supply unit 901, even if the supply of the driving voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped, the general voltage is not applied. The stored contents of the winning number counter are retained. That is, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the general winning number counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state.

  In S1404, it is determined whether a launch sphere has been detected. Specifically, based on the detection of a game ball by the shooting ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 53), a shooting ball detection switch detection flag (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to the shooting ball detection switch 451 is set. If it is set, it is determined that a shooting sphere has been detected.

  If it is determined that a shooting ball has been detected (S1404: Y), the number of shooting balls counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1405), and a determination process S1501 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shooting ball has not been detected (S1404: N), the determination process S1501 is executed without executing the process of S1405.

  Specifically, in S1405, if the fired ball detection switch detection flag is set, “1” is added to the fired ball count counter. Since the number-of-launched-balls counter is provided in the RAM to which the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901, similarly to the above-mentioned general winning number counter, a predetermined switch (not shown) is operated to operate the RAM. Unless the stored information is erased, the stored contents of the number-of-fired-balls counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power outage state.

  In S1501, it is determined whether the previous block 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 53) indicates that the front block 102 is not closed with respect to the intermediate block 103, It is determined that 102 is open.

  When it is determined that the previous block 102 is in the open state (S1501: Y), a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter) Is calculated (S1502). The value calculated in S1502 reflects the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B.

  In other words, the closer the value calculated in S1502 is to the reference value that is set in advance when the winning of the game ball to the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is as designed, the more the nail 411 (the more the value). In detail, it is highly likely that the nails 411) provided at the entrances of the winning ports of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B and the vicinity thereof are in an appropriate state according to the settings at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. In the following description of the present embodiment, the “reference value” is the “reference value that is predetermined as a value when the winning of the game ball to the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is equal to the design value”. Suppose there is.

  On the other hand, as the value calculated in S1502 is more distant from the reference value, the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning port of the general prize device 2439A or 2439B or in the vicinity of the prize port is set from the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. It is highly likely that the state has deviated. That is, the greater the difference is, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is greatly deviated from an appropriate state.

  In the present embodiment, in S1502, a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter) is calculated. However, the value to be set as the divisor (divided) is not necessarily the number of fired balls (that is, the number of fired balls) as long as the number of game balls fired in the game area from the firing device 330 increases in accordance with the increase. (The value counted by the counter).

  For example, during a predetermined period, such as during a counting period or during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the number of times of display of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the number of times of display of the ordinary symbol, The number of occurrences of the special game state may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter. Alternatively, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 is counted, and from the counted number of game balls, or from the number of game balls, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 but cannot reach the game area is determined in advance. A value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter.

  The nail state level is calculated based on the value calculated in S1502 (S1503). The “nail state level” indicates that the state of the nail 411 (more specifically, the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B) corresponds to the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. Information that is appropriate or inappropriate at a gradual level. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within the first range including the reference value (for example, a range having both ends of the reference value × ± 5%), the nail state level is determined to be appropriate for the state of the nail 411. Is set to “1” indicating that

  On the other hand, when the value calculated in S1502 is outside the first range (that is, on the side farther from the reference value), the nail state level is set to a value larger than “1”, whereby the nail 411 is set to an appropriate value. Indicates a possible out of state condition. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within a second range set outside the first range (for example, a range in which the end farther from the reference value is the reference value × ± 10%), The nail state level is set to “2”, and when the nail state level is outside the second range (that is, on the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to “3”. In other words, the more the nail 411 deviates from the appropriate state, the greater the value of the nail state level.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the case where the nail state level is divided into three levels has been exemplified, but the nail state level is not necessarily divided into three levels. For example, the nail state level is configured to be divided into at least two stages: a section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate, and a section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state. Is also good. Further, the nail state level may be divided into four or more stages.

  In the present embodiment, the nail state level is calculated from the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the shooting ball number counter), but the value of the general winning number counter is calculated. It is good also as a structure which calculates a nail state level from a. That is, a configuration may be employed in which the nail state level is calculated without using the value of the firing ball number counter.

  Next, a process of outputting the nail state level calculated in S1503 is executed (S1504), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the present embodiment, in S1505, a numerical value indicating the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 53) constituted by a seven-segment display. For example, when the nail state level is “1”, “1” is displayed on the nail state level display device 474.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1501 that the previous block 102 is in the open state (S1501: N), the process returns to the main control interrupt process without executing each process of S1502 to S1504. In the present embodiment, the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed on condition that the previous block 102 is in the open state. However, the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1502 and S1503 is The configuration may be performed regardless of the state.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion information related processing S2021. The setting suggestion information related process S2021 is a process of outputting setting suggestion information when a condition set as an output condition of setting suggestion information is satisfied.

  Here, the “setting suggestion information” includes a plurality of stages (a setting corresponding information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) which are set in advance so as to be settable. In the present embodiment, it is information that indicates which of the nine types of game modes, and may be information that can completely identify which of the nine types of the setting correspondence information. Only a part of the correspondence information (for example, only the type) may be identifiable information, and the selection rate may be set to be different depending on which of the nine types of the correspondence information is set. May be information that allows the player to guess the setting, for example, different information is set according to the type of the setting corresponding information. Selected with high probability In the case of the middle type, the middle value of “5” is most selected, and the number that is larger or smaller than the middle value of “5” is harder to be selected. Although it is not clear which type it is, the number as setting suggestion information may correspond to the setting correspondence information.

  In the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, a determination processing for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the nail state level calculated in the processing of S1503 of the nail state related processing S2020 (see FIG. 56). Step S1601 is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or more. If it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level (S1601: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the process of S1606, specifically, control data for displaying setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode on a predetermined display unit is set. Note that the predetermined display unit may be a symbol display device such as the decorative symbol display device 479 or a dedicated display unit for displaying setting suggestion information.

  For example, if the configuration suggestion information is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, control data (command) for displaying the setting suggestion information on the decorative symbol display device 479 is set in the process of S1606. The command set here is output to the sub-control board 940 in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub-control board 940 displays the setting suggestion information corresponding to the received command at a predetermined position (for example, the right corner) of the decorative symbol display device 479 in response to the reception of the command.

  The setting suggestion information displayed and output in the process of S1606 may be a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state, similar to the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906, It may be a character indicating each game mode, a numerical value, a symbol, a figure, a color, a text, or the like indicating each game mode, or a sensuous expression such as "maybe a high probability setting!" It may be a text that shows, or a figure that makes each game mode identifiable in a bar graph or the like.

  In addition, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is not limited to information that can completely identify which of the nine types of setting corresponding information, and which of the nine types of setting corresponding information is available. Information that can be guessed by the player, for example, information that can be guessed by the player by setting at least a part of the selection rate to be different depending on which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is set. There may be. For example, if the color set in 10 levels is the top type, the darker the color is, the higher the probability is selected. If the color is the middle type, the intermediate color is selected the most, and the color is darker or lighter than the intermediate color. The color is harder to select, and if it is the bottom type, the lighter the color, the higher the probability that it will be selected, and although it is not clear which type it is, it will be possible to guess by checking the color as setting suggestion information For example, information indicating at least one of the type and the probability setting state may be used.In this case, the character is not limited to the color, and may be a plurality of types of characters having different selection rates for each type or each character. The type of the character may correspond to the type, and the size of the character may change according to the probability setting state.

  In addition, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured by a part of the variable display performed by the special symbol lottery, or may be displayed by the type of the symbol in the variable display. For example, for example, a probability setting that is advantageous to the player as the probability setting state makes it easier to select a specific symbol (for example, a symbol including the number “7”) or includes a number from “1” to “9”. You may make it easy to select the pattern containing a large number among the patterns. Here, the number of times that the setting suggestion information is output is not limited to one time, and the process of S1606 is repeated a plurality of times depending on the establishment of the output condition of one setting suggestion information so that a plurality of setting suggestion information is output. Alternatively, for example, a plurality of (eg, two) information outputs determined each time the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied may be performed, or the number of times of information output by the lottery may be different. Alternatively, the number of times may be varied according to the state of the game at the stage when the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of times that the setting suggestion information is displayed increases as the player continues firing without stopping the firing, for example, the execution of the variable display is suspended. As the number of times increases, the number of times that setting suggestion information is output may be increased, or the number of times a start winning prize is generated in a situation where the execution of the variable display is suspended up to the upper limit is counted, and the number of times corresponding to the number is counted. The setting suggestion information may be displayed more times as the number of times increases.

  Note that the output of the setting suggestion information executed by the process of S1606 does not necessarily need to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, and may be a specific audio output from the audio devices 281 and 282 (for example, output in other situations). (E.g., a high sound of "quen"), the emission of specific light by the panel light-emitting device 490 or the frame light-emitting devices 271 to 275 (e.g., iridescent light that does not emit in other situations), or at least a portion in other situations. For example, the light emitting portion that constantly emits light may be turned off for a predetermined time or more. In such a case, using the light emission or extinguishing of light by the board surface light emitting device 490, the board of the gaming board 400X is turned off for a few seconds (for example, about 1 second) at the timing when the game ball is fired by the firing device 330, and then emits light again. By doing so, a so-called “delay effect” may be performed.

  Note that the output of the setting suggestion information executed in the process of S1606 does not necessarily need to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, but may be a sound output from the audio devices 281 and 282, a panel light emitting device 490, a frame light emitting device, or the like. Light emission by 271 to 275 may be used. Further, in the process of S1606, the establishment of other conditions, such as determining whether or not to output the setting suggestion information by lottery, may be set as the condition for outputting the setting suggestion information, and the predetermined probability when the process of S1606 is executed may be determined. The setting suggestion information may be output (for example, with a probability of about 1/10).

  In the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, a determination processing S1602 is performed to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. Specifically, in the determination processing S1602, the setting suggestion is made when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) among the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. It is determined that the information output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied regarding the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (S1602: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

  In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1603 is performed to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the occurrence interval of the start winning (starting condition). Specifically, in the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period (for example, during a firing operation in which a game ball is fired from the firing device 330 in the normal game state), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is used. Start prize (i.e., the winning of the game ball to the middle start prize device 2431 or the right start prize device 2432), a new predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, and a new start prize has elapsed. When a situation where the starting condition of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is not satisfied occurs, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the occurrence interval of the start winning (S1603: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

  The start winning prize generation interval (that is, the elapsed time since the last start winning prize) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940, and transmits a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol. The interval of the reception timing of (for example, a hold command) is measured as the interval of occurrence of the start winning. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the last start winning prize, and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub control board 940.

  In the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period, a new special symbol (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) is established even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) occur within a predetermined monitoring period (for example, within one hour after the first occurrence of the situation), the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not satisfied. May be determined to hold. Further, for example, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described sixteenth embodiment, during a predetermined game period, a predetermined period after a start condition of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied. Each time a situation in which the start condition of a new special symbol is not satisfied even after the “first period” in the sixteenth embodiment has elapsed, the platform state icon 1821 (see FIG. 47) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. ) Is deleted one by one, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when the number of the platform state icons 1821 becomes smaller than a predetermined number (for example, five).

  Alternatively, during the predetermined game period, after the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, a new special symbol starting condition is not satisfied even after the predetermined period elapses, at least once within the predetermined monitoring period. The setting suggestion is made when the total period of occurrence and occurrence of the special symbol starting condition not satisfying the new special symbol starting condition reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10 minutes) within the monitoring period. It may be determined that the information output condition is satisfied. In addition, the number of times the start condition of a new special symbol is satisfied until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied. When a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) occur, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied many times in a short period, such as determining that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied. Then, it may be determined.

  As described above, in the determination processing S1601 to S1603 of the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, a predetermined prize device (for example, a general prize device 2439A, 2439B, medium prize device) provided in the gaming board 400X is set as an output condition of the setting suggestion information. With respect to various predetermined conditions relating to the entry of the game ball into the start winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432), it is determined whether or not the conditions are satisfied. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the processing of S1606.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, when the game is in the special game state (S1604: Y), it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied. Step S1605 is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1605, during a special game state, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249, the setting suggestion information is displayed. It is determined that the output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information in the special game state is satisfied (S1602: Y), the output of the setting suggestion information is executed (S1606).

  Here, in the special game state, in order for game balls to be excessively stored in the storage unit 241 from the ball overflow switch 249, the ball release operation member 242 is not subjected to the ball release operation (for example, pressing operation), and the discharge port 241B is not provided. Must be continued for a certain period of time or longer, and it is possible to select whether or not to execute this ball-pulling operation according to the player's intention. For this reason, in a situation where the discharge port 241B is always opened, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not satisfied, and the game that knows that the output of the ball overflow signal is the output condition of the setting suggestion information is performed. It is possible to easily establish the output condition of the setting suggestion information only for the user. As a result, it is possible to add new playability such as giving an indirect privilege that cannot directly obtain a value to some players, and to perform an operation other than the firing operation. By using the section, it is possible to add a new game property in which the player obtains the setting suggestion information.

  In the determination process S1605, during the special game state, the speed at which the game ball enters the upper winning device 2433 or the lower winning device 2434 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 8 times in 8 seconds in at least one predetermined round). When the number of game balls enters the special winning device 2433, 2434), or when the number of times the certain-variable game state continues during the special game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the setting suggestion information is output. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied. Further, as an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute according to a player's intention, a special game state in which a firing operation is stopped so that a game ball does not enter the special winning devices 2433 and 2434 in a predetermined round at all. In a new game in which a player obtains setting suggestion information by performing a launch operation that loses the opportunity to acquire some prize balls, such as generating a start winning of the middle starting winning device 2431 by performing a left-handed game method in Sex may be added.

  Therefore, in the setting suggestion information related processing S2021 described above, when various predetermined setting suggestion information output conditions are satisfied, the output of setting suggestion information is executed by the processing of S1606.

  The nail state level is information that indicates whether the state of the nail 411 is appropriate or inappropriate for the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100 at a stepwise level. Is greater than or equal to, the nail 411 may be out of the proper state, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player.

  Similarly, even if a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the start winning of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, a new special symbol starting condition. When a situation occurs in which is not established, there is an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol starting prize (that is, a game ball prize winning in the middle starting prize device 2431 or the right starting prize device 2432) such as the state of the nail 411. This may cause disadvantage to the player.

  In response to this, it is determined in the determination process S1601 or the determination process S1603 whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the nail state level or the occurrence interval of the start winning, and the setting suggestion information is determined on the condition that it is determined to be satisfied. Is output, it is possible to indicate to the player that the ball pitching rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of the game balls in the pachinko machine 100 is in a low state. By increasing the material for determining whether to continue, the player can be appropriately determined.

  In addition, the general prize device 2439B includes a game that does not enter the right start prize device 2432 or the upper prize prize device 2433 when a game is performed by a right-handed game method in a special game state, a time-saving game state, or a probable change game state. The ball enters. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general prize device 2439B, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1602, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the determination is made. In this case, the player can enjoy the game ball entering the general prize device 2439B even if the game ball does not enter the target right starting prize device 2432 or the upper winning prize device 2433.

  Receiving the ball overflow signal during the special game state indicates that a certain number or more of game balls have been acquired during the special game state. Therefore, when the ball overflow signal is received during the special game state, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination processing S1605, and the setting suggestion information is output on condition that the condition is satisfied. Setting suggestion information can be given to a player as a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the special symbol related processing S1217, the variable display time (variable time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special). ) Is configured to be selectable in accordance with the currently set game mode.

  Specifically, a game mode predetermined to be settable is pre-assigned to a plurality of types of variable display times that can be selected, and the lottery is selected to determine whether to change the variable display time in accordance with the game mode. In this case, a variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode is selected. Variation patterns of various variation display times that can be selected for a game mode that is settable in advance are stored as a table in the ROM of the main control board 920 in advance.

  It should be noted that the assignment of the variable display time to the game mode that is settable in advance may be configured such that the same variable display time is allocated to two or more game modes, such as for each type of game mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different variable display times are assigned to each of the game modes of each stage that are predetermined as possible.

  Further, the selection of the variation pattern based on the currently set game mode is performed only when the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is a winning. Or a configuration that is performed only when the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is not a winning.

  In the special symbol-related processing S1217, by selecting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display time assigned to the currently set game mode, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display time according to the currently set game mode is performed. Be executed. Thereby, the player can estimate (recognize) the type of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  It should be noted that the assignment of the variable display time to the settable game modes is determined based on the most advantageous game mode among the settable game modes (for example, the third stage probability of each type). Game mode), a long variable display time may be easily selected from various variable display times that can be selected for a game mode that is settable in advance. By increasing the variable display time for the advantageous game mode, the player plays the game while paying attention to the length of the variable display time of the decorative symbol, and the most advantageous game mode is set. Can be expected.

  In addition, a configuration may be such that a longer variable display time is allocated as the advantage of a game mode that is settable in advance is higher. Thereby, the player can estimate the advantage of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed and output. It is possible to suitably recognize the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100, that is, the pitching rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of gaming balls.

  In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display time according to the currently set game mode is selected, the player preferably selects the type of the set game mode according to the length of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Can be recognized.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the nineteenth embodiment has a setting change function for setting the throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of game balls, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighteenth embodiment. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to eighteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the nineteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to eighteenth embodiments described above, or may be added to the configuration of the first to eighteenth embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  Similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has a total of eight unit game right suspension counts for each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). In this case, the hold full effect is configured to appear on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions, and the lottery result of the hold full effect lottery (that is, whether or not to execute the hold full effect) is determined. ) Is displayed on the lottery result display section 2730.

  FIG. 58A is a front view for explaining the lottery result display unit 2730. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the lottery result display unit 2730 includes four display units 2730A to 2730D having different sizes, and is displayed on the lower right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Note that, as in the lottery result display device 730 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, a portion provided as a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 479 is provided as a portion for displaying the lottery result by the reserved full tank effect lottery. It may be.

  The lottery result display unit 2730 displays the number of times the unit game right related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is retained, similarly to the ramp change display performed by the lottery result display device 730 (see FIG. 24). When the upper limit is reached, one of the display units 2730A to 2730D is illuminated so as to sequentially move one by one like a roulette rightward from the display unit 2730A located on the leftmost side, and to the rightmost side. After the located display portion 2730D is turned on, the display returns to the display portion 2730A again, and performs a variable display in which the pattern of sequentially moving rightward from the display portion 2730A and turning on is repeated.

  The fluctuation display by the lottery result display unit 2730 is such that the moving speed of the lighting position (moving interval of the lighting position) on the display units 2730A to 2730D fluctuates quickly, and then the moving speed gradually decreases. At a timing when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed from the start of the display, one of the display units 2730A to 2730D according to the lottery result of the held full effect is turned on to finally stop (stop display).

  More specifically, when the execution of the holding full tank effect (presentation of the holding full tank effect) is selected in the holding full tank effect lottery, the variable display is performed on each of the display units 2730A to 2730D, The display is stopped when the four display unit 2730D is turned on. On the other hand, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected in the reserved full tank production lottery, after the variable display is performed on each of the display units 2730A to 2730D, the display units other than the fourth display unit 2730D, that is, , Is stopped and displayed on any of the first display unit 2730A, the second display unit 2730B, or the third display unit 2730C.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment, it is configured to be able to select any one of nine types of game modes in which the combination of the initial hit probability and the probability of continuation are different. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for each of the three types (top type, middle type, and bottom type) roughly classifying these nine types of game modes, the highest initial hit probability in each type (that is, the first type). When the game mode of (three-stage probability) is set, the number of times the unit game right related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is reserved (the number of times the special symbol is retained) has reached the upper limit. In this case, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this case, the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type) is output at a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). Be composed.

  More specifically, a lottery result display unit that displays a lottery result by a holding full tank production lottery when a game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type (top type, middle type, bottom type) is set. At 2730 (display units 2730A to 2730D), with a predetermined probability, fourth display unit 2730D emits light in a predetermined color (for example, gold) as setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the highest initial hit probability of each type. Is done.

  FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram relating to an example of a display mode of the lottery result display unit 2730 when a game mode with a third-tier probability of each type is set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit, as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, all of these holdings are performed. Are configured such that the appearance probability of the hold full effect differs depending on whether or not the hold winning in the special symbol lottery is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58 (b), specifically, when the number of times the special symbols are held reaches the upper limit, the holds for the special symbol lottery are included in the holdings for the maximum number of times. Is configured to select the appearance of the reserved full effect with a probability of 80% and to not display the reserved full effect with a probability of 20% by the reserved full effect drawing. .

  On the other hand, if the number of times the special symbols are held reaches the upper limit, and if the holds for the special symbol lottery are not included in the holds for the maximum number of times, 20% by the held full tank effect lottery. It is configured to select the appearance of the reserved full effect with a probability of 80% and to select not to display the reserved full effect with a probability of 80%.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game mode with the third-stage probability in each type (that is, the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type) is set, the holding full tank effect lottery is performed. If it is selected that the full fill effect is to be displayed, a lottery of whether or not to output the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (hereinafter also referred to as “setting suggestion information output lottery”) ) Is performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the pachinko machine 100 in which the game mode of the third-stage probability of each type is set, the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, and the maximum number of special symbols is held. If the hold includes the winning in the special symbol lottery, and if it is selected to make the hold full tank production appear by the hold full tank production lottery, the setting suggestion information output lottery 12.5% is selected to output the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode, and 87.5% is selected not to output the setting suggestion information.

  On the other hand, if the number of special symbol holdings reaches the upper limit and the maximum number of holdings does not include the holds that have been won in the special symbol lottery, the holding full tank production lottery When the effect is selected to appear, the setting suggestion information output lottery is selected to output the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode currently set for 50% of the lottery. It is configured to select not to output the setting suggestion information.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit, when it is selected that the holding full tank effect is not to be displayed by the holding full tank lottery, each type is selected. The setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this case, the game mode with the third-stage probability in each type) is output regardless of whether the game mode with the third-stage probability is set in or not. It is configured not to be.

  When the setting suggestion information output lottery is selected to output the setting suggestion information, the fourth display unit 2730D corresponds to the game mode of the third stage probability in each type after the variation display by the lottery result display unit 2730. Light is emitted in a predetermined color (gold in the example shown in FIG. 58 (b)) as setting suggestion information. On the other hand, when the setting suggestion information output lottery selects the output of the setting suggestion information, the fourth display unit 2730D displays a color different from the predetermined color after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 (FIG. 58). In the example shown in (b), red light is emitted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the example shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the game mode of the third-stage probability in each type is set, the lottery executed when the number of times of holding the special symbol reaches the upper limit. The probability that the variable display by the result display unit 2730 is stopped and displayed on the fourth display unit 2730D that emits gold is 10% (=) when the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the maximum number of holds. 0.8 × 0.125 × 100), and 10% (= 0.2 × 0.5 × 100) when the hold for the special symbol lottery is not included in the hold for the maximum number of times. ).

  In other words, in this example, when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, and when the game mode of the third tier probability in each type is set, the special symbol lottery is held during the maximum number of held games. Irrespective of whether or not the winning is included, the variation color displayed on the lottery result display unit 2730 has a 10% probability that the emission color of the fourth display unit 2730D is changed to the currently set game mode ( In other words, the color is gold as setting suggestion information corresponding to the third-stage probability game mode of each type.

  The setting suggestion information output lottery is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the setting suggestion information output lottery is performed by setting the sub-control board 940 to the setting provided on the sub-control board 940 when each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number. The value of the suggestion information output selection counter (part of the RAM) is obtained, and the setting suggestion information output selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 is referred to for the value of the setting suggestion information output selection counter. This is done by:

  The setting suggestion information output selection table includes a first setting suggestion information output selection table that is used when the maximum number of holds includes a winning in the special symbol lottery, and a setting suggestion information output selection table. A second setting suggestion information output selection table to be used when the winning in the special symbol lottery is not included is prepared, and the sub-control board 940 sets the special symbol lottery in the maximum number of holdings. The setting suggestion information output lottery is executed using a table according to whether or not the winning hold is included.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the pachinko machine 100 is set with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%). Since the setting suggestion information corresponding to the current game mode (in the present embodiment, the game mode with the third-stage probability in each type) is output, the player visually recognizes the setting suggestion information, and thus the current pachinko machine 100 can display the current setting suggestion information. It is possible to suitably recognize the type of the game mode, that is, the pitching rate of the game balls (mechanical discount, payout rate).

  Therefore, by increasing the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are held until the upper limit is reached, it is possible to add the gaming ability for estimating the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine being played. it can. For example, considering whether the pachinko machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different pachinko machine, the inferred game mode is considered as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine. Can be used, so that the playability of the pachinko machine in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  In particular, when the game mode with the highest initial hit probability (that is, the third-stage probability) of each type is set, the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output. The player is willing to continue the game with the pachinko machine during the game, when it can be inferred that the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine during the game is the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type. Can be increased, and also in such a point, the playability of the pachinko machine in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Twentieth embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twentieth embodiment, as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the number of times of holding special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is an upper limit (in the present embodiment, a total of 8). In a configuration in which a hold full effect can appear in the case where the number of pieces has reached the limit, if a predetermined condition relating to the extension of the period is satisfied, a special period (that is, the hold full effect It has an effect extension function that can extend the period during which it can be issued.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the twentieth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments, or may be added to the configuration of the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments. The pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment may be provided instead of a part of the configuration.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram related to an example of the effect extension function. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the number of times of holding of each special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the full holding effect appears. In this case, the special period during which the reserved full effect is executed (hereinafter, this length is also referred to as “special period related to the reserved full effect”) is the initial value of 5 minutes at the start of the special period. Is set to Note that, in the present embodiment, the reserved full tank effect may appear at 100% when the number of reserved special symbols reaches the upper limit, or similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. A configuration that appears when a winning in the hold full tank production lottery may be achieved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 59, after the special period relating to the held full effect has started, during the extended standby period (in this example, 3 minutes) which ends at an end time earlier than the end time of the special period, Each time the number of times the special symbol is held increases by one, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to extend the special period pertaining to the held full tank production (hereinafter also referred to as “extended production lottery”), and the player wins in the extended production lottery Then, it is determined that the predetermined condition relating to the extension of the period is satisfied, and the effect extension function is activated. The winning probability (probability that the extension of the special period related to the reserved full tank effect is selected) in the effect extension lottery may be an appropriate probability, for example, 50%. In the example shown in FIG. 59, the operation of the effect extension function is configured to extend the special period related to the held full effect by one minute.

  The effect extended lottery is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the effect extension lottery is performed when the sub-control board 940 sets the effect extension provided on the sub-control board 940 at a predetermined lottery time (in the example shown in FIG. 59, when the number of times of holding the special symbol increases by 1). The value of the lottery counter (part of the area of the RAM) is acquired, and the value of the effect extension lottery counter is referred to by referring to the effect extension lottery table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

  The production extension lottery table is a table that defines winning or non-winning (losing) for each value of the production extension lottery counter so that the winning probability in the production extension lottery becomes a predetermined value. The winning probability in the extended stage lottery may be set to an appropriate value greater than zero, such as 50%, or may be a winning probability of 100%.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  A game ball is fired, and a game ball enters one of the start winning devices 431A, 431B, and 432 to be a start winning, and a fluctuation display is started. During the execution of the fluctuation display, the game ball is further started by the start winning device 431A. , 431B, 432, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is suspended. The lottery result of this special symbol is held up to a certain number (eight) as an upper limit, and when the number of times of holding reaches the upper limit, it is determined whether or not to make the full holding effect appear. If this lottery results in the appearance of a full reserve effect, a special period is started. During the special period, before the start of the special period, it is indicated to the player that the state has changed. For example, the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 is changed from blue to red, and during the special period. Is shown to the player.

  During the special period, as a special effect, an effect in which a specific character appears (for example, an effect that displays a school of golden fish) can be executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol that displays the lottery result of winning the big hit lottery Thus, during the special period, the player can play a game in expectation of performing an effect (special effect) different from the special period.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition related to the extension of the period is satisfied, the effect extension function is activated, and the special period related to the hold full tank effect is extended. When the special period related to the hold full effect is extended by the function, it is possible to increase the number of holds to be held in the hold full effect by the extension. For example, during the special period relating to the hold full tank effect, the hold display color is changed to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (part of the unit game according to the special symbol) for the hold every time the hold display color is 1 In the case of an effect that is displayed in a color indicating the degree of expectation, the number of holds to be displayed in the color indicating the degree of expectation can be increased by the extension of the special period.

  With this configuration, when the number of times of holding the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, in the configuration in which the full hold effect can appear, the special period related to the full hold effect is changed by the player. In order to increase the number of special symbols to be held, by firing game balls for the purpose of winning a special symbol, it is possible to add extendable game characteristics.

  In addition, as the number of holds that are the subject of the hold full tank effect is increased, the probability that the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold that is the target of the hold full tank effect is increased. It is possible to increase the possibility of appearance of an effect indicating a high degree of expectation for winning in the special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, in a configuration in which a full hold effect can appear when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, the game ability in which the player estimates the lottery result of the special symbol lottery held by the hold full effect is Can be added. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the possibility that only an effect that cannot be expected to win in the special symbol lottery will appear, it is possible to suppress complaints about the player being unable to see an effect indicating a high degree of expectation for the winning in the special symbol lottery. .

  Here, whether or not during the special period is determined by changing the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 or displaying a specific color on the periphery of the display screen as described above. It is preferable that the remaining period is displayed so that the player can recognize it. For example, a display unit of the number of times of holding in the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the number of times of holding (for example, a circular display unit corresponding to the number of times of holding) ) May be different depending on whether or not it corresponds during the special period. The display may be blinking during the special period, may be turned on during other than the special period, or the remaining time may be counted down and displayed. May be.

  In addition, the special production may be a production that does not appear during the special period, or may appear during both the special period and during the special period, and a big hit may occur after the special period and during the special period. The probability that the lottery result is displayed may be made different. For example, the jackpot lottery result is displayed with a probability of approximately 30% during a period other than the special period, and the jackpot lottery result is displayed with a probability of 100% during the special period. It may be displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to each embodiment described above, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to each embodiment.

(1) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to First Embodiment In the first embodiment, information such as a lottery result of each special effect lottery is stored with respect to a variable display of a decorative symbol being executed. However, the variation of a plurality of (for example, four) decoration symbols including the variation display of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol executed before the variation display of the decoration symbol being executed is displayed. For each of the displays, information such as the lottery result of each special effect lottery may be stored each time the variable display of each decorative symbol is executed. In such a configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, the lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as a result is stored.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a big hit, in the special game state to which the transition has been made after that, the player stops the decorative symbol stopped at the big hit symbol. By restoring not only the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display but also the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display of the decorative pattern performed before the variable display of the decorative symbol, until the transition to the special game state You can know the history of suggestive effects.

  In the first embodiment, the suggested effect can be restored in the special game state. However, the time when the suggested effect can be restored does not need to be limited to the special game state. During the display, a configuration may be employed in which the suggested effect that could appear in the variable display of the decorative pattern executed before the variable display is restored, that is, a so-called “customer waiting effect” (that is, the pachinko machine 100 A configuration may be used in which a period during which a game is not played by a player elapses a predetermined period of time, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, such as a title display or a demonstration display irrespective of a game state (effect display irrelevant to the game state). .

  In addition, in such a configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, the lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as a result may be stored.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the suggested effect that can appear during the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored, but this is performed using the image indicating the holding status displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, a configuration in which a suggestion effect indicating the probability of occurrence of a special game state with respect to each hold (that is, each held unit game right) may be restored. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be restored including the suggestive effect that can appear before the variable symbol of the decorative symbol is started. The variable display can be restored over a long period after the occurrence of. In this case, when the color indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the color of the hold display as information to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbol performed before the transition to the running special game state. The information corresponding to the color for each hold display in the above, the number of holds at the timing when the start winning prize corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the information regarding the variable display executed each time the hold is exhausted are also It is preferable that the control board 940 memorize the information so that the process up to the occurrence of the big hit can be reproduced more accurately.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestion effect selected from the plurality of types appears by operating the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. A plurality of operable operation modes may be set, and a plurality of suggestion effects may be associated with each operation mode.

  In this case, when the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated in any one of the plurality of operation modes during the operable period, a plurality of suggestion effects associated with the operated operation modes are provided. It is good also as composition which the suggestion effect selected from inside appears. For example, when a rightward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during a predetermined operable period, a selected one of a plurality of types of patterns constituting a suggested effect associated with the operation is selected. When a pattern appears and a leftward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during the same operable period, a selection is made from a plurality of types of patterns constituting a suggested effect associated with the operation. The second pattern may appear.

  As described above, when an operation can be performed in a plurality of different operation modes in the same operable period, one of the plurality of operation modes (for example, the selection operation device 263) is operated in the operable period. By performing the operation in the right direction), it is inevitably impossible to see the suggestion effect seen by the operation in another operation mode (for example, the left direction operation on the selection operation device 263). On the other hand, by making it possible to restore the suggested effect that can appear later in the operable period, the player can later see the suggested effect in which the appearance is exclusive. Can be given, whereby the interest in the game can be suitably improved.

  In the first embodiment, the suggested effect is a video effect displayed on the decorative design display device 479, but the suggested effect is not limited to the video effect. For example, effects by sound (voice, music) output from the audio devices 281, 282, effects by light output from the various light emitting devices 490, 271-275, and effects by operation of operably provided structures, etc. May be an element of the suggestive effect.

  Different suggested effects may be configured according to a combination of elements such as a video effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and a structure operation. In this case, depending on the operation mode during the operable period, the included effects may cause different suggested effects to appear. For example, when a rightward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, a suggestion effect composed of a video effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and a structure operation is performed, and the selection operation is performed. When an operation in the left direction is performed on the device 263, a suggested effect composed of an image effect and an effect by sound is made to appear, and when an upward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, the image effect is produced. You may make it produce the suggestion effect which consists only of.

(2) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Second Embodiment In the second embodiment, after the end of a special effect (first special effect, second special effect) that is a suggestive effect, the next operable period. Although the cancelable period (the first cancelable period and the second cancelable period) is provided before the start of the (second operable period and the third operable period), after the suggestion effect is completed. Therefore, a configuration in which a cancelable period is provided before the next suggested effect is started may be provided.

  Alternatively, the operation device for instructing execution of the suggestion effect and the operation device for instructing cancellation of execution of the suggestion effect may be different operation devices, and the operable period may also serve as the cancelable period. In a configuration in which the operable period also serves as the cancelable period, processing corresponding to the operating device operated first during the period (that is, execution of the suggested effect or cancellation of the execution of the suggested effect) is performed. Alternatively, a process corresponding to the last operated device during the period may be performed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the player can cancel the execution of the suggestion effect for the second and subsequent times by using the suggestion effect cancel function, among the plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during the execution of the single variable display. Although the configuration has been described, a configuration may be employed in which a cancelable period is provided before or immediately after the start of the variable display, and all of the suggestive effects that can appear during the variable display can be canceled.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display provided with the operable period (that is, the suggestive effect that appears when the player operates) is canceled by the suggestive effect cancel function. Although a configuration is possible, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion effect that automatically appears during the variable display of the decorative symbol regardless of the player's operation can be canceled by the player using the suggestion effect cancel function.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent operable period is not generated, so that the subsequent suggested effect is not displayed. Although a subsequent operable period is generated, a configuration may be adopted in which a subsequent suggestion effect is not displayed by invalidating a player's operation in the operable period.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestion effect is not displayed. However, during the cancelable period, the player operates the pressing operation device 261. Is operated, a suggestion effect having a lower probability of occurrence of the special game state than the suggestion effect appearing before the cancelable period may appear.

(3) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Third and Fourth Embodiments In the third and fourth embodiments, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period, the operable period is set. Is displayed in another area of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own machine. Is displayed in another area of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is its own machine. It may be. Note that, in a configuration in which all of the decorative symbols changing display after the pressing operation device 261 is operated are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine, in the subsequent operable period, the other pachinko machines 100 are displayed. A configuration that can be operated using an operation device (such as the pressing operation device 261) may be employed.

(4) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, as the reserved full tank effect selection table, each of the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number of times. The first table referred to when the first time in the suspension count monitoring period is reached, the second table referred to when the second time is reached, the third table referred to when the third time is reached, and 4 Although the fourth table to be referred to in the case of the next time or later is prepared, these tables (the first table, the second table, and the third table) are respectively held in a special symbol lottery while being held. The hit table is referred to when winning holds are included, and the out-of-office table is referred when holding does not include the winning special symbol lottery. May be adopted.

  By having the hit table and the out-of-office table, when the hold that includes the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, compared to when the hold that does not win the special symbol lottery is included. As a result, it becomes easier for the full rendition effect to appear, so that it is possible to create a situation in which the appearance of the full retentive effect causes the player to expect the occurrence of a special game state. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be sharpened, the interest of the game can be more appropriately improved.

(5) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the complete loss variation display (variation display not including the reach display) is performed a plurality of times, so that the variation display including the reach display is performed. Although the variation display of the corresponding variable display time is performed, a complete loss variation display of the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display may be prepared exclusively.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol is stored in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). When there is a hold that has been won in the lottery, the variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a variable display that does not include the reach display for a variable display time shorter than the display is executed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, when the special symbol lottery is held among the special symbols held, The variable display time is the same as the selected variable display, and the variable display including the variable display that does not include the reach display for a plurality of times is executed with a predetermined probability, so that the hold is easily stored. The configuration that facilitates this is not limited to this.

  For example, when the entrance portion of the starting device according to the special symbol is provided with an entry control mechanism that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside of the start device, the posture of the entry control mechanism is set inside the start device. The game ball may be changed to a position in which the game ball can easily enter (or allow the game ball to enter the interior), so that the holding can be easily stored. Alternatively, by shortening the period from when the reach display is performed to when the middle symbol finally stops, the period during which the player can stop firing the game ball is shortened, thereby making it easier to store the hold. It may be.

  In the sixth embodiment, when there is a hold for the special symbol lottery among the holds for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), there is no hold for the selected symbol. Alternatively, the variable display time may be selected based on a condition in which the variable display for a long time is easily selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(6) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured as a drum formed in a cylindrical shape. , 711R may be a circling belt on which a decorative pattern is drawn on the outer peripheral surface and which is rotated by driving a roller.

  In the seventh embodiment, the second sub-symbol advance notice and the countdown announcement are performed by using the variable display performed on the reel device 710 (that is, the decorative symbol fluctuation display due to the fluctuation of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R). However, a pre-reading effect such as a second sub-symbol advance notice or a countdown advance notice may be performed using a variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the timing to stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes during the reach effect period in the variation display of the running decorative symbol, the variation display time of the lamp variation display is determined. , The timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is excluded from the reach effect period. The configuration in which the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is excluded from the reach effect period is not limited to the above method. For example, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is earlier than the reach effect period. As described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is reduced.

  Alternatively, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 can be changed from the reach effect period by shortening the fluctuation display time in the fluctuation display of the running decorative symbol without changing the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display. It may be configured to be removed. In such a modification, since the variable display time in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is shortened, the suggestion effect executed during the reach effect period is shown to the player, and the lottery result of the hold full tank effect lottery is quickly displayed. I can show you.

  In addition, when the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes during the execution of the look-ahead effect using a plurality of variable displays, the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 is the timing of the stop display. The variable display time of the lamp variable display may be extended so that the variable display time comes after the completion of the variable display of the pre-reading target in.

  In addition, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined or during the execution of the look-ahead effect, it is determined that a predetermined special effect display is being executed, or that the special effect display is to be executed. In such a case, the sub-control board 940 may provide a control for selecting not to execute the suspended full effect.

  In addition, at the time when the effect performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 and the effect performed by displaying the image on the resin cover configured as the light guide plate in the reel device 710 are performed, the lottery result display device is displayed. The configuration may be such that the execution period of the effect is adjusted or the variable display time of the lamp variable display is adjusted so that the stop display is not performed at 730.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target is changed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target. The change is started in synchronization with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2. However, the change of the stopped middle reel 711M is stopped when the change display of the prefetch target is stopped (that is, stopped). The timing may be started a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds before) before the timing.

  In addition, the fluctuation of the stopped middle reel 711M is not limited to being started in synchronization with the occurrence of the reach display, but is effected by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 or as a light guide plate in the reel device 710. It may be configured to start in synchronization with an effect performed by displaying an image on the formed resin cover.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, the second sub-symbol 713B (that is, a symbol that does not constitute a big hit symbol) is displayed on the middle line L2 in the fluctuation display before the pre-read target fluctuation display. When the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in the state in which the left and right reels 711L, 711L and 711L are kept in the middle line L2 from the beginning to the end of the variable display in the subsequent variable display. 711R fluctuates.

  Alternatively or additionally, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 with a symbol that does not constitute the reach display in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, In the variable display, the middle reel 711M may be changed while the symbol of the middle line L2 on the left and right reels 711L and 711R is maintained from the beginning to the end of the variable display.

  In such a configuration, in the variable display two or more times ahead of the prefetch target, the changing middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the second sub symbol 713B or the first sub symbol 713A displayed on the middle line L2, In the next change display, the middle reel 711M changes again. Thereafter, in the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the main symbol 712 displayed on the middle line L2, and the left and right reels 711L and 711R are displayed with the middle reel 711M stopped. Then, one reel (for example, the left reel 711L) is stopped first. At this time, the main symbol 712 of the reel displayed on the middle line L2 can constitute a reach display together with the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M displayed on the middle line L2. After stopping one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, the other reel is stopped.

  In the seventh embodiment, the decorative design of the left reels 711L, 711M, 711R is such that the main design 712 and the sub-design 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in the second sub-symbol advance notice. However, for the left reel 711L stopped next to the middle reel 711M, three or more sub-designs 713 are continuously arranged between the main design 712 and the main design 712, or "3" is added. A plurality of sub-designs 713 may be continuously arranged between the main design 712 and the main design 712 with “5”.

  According to this configuration, in a state where the second sub-design 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the continuous sub-design 713 on the left reel 711R is arranged on the middle line L2, whereby the upper line L1 In any of the middle line L2 and the lower line L3, it is possible to prevent the reach display from being formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the second sub-symbol predictor notice is provided using the second sub-symbol 713B provided on the middle reel 711M. However, the second sub-symbol 713B is provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R. Alternatively, the second sub-symbol 713B provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R may be used to perform a prefetch effect similar to the second sub-symbol advance notice.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed until the variable display of the prefetch target is performed is determined by the main symbol 712 displayed when the middle reel 711M finally stops. (The number included in the main symbol 712), but the countdown may be performed by a temporary stop during the change.

  In the seventh embodiment, the main symbols 712 provided on the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are all symbols including numbers. However, the main symbols 712 for the left reels 711L and 711R that do not count down in the countdown notice. May be composed of symbols including numerical information other than numbers. In addition, as for the middle reel 711M performing the countdown in the countdown notice, the main symbol 712 includes a symbol including a number (for example, “3”, “2”, “1”) that may be used for the countdown in the countdown notice. , And may include a symbol including numerical information other than numbers, and preferably includes a symbol including at least “1” and “2”.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed until the variable display of the prefetch target is performed is configured by the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M, but the countdown is performed. The reel is not limited to the middle reel 711M, and may be a left reel 711L or a right reel 711R.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the number of times of the variable display during the prefetch effect that is being executed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is displayed by the countdown. The announcement effect may be configured by counting up each time the variable display is executed, and the main symbol 712 may be a number (for example, “1”, “2”) that may be used for counting up in the count up announcement. , "3").

(7) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Eighth Embodiment In the above-described eighth embodiment, the fish school which faces leftward and is continuous is displayed on both sides of the reel device 710. Only the right side or the left side may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the region J is a part of the light-transmitting base 401. However, the light-transmitting region J is formed on the non-light-transmitting base. It may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, a part (passage wall portions 1631A, 1631B) of the passage forming member 1631 overlaps the front side of the left information display portion 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated member that hinders the visibility of the information display unit 753 overlaps the front side of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 after being entered from the entrance 1611 is detected by the start winning switches 1441A and 1411B, a special symbol start prize ( In other words, the configuration is such that the special symbol lottery condition is established. Instead, when the detection unit detects a game ball that has entered the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2, a certain number of game balls are provided as prize balls (privileges) without satisfying lottery conditions. You may.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, when a game ball entered from the entrance 1611 enters the second passages 1614A and 1614B, the starting winning of the special symbol is not established. However, when the game ball enters the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2. A configuration in which a lower value privilege (for example, the number of prize balls, the winning probability of a special symbol lottery, or the game state after winning the special symbol lottery) may be provided.

(8) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 on which the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided has a configuration in which the resin cover 715 has an arc shape in a side sectional view. The half mirrors 761A and 761B may have a shape facing the upper front side and the lower front side, respectively. For example, the shape of the resin cover 715 may be a shape having at least a front-facing slope and a front-facing lower slope, such as a trapezoidal shape in a cross-sectional view, and a convex surface facing the front upper side and a front facing lower side. The shape may be configured by a convex surface and a plane continuously provided between the convex surfaces.

  In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper and lower sides of the resin cover 715. However, the half mirror 761A or the half mirror 761B is provided on one of the upper and lower sides of the resin cover 715. It is good also as a structure provided.

  In the ninth embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is provided in a region behind the lower half mirror 761B. However, in addition to or instead of this, the rear side of the upper half mirror 761A is provided. It is also possible to provide a reel-side lamp similar to the reel-side lamp 717A in a region where. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A is provided on the entire front side of the partition portion 717.

  In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. However, the cover provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 479 has a pressing operation device. In order to allow the player to visually recognize the image G2 and the like 261, an arc-shaped projection may be provided in a side sectional view, and the half mirrors 761A and 761B may be provided on the projection.

  In the ninth embodiment, the pressing operation device 261 is configured to be able to light (emit light). However, the pressing operation device 261 may not be configured to emit light. Even if the pressing operation device 261 does not emit light, the player can recognize the operable period of the pressing operation device 261 by visually recognizing the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

(9) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Tenth Embodiment In the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row is changed in the reel device 710 that performs the variable display of the decorative symbol by each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R. Although the case of reduction is illustrated, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 479. For example, among the symbol rows of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the middle symbol row is reduced, and the left and right symbol rows are moved so as to be arranged on both sides of the reduced middle symbol row. It may be.

  In the tenth embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M after the middle reel 711M is moved rearward. After moving the reels 711L and 711R backward, the reels 711L and 711R may move in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M.

  Alternatively, while keeping the position of the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M is moved backward so as to be behind the left reel 711L, and then moved in a direction approaching the left reel 711L, and then the right reel 711R is moved from the middle reel 711M. A configuration in which the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving in the direction approaching the middle reel 711M after moving backward to become the rear side.

  In the tenth embodiment, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R move toward the middle reel 711M after moving the middle reel 711M backward, the LED provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side. May be set to be higher than the brightness of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R located on the front side of the middle reel 711M. The luminance of the light emitting means provided inside each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  According to this modification, the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side is made higher than the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R, whereby the middle reel 711M is provided. Are located behind the left and right reels 711L and 711R, it is possible to suppress the pattern of the middle reel 711M from being difficult to see.

(10) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Eleventh Embodiment In the above-described eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B disposed on the front side of the reel device 710 has been illustrated. The present invention may be applied to a light guide plate unit including the light guide plate when a light guide plate having a similar curved portion is disposed in front of a movable body such as a character performing a predetermined operation.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is configured to be curved in a substantially cylindrical shape along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and has a substantially arc shape in a side view. Although the curved configuration has been described, the shape is not necessarily required to be an arc shape in a side view, and may be configured to have another shape protruding forward, such as including a curved line or a broken line.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the through-holes 841A and 843A and the through-holes 841B and 843B of the light source unit 812 are inserted into the projection 892 projecting rearward on the rear side of the base 701. A configuration may be adopted in which a projecting portion projecting forward is provided on the front side of the unit 812 (that is, on the front side of the reflector 823), and a mounting hole corresponding to the projecting portion is provided in the base 701. In such a case, similarly to the through hole 841A, the mounting hole provided in the base 701 is formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the protruding portion corresponding to the mounting hole. In this case, the same effect as when the through-hole 841A and the like are formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the projection 892 can be obtained. Similarly, a projecting portion projecting forward may be provided on the front side of the light source unit 813, and a mounting hole corresponding to the projecting portion may be provided in the base 701.

  In the eleventh embodiment, after the light source units 812, 813 are fixed (attached) above and below the light guide plate 715B, the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the outer cover 715A via the light source units 812, 813. To be fixed. Alternatively, the upper and lower light source units corresponding to the light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A, and then the light guide plate 715B may be fixed to the light source units.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 is formed to have a substantially arc-shaped front end shape in a side view along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. It is not necessary to follow the curved shape of 715A1, and one or more projecting portions may be shaped to project toward curved portion 715A1 of outer cover 715A, and may be deformed as a part of curved portion 715B1 of light guide plate 715B. It is good also as composition which corrects a part which wants to correct partially. In this case, it is preferable to provide at least a central pressing portion that is located at a substantially central height position in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and that presses the rear side of the portion that projects most forward. In a situation where the radius of curvature is larger than the curvature set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is insufficient, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be efficiently corrected. In addition, it is preferable to provide at least an upper and lower pressing portion that is located at a height position on the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and that presses a rear side of a portion located on the rear side of the curved portion 715B1. Accordingly, in a situation where the radius of curvature is smaller than the curvature set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is excessive, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be efficiently corrected.

(11) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Twelfth Embodiment In the twelfth embodiment, trapezoidal concave portion Z having sides Z1 to Z3 in front view is provided in upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of light guide plate 715B. Although the configuration is adopted, the shape of the concave portions provided on the end faces 715B4 and 715B5 does not necessarily have to be trapezoidal. For example, a concave portion having two sides continuous in a mountain shape or a concave portion including four or more sides may be used.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the concave portion Z provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B has a configuration in which corners are formed by intersection of two continuous sides, but light is not transmitted as in the regions D1 and D2. The corner may be rounded or chamfered as long as the region does not enter, or a region where light weaker than light traveling in the directions of the arrows F1 to F3 enters is formed.

  In the twelfth embodiment, trapezoidal concave portions Z are provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front, so that light does not enter as in the areas D1 and D2, or arrows F1 to D2. Although the light guide including the predetermined direction in which light weaker than the light traveling in the F3 direction enters is realized, the shape of the concave portion Z is formed in an arc shape, and light does not partially enter due to black coating or plating. In this manner, the predetermined direction may be configured. Alternatively, a dedicated component capable of configuring the predetermined direction may be provided between the end face 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B and the light emitting means 834 or between the end face 715B5 and the light emitting means 824.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 is provided with the concave portions Z at the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5, so that the light guide plate 715B has a random manner of light. Even when a concave portion similar to the concave portion Z is provided on the end face of a flat light guide plate having no light guide plate, the light guide of the light guide plate can have randomness.

(12) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to thirteenth embodiment In the thirteenth embodiment, in reel device 710 that performs decorative display of decorative symbols by reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, left and right reels 711L, 711R Although the width is changed, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 479. That is, the width of the left and right symbol rows in the symbol rows of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be changed.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the symbols in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a state where the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is not reserved. When the variable display is started, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is changed. However, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), the left and right reels 711L and 711R are operated. It is good also as composition which changes the width of 711L and 711R.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, among the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the middle reel 711M in which the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed has a state in which a part of the left and right reels 711L and 711R overlaps forward. Although the stop is performed, when the reach display is formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved so that the entire middle reel 711M can be viewed from the front. You may.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row is reduced by reducing each width of the left and right reels 711L and 711, and the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving each reel 711L, 711M and 711R. Although the configuration is performed, the configuration may be such that the display area of each symbol row is not reduced by the movement of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the width of the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving the left and right reels 711L and 711 in a direction approaching each other. The width of the display area of each symbol row may be reduced by moving it to one side or the other side. For example, only one of the left and right reels 711L, 711 may be moved leftward or rightward of the three reels 711L, 711M, 711R to reduce the width of the display area of each symbol row. Good.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the second reel member 1702 is pulled toward the first reel member 1701 by one drive solenoid 1711 by utilizing the rotation of each of the reels 711L and 711R. A plurality of drive solenoids similar to the solenoid 1711 may be provided in the circumferential direction of each of the reels 711L and 711R. By providing a plurality of drive solenoids in the circumferential direction of the reel, it is possible to draw the second reel 1702 toward the first reel 1701 even when the reel is stopped.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the width of the reels (the reels 711L and 711R) is changed by changing the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701. Instead, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is made of a material that can expand and contract, and one side in the left-right direction (width direction) is pulled from the other side, thereby contracting the outer peripheral surface of the reel. The width may be narrowed.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, each of the reels 711L. Although the main symbols are formed by the numbers drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the 711M and 711R, each reel 711L. A configuration may be provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the 711M and 711R, which can display a symbol such as a numeral by electric control, and the main symbol is displayed on the display. In such a case, when the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is reduced, a main symbol having a size corresponding to the width may be displayed.

(13) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fourteenth Embodiment In the fourteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B is vertically extended by the drive solenoid 1731 to change (increase) the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1. ), The light guide plate 715 </ b> B may be pressed and shrunk in the vertical direction to change (reduce) the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715 </ b> B <b> 1.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, by using the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 and changing the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1, the light guided inside the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the front and the back inside the light guide plate 715B. The position at which the fish pattern 743 shines is changed. Instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the position of refraction on the front and back inside the light guide plate is changed by gently bending the planar light guide plate.

(14) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fifteenth Embodiment In the fifteenth embodiment, the flat light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction. A configuration in which the two light guide plates are stacked in the front-rear direction may be adopted. When two curved light guide plates are overlapped in the front-rear direction, a reel device such as a reel device 710 capable of displaying a decorative pattern or a character performing a predetermined operation is provided behind the two light guide plates. It is good also as a structure which arranges a movable body.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, of the light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 stacked in the front-rear direction, the light guide plate 1771 located on the rear side is configured to be relatively movable with respect to the light guide plate 1751. Of the light guide plates stacked in the direction, the light guide plate located on the front side may be configured to be relatively movable with respect to the light guide plate located on the rear side.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the flat light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction. However, three or more light guide plates are overlapped, and at least one light guide plate is attached to another light guide plate. May be relatively moved.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 1771 movably provided is relatively moved with respect to the light guide plate 1751 fixedly provided. However, both of the two light guide plates are movably provided. One of these two light guide plates may be moved with respect to the other.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 1771 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the light guide plate 1751. However, the movement direction of the other light guide plate with respect to one light guide plate is necessarily in the left-right direction. Instead, the direction may be a predetermined direction other than the horizontal direction such as the vertical direction. The relative movement direction of the other light guide plate with respect to the one light guide plate is not necessarily required to be a linear direction, but may be a curvilinear movement.

(15) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Sixteenth Embodiment In the sixteenth embodiment, a special symbol is used in a configuration in which the number of times of holding for a special symbol is represented by the number of holding icons 1812 displayed on decorative symbol display device 479. Although the display mode of the hold icon 1812 is changed according to the interval of occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of times to hold a special symbol, such as a hold lamp 720 provided below the reel device 710, is determined by the number of lighting of the lamp. In the configuration shown, the display mode of each lamp (for example, any one of emission color, blinking interval, or luminance, or a combination of a plurality of them, etc.) corresponding to each number of times of holding is set according to the occurrence interval of the start winning prize of the special symbol. The configuration may be different.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, in the configuration in which the number of times of holding for a special symbol is represented by the number of holding icons 1812 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the display mode of the holding icon 1812 in accordance with the interval of occurrence of the special symbol start winning prize Alternatively, or in addition to this, the display mode of the holding icon may be changed when displaying the number of holdings for a normal symbol, or during a probable change game state or the like. The display mode of the holding icon may be changed when displaying the number of times of holding for the start winning to the right starting winning device 432 in which the start winning occurs.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon 1812 is changed according to the interval of occurrence of the special symbol start winning. However, instead of or in addition to this, the special symbol starting winning is set. May be controlled so that the content of the variable display of the special symbol varies according to the occurrence interval of the symbol. For example, when the interval of occurrence of the special winning start is short, the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the special winning is set to be short, and the interval of occurrence of the special winning of the special symbol is shorter than that when the interval of the special winning is short. May be controlled so that the change time of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is long, or conversely, if the interval of the special winning symbol is long, the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is obtained. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol with respect to the starting prize is easily set to be longer when the generation interval of the special prize is shorter than when the generation interval of the starting prize is longer. It may be controlled. Further, the control according to the length of the interval of occurrence of the special winning start winning may be executed by controlling the variable time according to the number of holdings, and the special symbol is started when the number of holdings is large. The control may be performed such that the variable display is more easily set to a longer variable time than the variable display of the special symbol which is started when the variable number is smaller than the predetermined number.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, before the next special winning start-up winning occurs, the holding schedule icon 1811 whose display mode is changed according to the elapsed time from the last starting winning winning is displayed in the decorative symbol display. The device 479 is configured to be displayed, but the number of times the special symbol is held, such as a holding lamp 720 provided below the reel device 710, is set to be held in a lamp display mode (for example, emission color or blinking interval). As with the icon 1811, a configuration may be adopted in which before the next special symbol start winning is generated, the starting symbol is changed according to the elapsed time from the last winning winning.

  In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, each of the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 is configured to indicate the elapsed time from the last start winning prize with the size of the circle and the numerical value, but the size of the circle ( The configuration may be such that the elapsed time is represented by one of the size of the shape) or a numerical value. In addition, by changing the position or the direction of the reservation scheduled icon 1811 or the reservation icon 1812 from the reference position or the direction according to the elapsed time from the last start winning prize, the final position or the direction is changed depending on the position or the direction of the icon. May be configured to indicate the elapsed time from the start winning prize that has occurred.

  In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, each of the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 is configured to indicate the elapsed time from the last start winning prize according to the size of the circle. A configuration may be used in which the elapsed time from the last winning prize generated in another form is displayed.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 are configured such that their sizes fall between a predetermined minimum size and a predetermined maximum size. , The size may increase as the elapsed time from the last start winning a prize becomes longer.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, each of the hold schedule icon 1811 and the hold icon 1812 is configured to display a numerical value indicating the elapsed time since the last start winning a prize, but in addition to the numerical value indicating the elapsed time, Alternatively, instead of the numerical value indicating the elapsed time, a configuration may be employed in which a numerical value indicating the number of fired game balls fired during the elapsed time is displayed.

  In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the hold schedule icon 1811 is configured to change according to the elapsed time from the last winning prize, but may be changed according to the elapsed time during a predetermined game period. Well, for example, in a situation where the game ball is not fired from the firing device 330, the change may be temporarily stopped, or the game state changes in accordance with the elapsed time only when the game state is the normal game state, In some game states such as a special game state, a time-saving game state, and a certain-change game state, the game may be temporarily stopped. According to such a configuration, during the special game state, the player stops firing the game ball, or an abnormal value generated by the game state in which the position where the game ball flows down is displayed in the display mode of the hold schedule icon 1811 or This can be prevented from being reflected in the display mode of the hold icon 1812 that is the final display.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, a game ball is fired from the launching device 330 as a “predetermined game period” that is a condition for updating the display content of the platform state icon display area 1820 (that is, the number of platform state icons 1821). Although the predetermined period is illustrated, the “predetermined game period” may be a period during which the pachinko machine 100 is activated by power supply (while the pachinko machine 100 is powered on).

  Further, in a pachinko machine having a configuration in which game balls can be divided into respective left and right regions with respect to the central structure (that is, a game using a left-handed game method and a right-handed game method is possible), a game using a left-handed game method, or In the case where the special winning start of the special symbol does not occur in any of the games by the right-handed gaming technique (or the starting winning of the special symbol does not substantially occur), the game of the left-handed gaming technique or the right-handed gaming technique is not performed. Only in the case of a game in which a special symbol starting prize can be generated, a period in which a game ball is fired from the firing device 330 may be a “predetermined game period”. In such a case, at least one of a predetermined region in which a game ball fired by a game by the left-handed game technique passes with a high probability, or a predetermined region in which a game ball fired by a game by the right-handed game technology passes with a high probability By providing a sensor in the area, it is possible to determine whether the game is a left-handed game or a right-handed game.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the state of the pachinko machine 100 is configured to be reflected in the number of the platform state icons 1821. However, in addition to the number of the platform state icons 1821, the game time ( For example, a configuration may be employed in which a time period that is the sum of periods during which game balls are fired from the firing device 330) is displayed.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the special symbol start winning prize generation interval during the predetermined game period is set at a predetermined time set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning prize. When the period exceeds one period, the number of the platform state icons 1821 decreases, and a new second period provided beforehand as a period in which the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol starting winning is low is passed before the predetermined second period elapses. When the event that the start winning occurs occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times, the number of the platform state icons 1821 is increased. However, in the former, the number of the platform state icons 1821 increases, and in the latter, the platform state icons 1821 are displayed. The number may be reduced.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the special symbol start winning prize generation interval during the predetermined game period is set at a predetermined time set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning prize. When one period is exceeded, one of the platform status icons 1821 being displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 is erased, but the display mode of the one platform status icon 1821 is changed. Alternatively, the platform state icon 1821 may be deleted at a timing when the interval of the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize exceeds the first period by changing the lapse of time after the last starting prize has occurred. When deleting the platform state icon 1821, the icon may be deleted by animation such as explosion.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the special symbol start winning prize generation interval during the predetermined game period is set at a predetermined time set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning prize. When one period is exceeded, one of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 is erased. When one or more events exceeding the first period are repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), one of the platform state icons 1821 may be deleted.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the special symbol start winning prize generation interval during the predetermined game period is set at a predetermined time set in advance as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning prize. When one period has elapsed, one of the platform status icons 1821 displayed in the platform status icon display area 1820 is erased. However, as the occurrence interval becomes longer, the platform status icon 1821 is erased. A configuration in which the number of platform state icons 1821 is increased may be employed.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, during the predetermined game period, a new start prize is issued before the lapse of the second predetermined period provided as a period in which the possibility of occurrence of a special symbol start prize is low. In the case where the occurring events occur continuously for a predetermined number of times, the configuration is such that one platform status icon 1821 is added to the platform status icon display area 1820. In such a case, the number of platform status icons 1821 to be added is two or more. It may be.

  In addition, if the event that the start winning prize of the next special symbol occurs continuously a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) before the predetermined third period shorter than the predetermined second period elapses, A larger number of the platform state icons 1821 are displayed in the platform state icon display area as compared to the case where the event that the starting winning of the next special symbol occurs before the predetermined second period elapses continues a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). 1820 may be added.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, when the event that a new start winning occurs occurs a predetermined number of times continuously before the predetermined second period elapses during the predetermined game period, one stand state icon 1821 is displayed. Is added to the platform state icon display area 1820, but the number of times that the occurrence interval of the special symbol start winning prize becomes a specific value (for example, 3.0 seconds) earlier than the second period is a predetermined number of times. (For example, three times) continuously, in addition to or instead of adding the table state icon 1821, the manager of the game arcade or the like may add the pachinko machine 100 to the pachinko machine 100. A configuration may be adopted in which the set value of the throwing rate (mechanical discount, payout rate) of the game balls set on the decorative symbol display device 479 or another display device is displayed.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the special symbol start winning prize generation interval during the predetermined game period is determined based on the establishment of the conditions related to the high probability of the occurrence of the special symbol start winning prize and the low period. Although the number of the platform state icons 1821 is changed, the size of the platform state icons 1821 may be changed instead or in addition to this, and the condition regarding the period during which the possibility of abnormality is high is set. When one of the platform state icons 1821 is expanded, and the condition relating to a period during which the possibility of abnormality is low is satisfied, the platform state icon 1821 may be reduced or, instead of the platform state icon 1821, Alternatively, in addition to the platform state icon 1821, the condition is updated when a condition regarding a period during which the possibility of abnormality is high is satisfied and when a condition regarding a period during which the possibility of abnormality is low is satisfied. The number of times the condition relating to the period during which the probability of abnormality is high and the number of times the condition relating to the period during which the probability of abnormality is low is satisfied may be separately counted, or 10 is displayed in advance. Alternatively, the number of ones may be subtracted when the condition regarding the period where the possibility of abnormality is high is satisfied, and the number of one may be added when the condition regarding the period where the possibility of abnormality is low is satisfied.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol during the predetermined game period is set as a period in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence of the special winning of the special symbol is high and the period of the starting winning is long, As an example, the case where the start winning is continuously generated in a short time is illustrated as a low period, but instead or in addition to the above, the starting is performed as a period in which there is a high possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special winning start. A short period in which winnings occur continuously in a short time is set, and a platform state icon in which the starting winning is set to be longer than a certain period is displayed as a period in which the possibility of abnormality related to the occurrence of a special winning start is low. You may do so.

(16) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventeenth Embodiment In the seventeenth embodiment, in the probable change game state, as an effect corresponding to winning in big hits 1 and 2 and shifting to another game state, Although the battle effect has been exemplified, the transition of the game state may be indicated by another effect, for example, a configuration in which a competition such as a car race is displayed, and a plurality of vehicles run in parallel as an effect corresponding to the battle standby. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect indicating a transition to another game state is made depending on whether a specific character selected by a player wins or loses in a race, or an effect aiming at reaching a set target. For example, it is configured to perform an effect display for performing a high jump, perform training as an effect corresponding to a battle standby, perform a high jump as an effect corresponding to a battle effect, It may be configured to perform an effect indicating transition to another game state depending on whether or not the bar exceeds the set height bar.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, in the probable change game state, the effect in which the character performs an action is illustrated as the effect corresponding to winning the big hits 1 and 2 and shifting to another game state. The transition of the game state may be indicated, for example, as an effect corresponding to the battle standby, a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols including "this" and "end" continues to fluctuate, an effect corresponding to the battle victory As an effect corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit 1, the symbol of "this" stops at the center of the display screen, and as the effect corresponding to the battle defeat, the symbol of "final" stops at the center of the display screen. Is also good.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state in which the upper limit number is limited to 100 times, the configuration in which the battle loss effect display is executed in the 80th unit game corresponding to the number near the end, In the case of a non-winning jackpot up to 99 unit games, the effect of battle standby may be displayed, and the effect display of battle defeat may be displayed at the last 100 times, or it may be performed at the other 50 times or the like. As a battle effect, for example, in a plurality of unit games such as 50 times, 70 times, and 90 times, an effect display of a battle defeat in which a story progresses may be performed.

  In the above seventeenth embodiment, the configuration in which the unit game in which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time set for a fixed short time is performed unless the jackpot 1 is won other than the special production time is described. A unit game in which a variable display in which a variable time of a type or more is selected and set may be performed, and a variable display of a fixed long variable time is not necessarily performed even in a special effect. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the unit game is executed, and may be a configuration in which a variable display of another variable time can be performed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the configuration in which the unit game in which the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time set for a certain short time is performed unless the big hit 1 is won other than the specific game time has been described. A unit game in which a variable display in which a variable time of a type or more is selected and set may be performed, and a variable display of a fixed long variable time is not necessarily performed even in a special effect. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the unit game is executed, and may be a configuration in which a variable display of another variable time can be performed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the invincible period is displayed with the remaining time as the invincible time effect. However, the invincible period is not necessarily displayed with the remaining time, but is displayed with the number of remaining unit games. Alternatively, in each of the processes S2008, S2011, S2014, and S2015 of the display effect setting process S2000, the number of times of the variable display that does not reach the special effect time may be set as the number of times of the change instead of the time as the invincible time. .

(17) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighteenth Embodiment In the eighteenth embodiment, a switch (a back setting switch 905, an initialization) provided by a setting changer such as an amusement arcade manager or the like is provided on the pachinko machine 100. By operating the switch 907), a change in the setting of the pitching rate (that is, a change in the setting of the game mode) is performed. Instead, an external device (for example, a management device called a “hole computer”) or a portable terminal device (portable terminal device) capable of communicating with the pachinko machine 100 changes the game mode to the next game mode. A signal corresponding to the instruction or information indicating a game mode to be set may be input to the pachinko machine 100 by communication.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the determination process S1601 is configured to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503. In the determination process S1601, it may be configured to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the value calculated in the process of S1502, that is, (value of the general winning number counter / value of the number of shot balls counter). Good. Further, in the determination process S1601, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the value of the general winning number counter counted in a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

  Or, when the number of times the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol is displayed, the number of times the normal symbol is displayed, the number of times the special game state occurs, or the like is used as a divisor to the value of the general winning counter (the dividend). Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which it is determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601 with respect to a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor.

  Further, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 is counted, and from the counted number of game balls, or the number of game balls, the number of game balls fired from the firing device 330 but cannot reach the game area is determined in advance. When a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value is adopted as a divisor to the value of the general winning number counter (dividend), the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601 is a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor. May be configured to determine whether or not the output condition is satisfied.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or more, but the nail state level is “1”. In such a case, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the value indicates that the nail 411 is likely to be in an appropriate state.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, in the determination process S1602, it is configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information regarding the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is satisfied. , 2439B as well as a start-up prize device such as a mid-start prize-winning device 2431, and a determination may be made as to whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied regarding the entry of the game ball into the prize device.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, when a game ball enters one predetermined general prize device (for example, the general prize device 2439B) of the general prize device 2439A or the general prize device 2439B, the setting suggestion information is displayed. Although the configuration in which the output condition is determined to be satisfied has been illustrated, the output of the setting suggestion information is performed when a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls enter a predetermined general winning device. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, when a game ball enters one predetermined general prize device (for example, the general prize device 2439B) of the general prize device 2439A or the general prize device 2439B, the setting suggestion information is displayed. Although the configuration in which the output condition is determined to be satisfied has been illustrated, a configuration in which the output condition of the setting suggestion information is determined to be satisfied when the game ball enters any of the general prize device 2439A and the general prize device 2439B may be employed. . That is, when the game ball enters any of a plurality of (two or more) winning devices determined in advance, the configuration may be such that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601. Further, when a game ball enters both of a plurality of (two or more) predetermined winning devices, a determination may be made that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601.

  When a game ball enters a predetermined plurality of winning devices in a predetermined order (for example, in the order of the general winning device 2439B and the general winning device 2439A), the setting suggestion information is determined in the determination process S1601. May be determined to be satisfied. In other words, when a plurality of predetermined prize devices are provided, not only the entry of the game balls into the plurality of prize devices, but also a configuration that includes the order of the entry as a requirement of the output condition of the setting suggestion information. Good. This allows the player to obtain setting suggestion information as a privilege of having the game balls enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be satisfied by an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute according to the player's intention during the special game state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information may be satisfied by another operation. For example, in a normal game state that is advantageous to a player by performing a game by a left-handed game technique, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is easily satisfied when a right-handed game technique different from the left-handed game technique is performed. In this case, in this case, for example, a game ball fired by a right-handed game method such as the combination operating device 435 can pass with a high probability (approximately 50% or more is preferable, and approximately 70% or more is preferable). It is preferable that the area is a simple area so that the player can easily establish the output condition of the setting suggestion information, and the game ball is an area to which other functions are added and which is not used in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the passing is set as the output condition of the setting suggestion information because it is easy to set the area so that the game ball can pass with a high probability while suppressing the number of parts. In addition, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 in the normal game state, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied, and the game ball lending operation is performed. Is performed by operating the ball removal operation member 232 (see FIG. 1) to perform an aggressive operation from the ball overflow switch 249 so that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241. May be added.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, in the setting suggestion information related process S2021, if it is determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in any one of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the setting is performed. Although the output of the suggestion information is executed, a part of the output condition of the setting suggestion information is individually set in a plurality of determination processes, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when all the conditions are satisfied. The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion information is output. For example, when it is determined that the output condition of each setting suggestion information is satisfied in all of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the configuration suggestion information may be output.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the variation mode (variable time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is currently set. However, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period set within a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, The effect time of the appearing predetermined suggestive effect may be selectable in accordance with the currently set game mode. For example, as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the operable period (for example, the first to third varieties that can be generated in the variable display including the super reach in which the variable display time is 90 seconds) during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In a gaming machine capable of generating an (operable period), the effect time of a predetermined suggestive effect that appears when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the operable period corresponds to the currently set gaming mode. The configuration may be selectable. In the eighteenth embodiment, when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the variable display time in accordance with the game mode, the currently set game mode (that is, the main control board 920 at that time) is selected. Of the variable display time assigned to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the game), but the lottery for determining whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode is performed. In the case of winning, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the variable display time assigned to the game mode currently set in the sub control board 940 May be selected. Further, a configuration may be employed in which the sub-control board 940 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to change the variable display time in accordance with the game mode.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the counting invalid period is provided after the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, so that the game balls entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B during the counting invalid period. Is not counted as a general winning number. In this case, the game ball used for detecting the continuous insertion is counted as a general winning number by the general winning number counter, but when the continuous insertion is detected, the game ball used for the detection is detected from the general winning number counter. The configuration may be such that the value is subtracted by the number of spheres.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, some examples of the period that can be the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 have been described. In the case of being arranged on the side, instead of or in addition to the above example, the counting start condition is that the normal gaming state has been started, and the period until the normal gaming state ends is the " The “counting period” may be used.

  Of the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B, the general prize device 2439A disposed on the left side of the middle start prize device 2431 allows a game ball to enter (win) only by a left-handed game technique, A game ball can enter (win) the general winning device 2439B arranged on the right side of the starting winning device 2431 by either the left-handed game technique or the right-handed game technique. Here, in a gaming machine in which a large prize device such as the large prize devices 2433 and 2434 is arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, in a special gaming state, the player can play a game by a right-handed gaming method. Will be done. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general prize winning device 439B during the special game state, the general winning number counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state calculated based on the general winning number thus counted. The level may be a value that does not appropriately reflect the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B or in the vicinity thereof.

  On the other hand, the normal game state is started and the period until the normal game state ends is set as the “counting period”, so that the player enters the general prize device 2439B during the special game state. Gaming balls can be suitably excluded from counting targets. Therefore, the number of general winnings counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general winnings counted as described above are placed at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. It is possible to obtain the value of the nail 411 provided as a value that appropriately reflects the state of the nail 411 with high accuracy.

  The start of the normal game state can be determined, for example, based on the output state of a signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, when the signal indicating that the game is in the special game state is no longer output from the external terminal board 580, it can be determined that the normal game state has been started.

  Alternatively, in a gaming machine in which a large prize device such as the large prize devices 2433 and 2434 is disposed on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, a left-handed gaming technique may be performed during the special gaming state. Sex is low. Therefore, whether the left-handed game technique is performed is determined based on the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252, and the case where the left-handed game technique is performed may be regarded as the normal game state.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the period in which the previous block 102 is in the open state is described as an example of the “count invalid period”, but the period in which the previous block 102 is in the closed state may be referred to as “count invalid period”. Further, when the previous block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, a predetermined period thereafter may be defined as a “count invalid period”. In the case where the previous block 102 is in a closed state and continuous throwing of game balls into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, a predetermined period thereafter is defined as a “count invalid period”, for example, in the game area. A ball jam state in which a game ball stays in a part of the game area occurs, and the ball jam state disables the flow of the game ball in a part of the game area, so that the game ball continues to the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. When a situation occurs in which the game balls enter, it is possible to prevent the general winning number counter from being updated for at least a part of these game balls. Accordingly, in the case where the player keeps firing game balls in the ball-clogged state and illegally continuously enter the game balls into the general prize devices 2439A and 2439B, the general winning number counter is updated as follows. Can be made to correspond to the number of entering game balls excluding a part of the game balls. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed. Also, in the case where a fraudulent act of continuously entering game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B using a magnet is performed, the general winning number counter is updated for at least a part of the game balls. The performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be more appropriately evaluated.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state is subdivided into two sections, while the section indicating that the nail 411 is in the appropriate state is subdivided. Although the case where one section is used without being divided is illustrated, the section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate may be subdivided into two or more sections.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the minimum value “1”, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the higher the nail state. Although the level is increased, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the maximum value, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the lower the nail state level becomes. It may be configured.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, a prize ball is given when the player enters a prize device to be counted, but a movable piece that is not related to the jackpot lottery and that can change the entry probability is also provided. There is no general prize device 2439A, 2439B, but a prize device in which a big hit is drawn by entering like a start prize device 2431, 2432, and a movable piece whose entry probability can be changed are provided at the entrance portion. It may be configured such that the right starting winning device 2432 and the like that are set are counted, and the nail state level is calculated for each winning device.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the configuration has been described in which a plurality of general prize switches 2449A and 2449B for separately detecting game balls that have entered the plurality of general prize devices 2439A and 2439B are provided. The configuration may be such that the path of the game ball that has entered 2439B is joined on the downstream side, and the number of general winnings is counted by a common winning switch. The winning switch used for counting the number of general winnings may be a switch used for paying out a prize ball, or may be provided separately from a switch used for paying out a prize ball.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the general winning number is collectively counted for a plurality of general winning switches 2449A and 2449B that respectively detect the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. A general winning number counter may be separately provided corresponding to the plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B, and the general winning number and the nail state level may be separately displayed on the plurality of general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. . In this case, the prize switch for counting the number of prizes by the prize number counter is such that when a specific game technique (for example, a left-handed game technique) is performed, the game ball can enter only by the game technique. A prize device (or a prize port, for example, a general prize device 2439A) and a prize device (or a prize port, for example, a general prize device 2439B) in which a game ball can enter by another game technique (for example, a right-handed game technique). It is preferable to provide a value appropriately reflecting the arrangement state of members that affect the flow of a game ball such as a nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of each winning device or in the vicinity thereof. As a result, it is possible to accurately acquire the general winning number and the nail state level.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the configuration in which the number of general winnings is counted for one counting period and the nail state level is displayed has been described. However, the configuration in which the number of general winnings is separately counted for a plurality of counting periods is described. It may be. For example, a general winning number counter is provided separately for a plurality of gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state and a special gaming state), and a general winning number and a nail state level are separately provided for each gaming state. May be displayed.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the number of general winnings and the number of shot balls are counted by the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the main control board 920). However, during the counting period, the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. The management device may acquire the number of game balls that have entered the game and the number of shot balls during the counting period, and the management device may calculate the nail state level.

(18) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Nineteenth Embodiment In the nineteenth embodiment, in the case where the game mode with the highest initial hit probability (that is, the third-stage probability) of each type is set. When the number of times of holding the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the setting corresponding to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode with the third stage probability in each type) Although the suggestion information can be output, when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, it is not limited to the case where the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type is set, but is currently set. The configuration which can output the setting suggestion information corresponding to a game mode may be sufficient.

  For example, in a configuration in which the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output as the emission color of the stop display in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, a special symbol (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) When the number of suspensions reaches the upper limit, the emission color of the stop display in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 may be the emission color according to the currently set game mode.

  Alternatively, instead of or in addition to the case where the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type is set, the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability (that is, the first-stage probability) in each type Is set, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit. Thereby, based on the output setting suggestion information, the player infers that the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine 100 in which the player is playing is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability in each type. It is possible to do.

  Here, a starting port related to the establishment of the starting condition, or a winning opening (for example, a so-called “V winning opening”) to which a predetermined privilege (for example, a transition to a stochastic game state) is given when the player enters the special game state. ), The probability of entry of a game ball into the winning prize depends on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100, such as individual differences and the mounting angle of the pachinko machine 100, so that the first hit probability is set to a gaming mode with the lowest probability. Even if the pachinko machine 100 is used, the pachinko machine 100 may be an advantageous gaming machine for the player depending on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, when the currently set game mode is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability in each type, the physical state of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed by indicating setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode to the player. The setting suggestion information can be used by the player as one of the information for selecting the pachinko machine 100 in which the player plays the game while considering the game, so that a new enjoyment for the player to select the pachinko machine 100 can be provided. Can be provided.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, when the game mode with the highest initial hit probability (that is, the third-stage probability) of each type is set, the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are set. Although the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode with the third stage probability in each type) is output at a predetermined probability when the number of suspensions reaches the upper limit. The “predetermined probability” is the probability (ie, 100%) that the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is always output when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit. Alternatively, the probability that the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output or not output when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, such as the above 10%, may be used. .

  In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times the special symbols are held reaches the upper limit, and when it is selected not to display the held full tank effect by the held full tank effect lottery, the currently set game is set. The configuration suggestion information corresponding to the mode is not output (that is, the fourth display unit 2730D is not illuminated in gold). However, when it is selected not to display the reserved full effect by the reserved full effect drawing lottery. Even so, the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output, or the configuration suggestion information output may be selected with a predetermined probability.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are held reaches the upper limit, the lottery result is displayed by the lottery result display unit 2730 using the lottery result display unit 2730. In this case, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output. However, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output as a lottery result display unit 2730. For example, after displaying the lottery result by the hold full tank production lottery, during a special period in which the hold full tank production is executed (a period in which the hold full tank production can appear), it corresponds to the game mode currently set. The configuration suggestion information may be output. For example, during the special period, numbers and symbols indicating setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or a dedicated display device.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, when the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output and when the setting suggestion information is not output, the fourth display after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 is displayed. The light emission color of the stop display stopped by the unit 2730D is configured to be different. However, the case where the setting suggestion information is output and the case where the setting suggestion information is not output are not limited to the color difference, and the display is not limited thereto. The configuration may be represented by different modes. For example, when the setting suggestion information is not output, the fourth display unit 2730D emits red light in the stop display after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, and when the setting suggestion information is output, the lottery is performed. In the variable display by the result display unit 2730, the display units 2730A to 2730D may be stopped by emitting or blinking red or a color other than red.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the lottery result display unit 2730 that displays the lottery result by the holding full tank effect lottery is used as the output destination of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode. A configuration in which the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output independently of the display of the result of the lottery in the full-hold production lottery. In other words, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output to an area different from the display area on the lottery result display unit 2730 of the decorative symbol display device 479, a dedicated display device, or the like. Is also good.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of special symbol holdings reaches the upper limit, a case where the holding full tank effect lottery is performed and the setting suggestion information is output is exemplified, but the number of special symbol holdings is not necessarily the upper limit. It is not necessary to output setting suggestion information when it reaches, and when the number of times the special symbol is held increases from three to four, or when the shift is stopped while the change is stopped, the change display is started thereafter. For example, in the case where the setting suggestion information is output only once for a moment, the setting suggestion information may be displayed by selecting whether or not to output the setting suggestion information, triggered by the satisfaction of a condition in another number of suspensions, or a special period. May be started. In addition, a condition (for example, a predetermined number (for example, four) increase in the number of times of holding and a condition in which the number of times of holding reaches the upper limit in a certain time (within 10 seconds) and the number of times of holding reaches the upper limit) is set, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. May be used to select whether or not to output setting suggestion information, or to randomly select whether to start a special period, or to output setting suggestion information when all of a plurality of conditions are satisfied. Whether or not to do so may be selected, or whether or not to start a special period may be determined by lottery.

(19) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Twentieth Embodiment In the twentieth embodiment, as the predetermined condition relating to the extension of the period, the extended waiting period (that is, the special period related to the holding full tank effect is started) From the above, the case of winning in the effect extension lottery during the end time earlier than the end time of the special period) has been exemplified, but conditions other than the case may be adopted as predetermined conditions for extending the period. . For example, if the number of times the special symbol is held increases by one during the extension waiting period, it is determined that the predetermined condition relating to the extension of the period is satisfied, and the production extension is performed without performing the production extension lottery (that is, with a 100% probability). The structure which a function operates may be sufficient.

  Alternatively, during the extended waiting period, when the game ball wins a prize device other than the prize device related to the start winning prize of the special symbol, such as the general prize devices 439A and 439B, or when the prize is won, an effect extended lottery is performed. In a case where a predetermined situation is caused by a game ball fired by a player, such as when winning in an effect extension lottery, the effect extension function may be activated assuming that a predetermined condition relating to a period extension is satisfied. . Further, the predetermined condition relating to the extension of the period may be a condition that can be satisfied without depending on the game ball fired by the player. For example, the execution of a part of the effect whose execution is determined in the variable display whose execution has already been suspended may be set as the extension condition, or the extension condition may be set by combining a plurality of conditions.

  In the twentieth embodiment, as the extended standby period, the period in which the special period related to the holding full tank effect starts and ends at an earlier end time than the end time of the special period has been exemplified. The extended standby period may be a period that is provided after the number of times reaches the upper limit, and a period in which the end time comes earlier than the end time of the special period related to the held full effect. For example, after the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, a period that ends at an end time earlier than the end time of the special period related to the held full tank effect, or from a predetermined time after the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit The extended standby period may be a period that is started and ends at an earlier end time than the end time of the special period relating to the hold full effect.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the winning probability by the lottery is constant (for example, 50%) in any of the effect extension lotteries performed during the extension waiting period is illustrated, but the special symbol is provided during the extension waiting period. The winning probability by the extended production lottery may be changed as the number of holdings increases. For example, as the number of special symbols held increases during the extended waiting period, the winning probability of the extended stage lottery may be increased stepwise greatly, and the winning probability of the extended stage lottery may be appropriately increased or decreased. May be.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the extended standby period is defined by the time (for example, three minutes). However, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the special symbol are determined (stop display). The extended standby period may be defined by an element other than the time, such as the number of times that is displayed.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the special period related to the holding full tank effect is extended by a predetermined time (for example, one minute) when a predetermined condition related to the period extension is satisfied. May be extended by an element other than time, such as the number of times the special symbol variable display is executed or the number of times the fixed display (stop display) is displayed in the special symbol variable display.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the special period related to the hold full tank effect is extended by the predetermined time (for example, one minute) when the predetermined condition related to the period extension is satisfied is described. A configuration in which the extension amount of the special symbol fluctuates as the number of times the special symbol is reserved in the period increases. For example, as the number of times of holding the special symbol increases during the extension waiting period, the amount of extension of the special period (time or the number of times of performing the variable display of the special symbol) may increase stepwise greatly. A configuration in which the extension amount is appropriately increased or decreased may be employed.

  In the twentieth embodiment described above, a case where a lottery for extending a period is performed in a start winning prize that occurred in a partial period of a special period has been described as an example. May be performed.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the length of the special period is set in advance when the hold full tank production lottery is won, and the length of the special period is extended when a predetermined condition relating to the period extension is satisfied. Thus, the length of the special period is made different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the special period may be changed by another method. For example, the end condition is made different according to the number of game balls entered during the execution of the fluctuation display of the number of the upper limit of the hold which is the target of the hold full effect, and when a larger number of game balls enter, the later In the variable display, the probability that the special period continues may be made high. That is, as the continuation probability, the initial value may be set to 30%, and the continuation probability may be determined by adding a value obtained by multiplying the number of occurrences of the starting prize by 5%. Even in this case, the longer the special prize is generated after the start of the special period, the longer the special period can be easily extended.

  (20) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, the pachinko machine may be configured to increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state is generated a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) once the big hit occurs. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine which enters a special game state on condition that a ball wins in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same language.

<Feature 10>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of columns of symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (variation pattern of a decorative symbol) of the variation display of the plurality of symbols when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied, the symbols in the plurality of rows are displayed in the display unit in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection unit, and then stopped in a combination of the symbols according to the lottery result. A change execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols in the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the first result by the variation executing means, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is displayed. A generated game control means (main control board 920);
Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variation display of the plurality of rows of symbols are suspended by the variation executing means are stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) that can be stored in
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The variation mode selection unit is configured to store the lottery result indicating the first result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included. Selecting a variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means is more likely to increase than when the lottery results indicating the first result are not included in the lottery results. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variation display of the symbols in a plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection unit, and the symbols in the plurality of columns are displayed on the display unit in the selected variation mode by the variation execution unit. After the variable display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of the symbols showing the first result. I do.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns are suspended by the variation executing means are configured to be memorable in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the suspension storage means. You. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variation mode selection unit may include the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. Compared to a case where a lottery result indicating the first result is not included, a variation mode is selected in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is more likely to increase.

  Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit tends to increase. Therefore, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying a special effect is increased. This makes it difficult for the player to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, Since the special effect is more easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the feeling of the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 10 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 10 may be "special effect execution means" for executing various special effects including display.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage unit may be “information used for lottery by the lottery unit” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 11>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of columns of symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (variation pattern of a decorative symbol) of the variation display of the plurality of symbols when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied, the symbols in the plurality of rows are displayed in the display unit in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection unit, and then stopped in a combination of the symbols according to the lottery result. A change execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols in the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the first result by the variation executing means, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is displayed. A generated game control means (main control board 920);
Holding storage means capable of storing, in a predetermined storage unit, up to a predetermined number of lottery results, among the lottery results obtained by the lottery means, in which the execution of the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbols by the fluctuation executing means is suspended. Sub-control board 940);
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The variation mode selectable by the variation mode selection means is such that, after a symbol is stopped and displayed in a state in which a part of the symbol combination indicating the first result is formed, the remaining symbols for which the variable display is continued are selected by lottery. A reach display mode to stop and display in a pattern according to the lottery result by means, and a non-reach display mode that does not include the reach display mode,
The variation mode selection unit is configured to store the lottery result indicating the first result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included. A non-reach display mode is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result including the first result is not included in the lottery results.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably hold and store the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variation display of the symbols in a plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection unit, and the symbols in the plurality of columns are displayed on the display unit in the selected variation mode by the variation execution unit. After the variable display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of the symbols showing the first result. I do.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns are suspended by the variation executing means are configured to be memorable in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the suspension storage means. You. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variation mode selection unit may include the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. The non-reach display mode is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included. Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is easily displayed.

  When the fluctuation display of the reach display mode is displayed, the player may stop firing the game ball during the fluctuation display in consideration of the occurrence of the special game state thereafter. On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature 11, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the fluctuation display of the non-reach display mode is performed. Since the display becomes easier, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the emission of the game ball during the fluctuation display.

  This makes it easy for the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit to be increased by the holding storage means, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying special effects is increased. Increase. This makes it difficult for the player to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, In comparison, since the variation display of the non-reach display mode is more easily displayed, the special effect can be more easily displayed when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result. it can. Therefore, a situation can be created in which the player can expect the occurrence of the special game state by displaying the special effect, so that the progress of the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 11 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 11 may be a "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 11, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for the lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 11, wherein
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable time determining unit that determines a variable time according to a variable display of a plurality of rows of symbols is provided,
The variation mode selection means is for selecting the variation mode corresponding to the variation time determined by the variation time determination means,
The variation mode selection means may include, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. Is included, the non-reach display mode having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means is displayed in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. Is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included,
The change execution means corresponds to the reach display mode in the change time determined by the change time determination means, and stores the first result in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. If the non-reach display mode having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is selected by the fluctuation mode selection means when the selected lottery result is included, the selected non-reach is selected. A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is changed one or more times to display a change in the change time determined by the change time determining means.

  In the gaming machine according to Feature 12, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. When the lottery result shown is included, the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means is displayed by the fluctuation mode selecting means, The selection is made with a higher probability than in the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

  When the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means corresponds to the reach display mode and the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the fluctuation mode is changed. When a non-reach display mode having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is selected by the selection means, the selected non-reach display mode is performed one or more times by the fluctuation execution means. Thus, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is performed.

  Therefore, in order to perform the fluctuation display of the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time corresponding to the reach display mode, it is possible to divert the data relating to the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the reach display mode, and to correspond to the reach display mode. It is not necessary to exclusively prepare data relating to the non-reach display mode of the variable time. As a result, the amount of storage capacity consumed in the gaming machine can be suitably suppressed.

<Feature 20>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in stop by the variation executing means. For each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at one or more operation times set during the effect execution possible period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative symbol), each operation mode is executed. Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting each of the special effects to be executed from the plurality of types of effects,
In the one or more operation timings set within the effect executable period, the first operation mode of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation timings A first special effect display unit (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the first operation mode when the operation unit is operated;
Each of the special effects selected by the special effect selecting means for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit which can be operated at the one or more operation times set within the effect executable period. Storage control means (sub-control board 940) for storing the effect information to be shown in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the sub-control board 940) so that the special effects can be restored;
When the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restorable period set after the end of the effect execution possible period, the storage control unit causes the storage unit to A second special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode based on the stored effect information; A gaming machine comprising:

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, when a player operates a production button at a predetermined timing, the display content on the display device is changed, and a game machine in which a predetermined production such as outputting a corresponding sound from a speaker is also performed. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, if the player operates the production button at a predetermined timing, the player can experience a production corresponding to the operation of the production button, but if the player does not operate the production button at that timing, The player cannot experience an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 20, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs the symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in combination with the symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  The effect execution at least partially performed during a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means is displayed. An operation time is set within the period. For each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the operation time, each special effect executed when each operation mode is performed is performed by the special effect selection unit, and a plurality of types of effects are respectively provided. Is selected from The effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selecting means is stored in a predetermined storage unit by the storage control means so that the special effects can be restored.

  In the case where the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes that can be operated at the one or more operation times set in the one or more operation times set within the effect execution possible period The special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the first operation mode is displayed on the display unit by the first special effect displaying means.

  On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the predetermined restorable period set after the end of the effect execution period, the storage control unit stores the operation unit. The special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the unit.

  Therefore, even when the operation unit is not operated in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time within the effect executable period, the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode within the restoration available period. The special effect (the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode) that the player could not see because he did not operate the operation unit in the second operation mode at the predetermined operation time during the effect executable period. Direction) can be restored and viewed. This reduces the possibility that the player will have a negative emotion in the game, such as regretting that he or she did not see some or all of the special effects on his or her own will during the production executable period. The decrease in interest is suppressed.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 20 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the “first special effect display means” and the “second special effect display means” in the feature 20 are “first special effect execution means” and “second special effect execution means” for executing various special effects including display, respectively. Effect executing means ".

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
The effect executable period includes an execution period of a symbol variation display executed by the variation execution unit,
A plurality of the operation times are set within the execution period of the symbol change display,
The second special effect display means may include, during the restorable period, a second one of the plurality of operation modes during the operation time after the operation time when the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. When the operation unit is operated in the operation mode of the above, based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit, the special operation selected by the special effect selection unit for the second operation mode A gaming machine displaying an effect on the display unit.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 21, in a configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at different operation times within the execution period of the symbol change display, the symbol change display is performed. The special effect corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed by operating the operation unit in the first operation mode at the previous operation time within the execution period, but is displayed in the second operation mode at the subsequent operation time. Even if the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode is not displayed without operating the operation unit, the player operates the operation unit in the second operation mode within the restorable period, so that the player can , The special effect corresponding to the second operation mode can be restored and viewed.

  If a plurality of operation times are provided within the execution period of the symbol change display, if the special effect that can be displayed for each operation time is an effect that indicates the probability of occurrence of a subsequent special game state, If the displayed special effect is an effect that indicates that it is less likely to transition to the special game state than the previously displayed special effect, the player loses the expectation of transitioning to the special game state. May be discouraged by the game. To prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to operate the operation unit at a later operation time, but if he does not operate the operation unit at a later operation time, then the player will transition to the special game state Sometimes, you may want to know what happened if you were displaying a special effect that you did not display on your own.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 21, the player can restore and view the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode during the restorable period, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction. It is possible to suitably improve the interest in the game.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
The second special effect display means may perform the operation in the second operation mode at the operation time when the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the restorable period. When the unit is operated, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. A gaming machine characterized by displaying.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 22, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at the common operation time within the effect executable period, the first operation is performed during the effect executable period. Even if the operation unit cannot be operated in the second operation mode by operating the operation unit in the operation mode of, the player responds to the second operation mode in the restorable period. The special effects can be restored and viewed. As a result, the special game that the player has not been able to see during the effect executable period can be seen, so that the player can be satisfied and the interest in the game can be appropriately improved.

<Feature 30>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
A first operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player,
A second operation unit (selection operation device 263) provided at a position different from the first operation unit and operable by a player;
It is constituted by at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. The special effect executed when the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect executable period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative symbol) is selected from a plurality of types of effects. Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940),
When the first operation unit is operated at an operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time Is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit, and when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time is selected by the special effect selection unit. A special effect control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the displayed special effect to be displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, when a player operates a production button at a predetermined timing, the display content on the display device is changed, and a game machine in which a predetermined production such as outputting a corresponding sound from a speaker is also performed. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, the effect displayed on the display device by the operation of the operation button by the player is always displayed in the same area, and in that point, it was monotonous without novelty.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 30, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs the symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in combination with the symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  The effect execution at least partially performed during a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means is displayed. An operation time is set within the period. Each special effect executed when the operation unit is operated at the operation time is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selecting means.

  When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect execution possible period, the special effect control means selects the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time by the special effect selection means. The special effect is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit. On the other hand, when the second operation section is operated at the operation time, the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the operation of the first operation section at the operation time is performed by the special effect control means. It is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

  Therefore, the display position of the special effect can be changed depending on whether the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, so that the game in which the special effect is displayed according to the operation of the player has a variety of games. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
When the second operation unit is operated at an operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit performs the special effect selection with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. A game machine characterized by transmitting effect information indicating a special effect selected by means to another game machine, and displaying the special effect on a display unit of the other game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 31, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. By transmitting the effect information indicating the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the operation to another gaming machine, the special effect is displayed on the display unit of the other gaming machine.

  Therefore, since the special effect can be displayed on the display unit of another gaming machine, the special effect can be viewed together with the other players, and an interest different from the case of playing the game alone can be obtained.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
When the second operation unit is operated at an operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit performs the special effect with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. The special effect selected by the selection means is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position on the display unit, and the first operation unit or the second operation unit is displayed at the predetermined position at the operation time. A game machine displaying contents displayed on the display unit when not operated.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 32, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. A position where the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the operation is different from a predetermined position on the display unit (that is, a position where the special effect is displayed when the first operation unit is operated at the operation time). Will be displayed. On the other hand, at a predetermined position on the display unit, the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated at the operation time is displayed.

  Therefore, the player simultaneously performs the special effect displayed by operating the second operation unit and the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated. Since it is possible to see, it is possible to suitably improve the interest in the game.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
A receiving unit (sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B) capable of receiving the effect information from another gaming machine;
The gaming machine, wherein the special effect control means displays the special effect indicated by the effect information on the display unit when the effect information transmitted from another gaming machine is received by the receiving means.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 33, when the effect information transmitted from another gaming machine is received, the special effect indicated by the effect information is displayed by the special effect display means based on the received effect information. Displayed in the section. Therefore, a special effect based on the effect information received from another gaming machine can be displayed on the display unit, so that the special effect can be viewed together with other players playing with the other gaming machine, and the game can be played alone. You can get a different kind of interest than when you do it.

<Feature 40>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
A holding storage unit capable of storing, in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920), a lottery result of which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing unit is suspended among the lottery results, up to a predetermined number. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The special effect display means is stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means includes a lottery result indicating the first result. A gaming machine displaying the special effect with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs the symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in combination with the symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the suspension storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  The special effect display means, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means, includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. The special effect is configured to be displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

  Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, Since the special effect is more easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, since the feeling of the progress of the game can be sharpened, it is possible to improve the interest in the gaming machine in which the lottery results can be stored in the storage unit up to a predetermined number (upper limit) by the holding storage means.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 40 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 40 may be "special effect execution means" for executing various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 40, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for the lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 50>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
A holding storage unit capable of storing, in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920), a lottery result of which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing unit is suspended among the lottery results, up to a predetermined number. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit at a predetermined first time, after a predetermined second time within a predetermined time period including the first time. If the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means at the time reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed at the first time. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably hold and store lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs the symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in combination with the symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variable execution means are suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit by the reserved storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  After the number of the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time, the special effect display means holds the special effect in the predetermined second time in the predetermined time period including the first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage means reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed in the first period.

  Therefore, during the predetermined period, when the number of the lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, a special effect is displayed before the number of the lottery results reaches the upper limit. Since it becomes easier, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 50 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 50 may be a "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for the lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 51>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50,
After the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit at a predetermined first time, the special effect display unit stores the number of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit at the second time. When the number of stored lottery results reaches the upper limit again, if the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the holding is performed. A gaming machine wherein the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the storage means.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 51, the special effect display means stores the hold result in the second time after the number of the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the means reaches the upper limit again, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means, The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, Since the special effect is more easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the feeling of the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
A predetermined value set within a period from the satisfaction of the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means to the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result by the variation executing means. As a first special effect that can be displayed at the first time, a first special effect selecting means (sub-control board) for selecting one special effect from a plurality of types of special effects indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter 940)
A first special effect unit (sub-control board 940) that displays the first special effect selected by the first special effect selection unit on the display unit at the first time;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player;
After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, before the predetermined second time set after the first time within the period arrives, the operation unit Is operated, when the occurrence probability of the special game state suggested by the first special effect is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the occurrence probability of the special game state is performed by the second special effect. A second special effect control unit that controls the second special effect not to be displayed on the display unit at the time or to indicate the second special effect that indicates a higher probability of occurrence of the special game state than the first special effect on the display unit. (Sub-control board 940).

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, various character designs and the like are displayed during the changing display of the symbols, and each time the character symbols and the like are displayed, the degree of expectation to be a big hit according to the type of the displayed character symbols and the like is determined by a game. What is suggested to a person is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2009-153699).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to display an effect indicating a degree of expectation to a big hit to a player during the change display of a symbol. For example, if the display of a character pattern or the like displayed later during the variable display of the symbol has a lower degree of expectation for the big hit suggested by the display than the display of the character pattern or the like displayed earlier, the player Although the sense of expectation of the big hit is temporarily increased by the earlier display, it is lost by the later display, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to appropriately execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs a symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  At a predetermined first time set within a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is established to when stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means. The first special effect that can be displayed is selected by the first special effect selecting means from a plurality of types of special effects that indicate the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter. The selected first special effect is displayed on the display unit at the first time by the first special effect means.

  After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, the first result is executed by the variable execution means after the start condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied. If the operation unit is operated before the predetermined second time set after the first time in the period until the stop display of the stop symbol shown is performed, it is suggested by the first special effect. If the occurrence probability of the special game state is higher than the predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the occurrence probability of the special game state is not displayed on the display unit at the second time under the control of the second special effect control means. Alternatively, a second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of a special game state higher than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit.

  Therefore, after the first special effect, the display of the second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state lower than the first special effect can be suppressed, and the second special effect is performed after the first special effect. In the configuration to be performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing expectations for the occurrence of the special game state and decreasing interest in the game.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 60 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the “first special effect display means” in the feature 60 may be a “first special effect execution means” that executes various special effects including display, and the “second special effect control means” may include: It may control to execute various special effects including display.

<Feature 70>
A spinning body (middle reel 711M) in which a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols (main symbols 712) to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display are attached is arranged as a predetermined symbol row. Each of a plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of turning bodies (the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M, and the right reel 711R) including the turning body is changed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies. A display unit (reel device 710) capable of displaying,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. A storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information by storing it in the RAM 920 until the change display corresponding to the information is executed by the change execution means;
A predetermined effect based on information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and effect target information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least two or more variable displays are executed. Effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is that, in a variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, a symbol of a symbol column displayed on the predetermined torso of the plurality of symbol columns is the predetermined symbol. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is such that the player stops visually so as to be visually recognizable in a symbol attached with numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display executed until the variable display is executed.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in a starting winning prize port, a fluctuation display of a production symbol is started on a symbol display device and a big hit lottery is performed, and a big hit is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery. A configuration is known in which, when it is determined to generate a big hit, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol (for example, “777”), and then a big hit is generated.

  In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine in which a result of a jackpot lottery is pre-read and a pre-reading effect is performed during a change of the effect symbol (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The look-ahead effect means that if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening while the design symbol fluctuates, the number of pending balls is added, and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a preview of a game state that is generated when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol performed by the digestion of the reserved ball ends. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first retained ball is a jackpot, it is foreseen that a jackpot will occur when the next variable display following the current variable display is completed.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine of a conventional configuration that performs a look-ahead effect. For example, in order to increase a player's interest in a look-ahead effect, diversification of the look-ahead effect is required.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine of a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. This problem is common to the gaming machines described in the following features 80 to B0.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with diversified prefetching effects. Further, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize a configuration capable of holding lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. In other words, the display unit is a predetermined symbol row in which a three-dimensional turn body arranged so that a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display are attached circulates, Each of a plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of torso bodies including the torso body can be variably displayed by rotating each of the plurality of torso bodies.

  When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, and thereafter, the symbols are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  Based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and the effect target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least two or more variable displays are executed, As a predetermined effect, in the variable display performed before the predetermined variable display by the variable performing means, a symbol of a symbol row displayed on a predetermined torso of a plurality of symbol rows is subjected to a predetermined variable display. An effect is performed in which a symbol is attached to the symbol information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display to be executed until the symbol is stopped so that the player can visually recognize the symbol.

  Therefore, the player visually recognizes the numerical information attached to the symbol of the symbol column displayed on the predetermined torso in the variable display during execution, and thereafter executes the display until the predetermined variable display is performed. The number of times of the variable display to be performed can be grasped from the numerical information. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined variable display that gradually approaches, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed until the predetermined variable display is performed is performed by the symbol of the symbol row displayed on the torso to be displayed with the variable display, the player may not miss the countdown. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the symbol sequence to be displayed in a variable manner is not limited to the rotating body, but there are some gaming machines that are executed by displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device or the like. There are many players who are liable to increase the component cost and prefer a variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body. At this time, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, if the number of countdowns described above is displayed separately from the symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, the cost of the display device is added.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 70, the three-dimensional torso is configured to include a symbol to which numerical information is added, and the symbol is a part of a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means. Can be configured. For this reason, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, the display size of the symbol displayed on the rotating body is set to be large to make it easier for a player to visually recognize the symbol, and to suppress an increase in cost. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an effect in which a display of a countdown until a predetermined variable display is executed is performed by a symbol.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 70, “... the player can visually stop at the symbol with the numerical information” is not limited to completely stopping the symbol with the numerical information. Alternatively, the symbol may stop within a predetermined range and be accompanied by an operation such as rocking, or the symbol may not be the final stop but a temporary stop during the change.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
In the predetermined effect, in the variation display performed before the predetermined variation display by the variation performing means, the symbol of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined body is a different time from the predetermined body. In a state where the torso is changing, the effect is such that the player stops visually so as to be able to visually recognize the symbol with the numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the changing display executed until the predetermined changing display is executed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 71, the player may change the display to the predetermined turning body while the other turning body (a turning body different from the predetermined turning body) is fluctuating in the change display during execution. By visually recognizing the numerical information attached to the symbols in the displayed symbol row, it is possible to grasp the number of times of the variable display executed until the predetermined variable display is executed thereafter from the numerical information. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish the predetermined torso from the other torso from among the plurality of torso, and can prevent the player from overlooking the countdown performed in the predetermined torso.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A first variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that, after the start condition is satisfied, variably displays the symbol on the display unit and then stops and displays the symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the first variation executing means is stopped and displayed at a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a game state;
When the starting condition is satisfied while the symbol variation display is being performed by the first variation execution unit, information corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery unit is stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit. (Main control board 920) by storing the information in the (main control board 920) until the first change execution means executes the change display of the symbol corresponding to the information. When,
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit;
When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit reaches an upper limit and the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, the display unit or the display unit A second variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a predetermined second variation display on a second display unit (lottery result display device 730) different from the above, and then stops and displays in a predetermined stop mode.
A special effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when the second change display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop mode by the second change execution means. A gaming machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the symbols are variably displayed on the display unit by the first variance execution unit, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  When the starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is being performed by the first variable execution unit, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding unit. The information can be suspended until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means, with the predetermined number as an upper limit.

  When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the execution of a predetermined special effect is selected with a predetermined probability by the special effect selection means. When the execution of the special effect is selected, the second variation executing means performs a predetermined second variation display on the display unit or a second display unit different from the display unit, and then stops in a predetermined stop mode. The special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

  Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and the player increases the number of pieces of information corresponding to the held lottery results. It is possible to engage in a game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose. Thereby, the player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of holding the lottery result up to the predetermined upper limit value can be improved.

  Further, whether or not the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means is notified to the player as a stop display after the second variable display, so that the number of information corresponding to the held lottery result reaches the upper limit. Thus, during the period until the second variable display ends (that is, during the execution period of the second variable display), it is possible to appropriately amplify the player's expectation for the execution of the special effect.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by operation of an operable structure, or The effect may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

  In addition, the second variation execution means in the gaming machine according to the feature 80, when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the display unit or a second different from the display unit. After performing the predetermined second variable display on the display unit, when the special effect selection means selects the execution of the special effect, the display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode, and when the execution of the special effect is not selected. May be stopped and displayed in a stop mode different from the predetermined stop mode.

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80,
The second variation execution means performs the second variation display that varies within a predetermined range on the display unit or the second display unit, and then the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit. And a stop display at different positions within the predetermined range depending on whether the special effect has been selected or not.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 81, when the second variation display is performed by the second variation execution unit, the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit, and the execution of the special effect is selected. Since the position of the stop display after the second variable display is different from the case where no special effect is provided, the player can easily judge sensuously from the position of the stop display whether or not execution of the special effect has been selected. In particular, since the stop display is limited to a predetermined range, the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

<Feature 90>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result;
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result by the change execution means, the gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a certain special game state,
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information by storing the information in the RAM until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means.
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit;
A special effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means;
When the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit and the variable display is executed by the variable execution unit, a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display. And a selection result display means (sub-control board 940) for recognizing the player that the execution of the special effect has been selected at a time different from the time when the special effect is selected. Machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the execution of a predetermined special effect is selected with a predetermined probability by the special effect selection means. When the execution of the special effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means. Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and the player increases the number of pieces of information corresponding to the held lottery results. It is possible to engage in a game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose. Thereby, the player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of holding the lottery result up to the predetermined upper limit value can be improved.

  Further, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the variable display is executed by the variable execution means, the execution of the special effect is selected, and the selection result display means As a result, the variable display is displayed so as to be recognizable by the player at a time different from the time when the predetermined attention display is displayed.

  Therefore, the display indicating that the special effect has been selected does not coincide with the display time of the attention display, and therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook the display indicating that the special effect has been selected. In addition, when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variation display, the player can concentrate on the attention display, so that the expectation of the variation display during execution by the attention display is appropriately improved. be able to.

  The “predetermined attention display” in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 is a stop display in a state where some of the symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result. May be displayed (so-called “reach display”), a display of a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit, or a suggestion effect by light emission of the light-emitting unit (for ease of transition to the special game state). Production that suggests a degree or expectation).

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by operation of an operable structure, or The effect may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

<Feature 91>
A gaming machine according to feature 90,
The selection result display means, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variable execution means A game machine which hastens the end time of the attention display, and displays, after the end of the attention display, the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 91, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and when a predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variable executing means, By the selection result display means, the end time of the attention display is advanced, and it is displayed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected after the end of the attention display. This allows the player to show the attention display at an early stage while displaying a display indicating that execution of the special effect has been selected.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
After the predetermined attention display is stopped and displayed in a state where some of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result, the remaining symbol columns are displayed. It is a display up to stop display with a symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The selection result display means, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variable execution means A game machine displaying, after completion of the predetermined attention display, that the execution of the special effect has been selected so that the player can recognize it.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 92, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and when a predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variable executing means, By the selection result display means, the fact that the execution of the special effect has been selected is displayed so that the player can recognize it after the end of the attention display. Here, the display of interest is stopped and displayed in a state where some of the symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol rows are selected by lottery means. This is a display up to the stop display with a symbol according to the lottery result, and it is a display that makes the player expect the transition to the special game state, so by focusing the player on the attention display, execution by the attention display It is possible to preferably improve the sense of expectation for the medium fluctuation display.

<Feature A0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information by storing the information in the RAM until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means.
A predetermined effect based on information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and effect target information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed. Effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is
When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the plurality of symbol columns are different from the first result in a predetermined display area (middle line L2) where the transition to the special game state is made. A first variation display in which a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that is a combination of predetermined symbols that does not transition to the special game state,
After executing the first variation display, one or more variation displays executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation performing means, or included in the predetermined symbol combination in the predetermined variation display Some symbols (second sub-designs 713B) that cannot stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the symbols are included in the predetermined symbols. While maintaining the state of being displayed in the predetermined display area, other symbol columns (left symbol column, right symbol column) different from the symbol column (middle symbol column) including the partial symbol among the plurality of symbol columns ) Starts a second fluctuation display with fluctuation,
Synchronously with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined fluctuation display, or at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display, a symbol that has been stopped from before the last time in the plurality of symbol columns. A gaming machine characterized by an effect of starting a change in a row (middle symbol row).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in a starting winning prize port, a fluctuation display of a production symbol is started on a symbol display device and a big hit lottery is performed, and a big hit is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery. A configuration is known in which, when it is determined to generate a big hit, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol (for example, “777”), and then a big hit is generated.

  In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine in which a result of a jackpot lottery is pre-read and a pre-reading effect is performed during a change of the effect symbol (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The look-ahead effect means that if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening while the design symbol fluctuates, the number of pending balls is added, and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a preview of a game state that is generated when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol performed by the digestion of the reserved ball ends. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first retained ball is a jackpot, it is foreseen that a jackpot will occur when the next variable display following the current variable display is completed.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine of a conventional configuration that performs a look-ahead effect. For example, in order to increase a player's interest in a look-ahead effect, diversification of the look-ahead effect is required.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature A0 can provide a gaming machine with diversified prefetching effects. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  A predetermined effect is produced based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit and the effect target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one or more variable displays are executed. It is executed by the execution means.

  Specifically, in the predetermined effect, first, when a stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, a plurality of symbol columns are displayed in a predetermined display area where a transition is made to the special game state. A first variable display in which a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result different from the first result and a stop symbol which is a combination of predetermined symbols which does not transition to the special game state is displayed.

  After the first variable display is executed, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display by the variable executing means, or a stop displayed in the first variable display in the predetermined variable display. A part of symbols included in a predetermined symbol combination that is a symbol, and when the symbols are included, some symbols in which a stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in a predetermined display area. While the state where is displayed in the predetermined display area is maintained, a second variable display in which another symbol row different from the symbol row including the partial symbol among the plurality of symbol rows is started.

  Then, in synchronism with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined fluctuation display, or at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display, a symbol that has been stopped from before the last time in the plurality of symbol rows. The variation of the column (that is, the symbol column including a part of symbols displayed in a predetermined display area among the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) is started.

  Therefore, at least one variable display executed before the predetermined variable display, or in the predetermined variable display, as a second variable display, a part of the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display. While maintaining the state in which the symbol is displayed in the predetermined display area, the symbol column including the partial symbol is changed, and the other symbol column is changed, so that the player starts the second variable display. This amplifies the sense of expectation of the display (stop display) of the lottery result with respect to the predetermined change display that comes after that, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In particular, the symbol sequence which has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the predetermined fluctuation display is synchronized with the predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined fluctuation display, or for a predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation is started at the previous timing, it is strongly impressed that the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display is approaching, and thereby, the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined fluctuation display can be further increased.

  Also, the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area in the symbol row stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display (a part of the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) are: If the symbol is included, the stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area. Therefore, in one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display, the second variable display The stop symbol corresponding to the first result can be prevented from being stopped and displayed when another symbol row that fluctuates as a stop.

  The "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature A0 is a stop display in a state in which some of the symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result. May be displayed (so-called “reach display”), a display of a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit, or a suggestion effect by light emission of the light-emitting unit (for ease of transition to the special game state). Production that suggests a degree or expectation).

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine according to feature A0,
In the first variation display, in a state where the other symbol row is fluctuating, a symbol that cannot constitute the first result in a symbol row different from the other symbol row has stopped in the predetermined display area. A gaming machine, wherein the other symbol row is stopped so as to be a stopped symbol which is a combination of the predetermined symbol.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature A1, in the first variable display, a symbol row stopped prior to another symbol row is synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in a subsequent predetermined variable display, or Since the display is stopped until it is re-changed at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined change display, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the most changed symbol sequence, and Expectation of the lottery result can be appropriately increased.

<Feature B0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit, and then the variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the special execution state which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state after being stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the fluctuation execution means. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information by storing the information in the RAM until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means.
A predetermined effect based on information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and effect target information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed. Effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is a variation display executed before the variation display by the variation executing means, as a variation display, a part of symbols (second sub symbol 713B) that do not constitute a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the display is continuously displayed in the predetermined display area (middle line L2) where the transition to the special game state is performed during the entire period of the variable display. The effect of changing and displaying a different symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row) different from the symbol row (the middle symbol row) including the part of the symbols among the symbol rows described above. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in a starting winning prize port, a fluctuation display of a production symbol is started on a symbol display device and a big hit lottery is performed, and a big hit is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery. A configuration is known in which, when it is determined to generate a big hit, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol (for example, “777”), and then a big hit is generated.

  In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine in which a result of a jackpot lottery is pre-read and a pre-reading effect is performed during a change of the effect symbol (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The look-ahead effect means that if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening while the design symbol fluctuates, the number of pending balls is added, and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the random number value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a preview of a game state that is generated when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol performed by the digestion of the reserved ball ends. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first retained ball is a jackpot, it is foreseen that a jackpot will occur when the next variable display following the current variable display is completed.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine of a conventional configuration that performs a look-ahead effect. For example, in order to increase a player's interest in a look-ahead effect, diversification of the look-ahead effect is required.

  On the other hand, if the gaming machine is described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the look-ahead effect is diversified. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  A predetermined effect is produced based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit and the effect target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one or more variable displays are executed. It is executed by the execution means. By executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the subsequent display (stop display) of the lottery result with respect to the predetermined variable display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the predetermined effect, in the variation display performed before the predetermined variation display by the variation performing means, some symbols that do not constitute the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are the stop symbols corresponding to the first result. Is continuously displayed in the predetermined display area to be shifted to the special game state when the stop display is performed during the entire period of the variable display, and the symbol row including the partial symbol among a plurality of symbol rows is After another symbol row is variably displayed, the other symbol row is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, in the variation display performed before the predetermined variation display, it is shown that some symbols that do not constitute the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are displayed from the start to the end of the variation display, thereby displaying the game. The person recognizes that the stop design corresponding to the first result is not displayed in the variable display, and thereby, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the subsequent predetermined variable display.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature B0, the “symbol that does not constitute the stop symbol corresponding to the first result” displayed in the predetermined display area during the entire period of the variable display is one symbol of the plurality of symbol columns. It may be a symbol included in the column, or a plurality of symbols included in a part or all of the symbol column excluding one symbol column among the plurality of symbol columns.

<Feature C0>
A game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball fired from a launch device (a launch device 330) flows down,
A ball guiding nail portion (nails 411A and 411B) including a plurality of game nails erected in such a manner that game balls can be guided in a predetermined direction side in the game area;
A plate-shaped light-transmitting nail supporting member (a region J of the base 401) having a light-transmitting property that supports the base end side of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion and allows the front side to be seen from the rear side. When,
First passages (left first passage 1613A, right first passage 1613B) provided on the rear side of the light transmitting nail support member;
A passage component (a guide passage 1612) for guiding a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance (entrance 1611) among the game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage;
A detection unit (a left start winning switch 1441A, a right start winning switch 1441B) capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first path;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detection unit;
A second passage provided in a direction different from the first passage on an upstream side of the detection unit, wherein when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection unit Second passages (the left second passage 1614A, the right second passage 1614B) which are not performed;
An information display unit that displays predetermined privilege no grant information (non-start winning prize area information) that allows a player to recognize that the second passage is an area where the predetermined privilege is not provided when the game ball enters. An information display unit 753).
The information display unit is located behind the light-transmissive nail support member, does not overlap the plurality of gaming nails in a front view of the gaming machine, and a player's viewpoint is located in front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine provided at a position overlapping a back side of the plurality of gaming nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball that has entered a winning opening (for example, a starting opening) provided in a game area is detected by a detection sensor (winning switch), a configuration in which a bonus in the game is provided ( For example, when a winning start is generated and a jackpot lottery is performed, and when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a special game state is established so that a large number of game balls can enter the winning port). (See, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, for a guide path for guiding a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance to a starting port, it may be detected by a detection sensor that branches from the guide path and detects a winning in the starting port. By providing an undiverted path, even if a game ball enters the entrance, a part of the entry may not be a winning prize.

  However, as typified by the above-mentioned gaming machine, when another passage is provided so that a part of the game ball that has entered the guide passage from a predetermined entrance does not become a prize giving a predetermined privilege, There may be room for improvement in the configuration that allows the player to properly recognize the presence of the aisle.

  For example, when predetermined information is displayed so that a player can recognize the existence of an area where a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance is allowed to enter, such as the above-mentioned branch passage, which does not result in a start prize, when the start prize is determined by the information. While it is possible to inform the player of the presence of an area that does not require a game, there is also a possibility that the player may feel bored of the game when a game ball enters an area that does not receive a start winning.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C0, when a game ball is detected, a predetermined privilege is given. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a configuration in which another passage is provided to prevent a winning from being provided, and which can appropriately display the existence of the other passage. In other words, of the game balls flowing down the game area, game balls entering from a predetermined entrance are guided to the first passage by the passage component. When a game ball flowing down along the first passage is detected by the detection unit, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means.

  On the other hand, a second passage that branches in a direction different from the first passage is provided upstream of the detection unit, and a part of the game ball flowing down the first passage can pass through the second passage. When the game ball enters the second passage, the game ball is not detected by the detection unit. Therefore, when a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance flows down the first passage and is detected by the detection unit, the player can obtain a predetermined privilege, but from the first passage to the second passage. When entering, the player cannot obtain a predetermined privilege.

  Since the first passage is provided on the back side of the plate-shaped light-transmitting nail supporting member having a light-transmitting property capable of seeing from the front side to the rear side, the player visually recognizes a game ball flowing down the first passage. In addition, the entry of the game ball from the first passage to the second passage can be visually recognized.

  An information display unit is provided behind the light-transmitting nail support member. The information display unit displays predetermined privilege non-giving information that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not provided when a game ball enters. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized the predetermined privilege non-giving information recognizes that the second passage is an area where the predetermined privilege is not provided when the game ball enters.

  The information display unit is provided at a position overlapping with the back side of the plurality of gaming nails in a predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located on the front side of the gaming machine, so that the viewpoint is A player located on the front side of the gaming machine sees the information display section overlapping the back side of the plurality of gaming nails when looking in a predetermined oblique direction. Therefore, it is difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-giving information with a plurality of game nails, so that even when a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage. In addition, discouragement of the player for not giving the predetermined privilege can be appropriately suppressed.

  On the other hand, the light-transmissive nail support member is configured as a member that supports the base end side of a plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion. It is provided at a position that does not overlap the nail. Therefore, since the visibility of the information display unit from the front of the gaming machine is sufficiently ensured, the predetermined privilege non-giving information can be appropriately reported.

  The “predetermined privilege” described in the feature C0 is exemplified by occurrence of a start winning prize, lottery conditions, lottery probability, a special game state generated when a lottery is won, the number of game balls paid out, and the like.

  In addition, the “position that overlaps the back side of the plurality of gaming nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction” described in the feature C0 overlaps the tip side in the oblique direction with respect to the plurality of gaming nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction. It may be a position.

<Feature C1>
The gaming machine according to feature C0,
A first rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) which is disposed rearward of the light transmitting nail support member and has a portion (passage wall portion 1631A) overlapping the front side of the information display portion in a game machine front view. A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature C1, since the first rear side portion having a portion overlapping the front side of the information display portion in a front view of the gaming machine is provided behind the light-transmitting nail supporting member. In addition, the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-giving information overlapping the rear side of the first rear side portion when viewed from the front can be reduced. This makes it more difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-giving information, so that the discouragement of the player when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage. More preferably, it can be suppressed.

<Feature C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A portion (passage wall) that is disposed behind the light-transmissive nail support member and overlaps the front side of the information display section in the predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located in front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine comprising a second rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion 1631B).

  In the case of the gaming machine according to Feature C2, on the rear side of the light-transmitting nail support member, on the front side of the information display unit in a predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the second rear side portion having the overlapping portion is provided, the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-giving information overlapping the rear side of the second rear side portion when viewed from the front can be reduced. This makes it more difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-giving information, so that the discouragement of the player when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage. More preferably, it can be suppressed.

<Feature C3>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C0 to C2,
The predetermined privilege no grant information is configured from a predetermined character string indicating that the predetermined privilege is not provided in the area,
The predetermined character string is arranged along the arrangement of the plurality of gaming nails overlapping the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C3, the predetermined privilege non-giving information is constituted by a predetermined character string, and the predetermined character string is a predetermined oblique angle when the viewpoint of the player is located in front of the gaming machine. The game nails are arranged along an array of a plurality of game nails overlapping the front side of the information display section in the direction view. Therefore, since many areas of the character string constituting the predetermined privilege non-giving information are arranged so as to overlap with a plurality of game nails in the predetermined oblique direction, the player who is playing the game is provided with the predetermined privilege non-giving information. Is even harder to recognize. Therefore, discouragement of the player when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage can be more suitably suppressed.

<Feature D0>
A game board (base 401) having a game area on the front side in which a game ball can flow down and having an opening formed in the game area;
A decorative surface (base 701) provided behind the game board and located in the opening when viewed from the front of the game machine;
The three-dimensional torso in which a plurality of symbols are arranged is used as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging the plurality of the torso is displayed in a variable manner by rotating each torso. A variable display unit configured to be capable of being provided in the opening in the game board, wherein a part of the plurality of rotating bodies protrudes forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized. (Reel device 710),
The plurality of symbols are provided at positions overlapping with the front sides of the plurality of torso so that the symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in a front view of the gaming machine protrudes forward in a substantially arc shape. A display cover configured in a plate shape, wherein a predetermined image is formed by the light when the light is irradiated from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate-shaped plate surface continues. A display cover portion (resin cover 715) having a light guide portion (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying (picture 743);
A game board image display unit provided at least at a part of a periphery of the opening in the game board and provided on at least one side of the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, and a predetermined image together with the predetermined image; A game board image display unit (picture pattern 741) that constitutes a part of a decorative image (a school of fish pointing to the left) that is continuous on the direction side of
The decoration surface is provided between the light guide section and the game board image display section in the display cover section in a game machine front view, and the continuous decoration is provided together with the predetermined image and the game board image display section. A gaming machine comprising a decorative surface image display section (picture pattern 742) constituting a part of an image.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  In such a conventional pachinko machine, a pattern corresponding to a lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and various effect images are displayed to improve the interest of the game. There is also known a configuration in which a lottery result is displayed by printing a symbol on a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to rotate. However, in a gaming machine provided with a three-dimensional torso in which a plurality of symbols are arranged so as to orbit, it may be difficult to provide a display area for effect in a wide range.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature D0, even if the gaming machine has a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols orbits are arranged, it is possible to suitably provide a wide-range effect display area. An installable gaming machine can be provided. That is, the variable display unit turns each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the torso as a single symbol row with a three-dimensional turned body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to rotate. Each of them is configured to be able to be changed and displayed by being moved. The variable display portion is provided in an opening formed in a game area of the game board, in which a part of a plurality of torso members protrude forward from the opening so that a plurality of symbols can be visually recognized.

  At a position overlapping a front side of a plurality of turning bodies so that a plurality of symbols can be visually recognized in a variable display portion, a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in a front-rear direction in a front view of the gaming machine projects in a substantially arc shape forward. A display cover portion configured in a plate shape is provided. The display cover section can emit a predetermined image by the light when the display cover section emits light from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate-shaped plate surface is continuous. Light guide part.

  A game board image display section is provided on at least a part of the periphery of the opening in the game board and on at least one side of a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide section of the display cover section. Since the game board image display unit constitutes a part of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction along with the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side is displayed in the light guide unit. Can be displayed beyond the display range. Thus, the effect of the decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction can be made more impressive than when the decorative image is displayed using only the light guide.

  However, when there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover section, the predetermined image displayed on the light guide section and the game board image display section cause a predetermined gap. There is a possibility that the effect of the decorative image continuous on the direction side may give an unnatural feeling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature D0, the decorative surface located in the opening of the gaming plate is provided on the rear side of the gaming plate in a front view of the gaming machine, and the decorative surface is viewed in a front view of the gaming machine. Between the light guide section and the game board image display section of the game board, there is provided a decorative surface image display section which is a part of a decorative image continuous in a predetermined direction.

  Thus, even when a structural separation occurs between the opening of the game board and the display cover section (light guide section), the predetermined image displayed on the light guide section and the game board image display section. Can be compensated for by the decorative surface image display unit. Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect by the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction displayed beyond the display range by the light guide unit as a suitable effect in which the unnaturalness due to the discontinuity is suppressed.

<Feature D1>
The gaming machine according to Feature D0,
A side wall surface (side wall portion 702) provided between the peripheral edge portion of the opening in the game board and the decoration surface and extending in a direction intersecting the game plate and the decoration surface;
The side wall surface is provided between the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, and together with the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, a part of the continuous decorative image. A gaming machine comprising a side wall surface image display section (a pattern connecting a pattern 741 and a pattern 742) to constitute.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature D1, a side wall surface extending in a direction intersecting the gaming plate and the decorative surface is provided between the peripheral edge of the opening in the gaming plate and the decorative surface. On the side wall surface, a side wall surface image display portion is provided between the decoration surface image display portion of the decoration surface and the image display portion of the game board. The side wall surface image display unit is configured to be a part of a decoration image that is continuous in a predetermined direction along with the decoration surface image display unit and the game board image display unit. Therefore, the discontinuity in the height direction due to the height difference between the game board and the decorative surface can be compensated for by the side wall surface image display unit. Thereby, the continuity of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side is improved, so that unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect by the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side can be more suitably suppressed.

<Feature D2>
The gaming machine according to feature D0 or feature D1,
The light guide unit may be configured to transfer a first image (pictures 743B, 743C), which is a part of one image constituting the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction, below a top portion located at the forefront in the display cover unit. In a predetermined region (regions R1 and R2) on the side so as to be displayed as a part of the predetermined image,
The decorative surface image display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the first image displayed on the light guide unit, and forms a second image together with the first image (patterns 742B and 742C). A gaming machine characterized by including:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature D2, the first image displayed on the light guide unit and the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display unit form a decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction. One image is formed. Thus, one image constituting the decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction can be arranged at the boundary between the light guide portion and the decorative surface, so that the continuity of the decorative image can be suitably increased.

  In particular, since the first image is displayed in a predetermined area below the forefront located on the display cover section, the first image is different from the second image displayed on the decorative image display section (decorative surface) ( Height in the front-rear direction) can be kept low. Therefore, since distortion of one image including the first image and the second image can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for the one image to be uncomfortable.

<Feature E0>
A game board (base 401) having a game area on the front side in which a game ball can flow down and having an opening formed in the game area;
A variable display unit (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol rows, and then stops and displays the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
A display cover portion (resin cover 715) provided to protrude forward from a position where the stop symbol is displayed;
A light-emitting operation unit (press operation device 261) which is arranged facing upward with respect to the display cover unit below the game machine front view and is operable by a player;
The operation unit is displayed in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) in which an input to the operation unit is valid or a notification period that is earlier than the operation valid period and reports the operation valid period. Light emission control means for emitting light (sub-control board 940);
A reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) which is provided in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion and is capable of reflecting light emitted from the operation portion so that a player can visually reflect the reflected light; And a gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening.

  In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a predetermined effect such as a change in display content on a display device or a corresponding sound output from a speaker is performed. Gaming machines are also known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329). Some gaming machines of this type are configured to emit light to the operation unit so as to notify a player of an operation time of the operation unit.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to notify a player of an operation time of the operation unit by emitting light of the operation unit. For example, since a player tends to gaze at a variable display performed on a display device, it is difficult to recognize an operation time of the operation unit notified by light emission of an operation unit provided below the display device. was there.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E0, in the configuration in which the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player by the light emission of the operation unit, the operation time of the operation unit is appropriately recognized by the player. Can be provided. That is, in the game board in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in a front view of the gaming machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs variation display of a plurality of symbol rows on the variation display section, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  A display cover portion is provided so as to protrude in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by a player is disposed upwardly below the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The operation unit is configured to emit light. The operation unit is controlled by the light emission control unit, and is synchronized with an operation valid period in which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period that is earlier than the operation valid period and reports the operation valid period. Light is emitted in a predetermined color.

  Here, in a predetermined region below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion that can reflect light emitted from the operation portion so that a player can visually reflect the reflected light is provided. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation unit as the light reflected by the reflection unit. Thereby, even in a situation where the player pays attention to the variable display section, it is difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation section by the light emission of the operation section, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

  Further, since the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase for the notification. Therefore, also in such a point, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit with an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost and control load. Also, the player can appropriately recognize the operation time of the operation unit.

<Feature E1>
The gaming machine according to Feature E0,
The variation display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged orbits is the one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. Each of the plurality of torso bodies is provided so as to protrude forward from the opening in the game board,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping with the front side of the plurality of torso so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a cross section on the front side. A gaming machine characterized by being formed in a plate shape protruding in a substantially arc shape.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature E1, the variable display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional torso arranged such that a plurality of symbols orbits is arranged as one symbol row, and a plurality of the torso including the torso are arranged. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is displayed on a screen of a display unit such as an LCD, the operation validity period can be notified by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. is there. However, in the gaming machine having the feature E1 in which the design is changed and displayed by the torso, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the torso due to its structure.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature E1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies intersects in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, in front of the variable display portion provided to protrude forward from the opening of the gaming board. A plate-shaped display cover portion is provided in which a section viewed from a predetermined direction side projects forward in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflection section in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover section, light emitted from the operation section can be visually recognized by the player as light reflected by the reflection section.

<Feature E2>
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein:
A predetermined display unit (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the game board and at a rear end side and a lower side of the predetermined area in the game machine front view is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature E2, the predetermined display portion provided in the opening of the gaming board is provided at a rear end side and a lower side of a predetermined area in the game machine front view. The region where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflection portion can be stopped at the limited region on the rear end side of the reflection portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflection unit from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflection unit. In addition, without increasing the size of the reflecting portion (that is, without increasing the forward projection of the display cover portion), a region where the light of the light emitting portion is reflected by the reflecting portion (an image is formed by the light of the light emitting portion). Region) can be secured largely in front of the reflecting portion.

<Feature F0>
A game board (base 401) having a game area on the front side in which a game ball can flow down and having an opening formed in the game area;
A variable display unit (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol rows, and then stops and displays the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
A display cover portion (resin cover 715) provided to protrude forward from a position where the stop symbol is displayed;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) which is arranged toward the upper side below the display cover unit at the lower side of the gaming machine front view and which can be operated by the player;
A light emitting unit (wave lamp 771) arranged on one side of the operation unit and capable of emitting light;
The light emitting unit is turned on in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) in which an input to the operation unit is valid or a notification period that is earlier than the operation valid period and notifies the operation valid period. Light emission control means for emitting light (sub-control board 940);
A reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) which is provided in a predetermined area below the foremost position in the display cover portion and which can reflect light emitted from the light emitting portion so that a player can visually reflect the reflected light; And a gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening.

  In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a predetermined effect such as a change in display content on a display device or a corresponding sound output from a speaker is performed. Gaming machines are also known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329). Some gaming machines of this type can notify a player of the operation time of the operation unit by configuring a light emitting unit provided around the operation unit to emit light.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to notify a player of an operation time of an operation unit by emitting light of a light emitting unit. For example, since the player tends to gaze at the variable display performed on the display device, the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit provided below the display device There is a problem that is difficult to recognize.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F0, the operation timing of the operation unit is notified to the player by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit. Can be provided so that the player can appropriately recognize the game. That is, in the game board in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in a front view of the gaming machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs variation display of a plurality of symbol rows on the variation display section, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  A display cover portion is provided so as to protrude in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by a player is disposed upwardly below the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A light emitting unit capable of emitting light is arranged on one side of the operation unit. The light emitting unit is controlled by the light emission control unit, and is synchronized with a valid operation period in which an input to the operation unit is valid or a notification period before the valid operation period and informing the valid operation period. Is emitted in the color of

  Here, in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion is provided that can reflect light emitted from the light emitting portion so that a player can visually reflect the reflected light. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting section as the reflected light from the reflecting section. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation unit by the light emission of the light-emitting unit even in a situation where the player pays attention to the variable display unit, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

  Further, since the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase for the notification. Therefore, also in such a point, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit with an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost and control load. Also, the player can appropriately recognize the operation time of the operation unit.

<Feature F1>
The gaming machine according to Feature F0,
The variation display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged orbits is the one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. Each of the plurality of torso bodies is provided so as to protrude forward from the opening in the game board,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping with the front side of the plurality of torso so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a cross section on the front side. A gaming machine characterized by being formed in a plate shape protruding in a substantially arc shape.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the variable display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional torso arranged in such a manner that a plurality of symbols orbits is arranged as one symbol row, and a plurality of the torso including the torso are arranged. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is displayed on a screen of a display unit such as an LCD, an operation timing can be notified by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. . However, in the gaming machine of the feature F1, in which the design is changed and displayed by the torso of the torso, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the torso due to its structure.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies intersects in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine in front of a variable display portion provided to protrude forward from an opening of the gaming board. A plate-shaped display cover portion is provided in which a section viewed from a predetermined direction side projects forward in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflection section in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover section, light emitted from the operation section can be visually recognized by the player as light reflected by the reflection section.

<Feature F2>
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
A second light-emitting portion (reel side lamp 717A) provided between the turning body and the turning body, and capable of emitting light;
The light emission control unit causes the second light emitting unit to emit light in the same color as the light emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the gaming machine described in the feature F2, a second light-emitting unit capable of emitting light is provided between the turning body and the turning body. The second light emitting unit emits light in the same color as the light emitting unit that emits light in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period by the light emission control unit. Therefore, the notification of the operation timing is provided not only by the reflected light from the reflecting unit, but also from the second light emitting unit provided on the variable display unit (more specifically, between the torso body), which is easily noticed by the player. Is performed by the direct light, so that it is possible to appropriately suppress the player from overlooking the notification of the operation timing.

<Feature F3>
The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2,
The torso body is configured to be able to display the symbols by light emission,
The gaming machine, wherein the reflector is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F3, since the reflecting portion is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side, it is possible to illuminate and display a symbol on the torso. The illuminated and displayed symbols can be visually recognized by the player via the reflector. Therefore, since the reflecting portion can be arranged in front of the symbol on the torso, it can be suppressed that the size of the display cover portion becomes too large.

<Feature F4>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3,
A predetermined display unit (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the game board and at a rear end side and a lower side of the predetermined area in the game machine front view is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature F4, the predetermined display portion provided in the opening of the game board is provided at a rear end side and a lower side of a predetermined area in a front view of the gaming machine. The region where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflection portion can be stopped at the limited region on the rear end side of the reflection portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflection unit from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflection unit. In addition, the area where the light of the light emitting section is reflected by the reflecting section (the area where the image of the light of the light emitting section is formed) without increasing the size of the reflecting section (that is, without increasing the projection forward of the display cover section). ) Can be largely secured on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Feature G0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710) capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol rows, and then stops and displays the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player;
When the operation unit is operated by the player, at least two symbol columns (left symbol column, left symbol column, A game machine comprising: display area control means (sub-control board 940) for reducing the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed by moving the position of the right symbol row.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  Such a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a display device (display unit), and on the display device, a variable display of symbols is started based on the lottery being performed, and a final stop display of the variable display is performed. A stop result according to the lottery result is displayed.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine, such as the gaming machine described above, in which the display of symbols on the display unit is changed. For example, when a symbol that is fluctuated is displayed in a large size, the large symbol can give a strong impression to the fluctuating display to the player. In some cases, it became too hard to see the variable display.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to appropriately change the appearance of the display unit as needed. In other words, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variable execution means performs variable display of a plurality of symbol columns on the variable display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means. . At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  An operation unit that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation unit is operated by the player, a part of the combination of the stopped symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of symbol columns is displayed. The positions of the at least two configurable symbol columns are moved by the display area control means, thereby reducing the display range in which the at least two symbol columns are displayed. As described above, the player can operate the operation unit as necessary to reduce the display area of the plurality of symbol rows, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

  Further, by moving the position of at least two symbol columns, the display range in which the at least two symbol columns are displayed is reduced, so that the appearance of the at least two symbol columns before and after the display range is reduced. There is no change in the size, and it is possible to suppress the difficulty in viewing these symbol rows due to the reduced display range. In particular, since the at least two symbol columns are symbol columns that can constitute a part of the combination of stopped symbols corresponding to the first result, the player responds to the first result with the at least two symbol columns. When a part of the combinations of the stop symbols to be displayed is displayed, the player can appropriately visually recognize the display.

  Note that “reducing the display range” described in the feature G0 may be to reduce either the up-down direction or the left-right direction of the display range, and to reduce both the up-down direction and the left-right direction of the display range. It may be made smaller.

<Feature G1>
The gaming machine according to Feature G0,
The variation display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged orbits is the one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. It is configured to be able to change display by rotating,
The gaming machine is
The first torso (left reel 711L, right reel 711R) corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can form a part of the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of torso First moving means (gears 782, 783, rack gears corresponding to the gears 782, 783) movable in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the machine;
A second moving means (gears 781 and 781 corresponding to a gear 781 and a gear 781) capable of moving a second rotating body (middle reel 711M) different from the first rotating body to the rear side in the game machine front view, among the plurality of rotating bodies. Rack gear), and
The display area control means, when the player operates the operation unit, moves the second body so as to be rearward from the first body by the second moving means, and then performs the first time A gaming machine wherein a display area of the plurality of symbol rows is reduced by moving a body by the first moving means.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the variable display unit is configured by arranging the three-dimensional torso arranged such that a plurality of symbols orbit as one symbol row, and arranging a plurality of the torso including the torso. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies.

  Among the plurality of torso, the first torso corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can constitute a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is provided by the first moving unit in the gaming machine front view. It is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction crossing the front-back direction. On the other hand, of the plurality of rotating bodies, a second rotating body different from the first rotating body is configured to be movable rearward in the game machine front view by the second moving means.

  When the operation unit is operated by the player, after the second body is moved by the second moving means to be behind the first body by the display area control means, the first body is moved to the second body. It is moved by one moving means. Thereby, the display area of the plurality of symbol rows can be reduced.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein:
The first torso is a torso located at least at both ends of the plurality of torso,
The gaming machine, wherein the first moving means is configured to be movable by substantially the same distance in a direction in which the second torso positioned at both ends of the plurality of torso are brought closer to each other.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature G2, when the operation unit is operated by the player, the second round bodies located at both ends of the plurality of round bodies are substantially respectively moved in directions approaching each other by the first moving unit. Moved the same distance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the center of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the player's line of sight when seeing the symbol change display due to the reduction of the display area of the plurality of symbol columns.

<Feature H0>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a front section. A light guide member having a plate-shaped (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide bending portion (bending portion 715B1) that protrudes in a curved manner, and is provided in a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) crossing the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) such that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) on at least the light guide bending portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least a front side of the light guide bending portion, and has a light transmissivity that allows the predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be viewed from the front side, and the light guide curve is provided. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) having a curved shape along the portion;
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
A first attachment portion (projection) that is used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, and that allows displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide bending portion. Part 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, protrusion 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
A second mounting portion (protrusion portion) that is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction as compared with the first mounting portion. 844A, through holes 861A and 842A, protrusion 844B, through holes 861B and 842B, protrusion 854A, through holes 862A and 852A, protrusion 854B, and through holes 862B and 852B). Machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion) instead of a flat light guide plate may cause a problem at the time of assembling into a unit or the like. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured in a shape as designed, it may not be possible to display a predetermined design with good light emission. On the other hand, if it is attempted to manufacture the light guide member including the curved portion with high tolerance while reducing the tolerance, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost as a gaming machine increases. In addition, when an excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, a positional shift between the light source and the light guide member occurs, and the light guide function may be impaired.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. In other words, at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side, a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved forward and protrudes. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is configured such that, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, a predetermined image can be emitted and displayed on at least the light guide bending portion by the light. Be composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end of the light guide member. For this reason, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes forward is disposed behind the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely largely separated before the predetermined structure. A predetermined image can be displayed without the need. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the height, posture, and the like of the player, the position where the predetermined image is displayed overlapping the front side of the predetermined structure may be greatly shifted. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition, at least on the front side of the light guide bending portion in the light guide member, a cover portion having a cover curved portion having a curved shape along the light guide bending portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property so that a predetermined image displayed on the light guide member can be visually recognized from the front side.

  Here, the first mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, is configured to allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction accompanying deformation of the light guide bending portion. Have been. Therefore, even if the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variation or the like, since the displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to the deformation is allowed by the first mounting portion, the predetermined Variations in the manufacturing of the light guide member along the continuous direction are greatly allowed, and the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, does not allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction as compared with the first mounting portion. It is configured. Thereby, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated at a suitable position with a small manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member is displayed with good appearance. Can be possible.

<Feature H1>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a front section. A light guide member having a plate-shaped (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide bending portion (bending portion 715B1) that protrudes in a curved manner, and is provided in a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) crossing the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) such that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) on at least the light guide bending portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least a front side of the light guide bending portion, and has a light transmissivity that allows the predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be viewed from the front side, and the light guide curve is provided. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) having a curved shape along the portion;
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
A part used when the light guide member and the cover part are integrated, and the predetermined allowable direction is set to have a larger allowable range of positioning than the cross direction intersecting the continuous direction. A first mounting portion (projection 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, projection 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B);
A second mounting portion, which is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, and has a smaller permissible range of positioning in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion. (Projections 844A, through holes 861A, 842A, projections 844B, through holes 861B, 842B, projections 854A, through holes 862A, 852A, projections 854B, through holes 862B, 852B). A gaming machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion) instead of a flat light guide plate may cause a problem at the time of assembling into a unit or the like. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured in a shape as designed, it may not be possible to display a predetermined design with good light emission. On the other hand, if it is attempted to manufacture the light guide member including the curved portion with high tolerance while reducing the tolerance, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost as a gaming machine increases. In addition, when an excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, a positional shift between the light source and the light guide member occurs, and the light guide function may be impaired.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. In other words, at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side, a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved forward and protrudes. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is configured such that, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, a predetermined image can be emitted and displayed on at least the light guide bending portion by the light. Be composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end of the light guide member. For this reason, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes forward is disposed behind the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely largely separated before the predetermined structure. A predetermined image can be displayed without the need. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the height, posture, and the like of the player, the position where the predetermined image is displayed overlapping the front side of the predetermined structure may be greatly shifted. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition, at least on the front side of the light guide bending portion in the light guide member, a cover portion having a cover curved portion having a curved shape along the light guide bending portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property so that a predetermined image displayed on the light guide member can be visually recognized from the front side.

  Here, the first mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, has an allowable range of positioning in a predetermined continuous direction more than a cross direction intersecting the continuous direction. Is set large. Therefore, even when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variation, the allowable range of positioning in the continuous direction along the predetermined continuous direction is set relatively large by the first mounting portion. Therefore, manufacturing variations of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction can be largely allowed, and the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, the allowable range of positioning in a predetermined continuous direction is set smaller than that of the first mounting portion. ing. Thereby, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated at a suitable position with a small manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member is displayed with good appearance. Can be possible.

<Feature H2>
The gaming machine according to feature H0 or feature H1,
The first mounting portion includes:
A first support portion (projection portions 892, 893) protruding from a rear surface of a flat portion of the cover portion continuous with the cover curved portion or a predetermined position on the front side of the light source unit;
A first hole portion provided in the light source unit or the cover portion so that the first support portion can be inserted therein, the first hole portion being formed so that the predetermined continuous direction is longer than an intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. A gaming machine comprising one hole (through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B).

  In the gaming machine described in the feature H2, the first mounting portion is a first support portion protrudingly provided at a predetermined position on a back side of a flat portion continuous with the cover curved portion of the cover portion or on a front side of the light source unit. Is provided in the light source unit or the cover. The first hole is formed to be longer in a predetermined continuous direction than in an intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. Accordingly, the allowable range of the positioning of the first mounting portion in the predetermined continuous direction can be larger than that in the cross direction, and the predetermined continuous direction (direction in which the plate surface is continuous) accompanying the deformation of the light guide bending portion. Can be configured to allow a displacement along.

<Feature H3>
The gaming machine according to Feature H2,
The second mounting portion includes:
The second hole portions provided at both ends in the cross direction of the light guide member, wherein the length of the predetermined continuous direction is shorter than the length of the first hole portion in the continuous direction. Formed second holes (through holes 861A and 861B, through holes 862A and 862B);
Second support portions (projections 844A, 844B, projections 854A, 854B) formed in the light source unit so as to be inserted into the second hole.
The length in the cross direction of the second holes (through holes 861B and 862B) provided on one side in the cross direction is equal to the length of the second holes (protrusions 844A) provided on the other side in the cross direction. , 854A), which are longer than the length in the cross direction.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature H3, the second mounting portion includes the second hole portions provided at both ends of the light guide member in the cross direction, and the light source inserted into the second hole portion. A second support provided on the unit. In each of the second holes provided at both ends in the cross direction, the length of the predetermined continuous direction is formed shorter than the length of the first hole in the predetermined continuous direction. Therefore, the allowable range of the positioning in the predetermined continuous direction can be set smaller in the second mounting portion than in the first mounting portion, and the predetermined mounting direction (direction in which the plate surface is continuous) can be set in comparison with the first mounting portion. Is not allowed.

  Further, of the second holes provided at both ends in the cross direction, the length in the cross direction of the second hole provided on one side in the cross direction is opposite to the other side in the cross direction. Since it is formed longer than the length of the second hole provided in the cross direction, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the installation position of the second hole provided respectively at both ends in the cross direction, it is not necessary. Manufacturing errors can be absorbed in the cross direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a manufacturing error of the position of the second hole from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source unit in the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the light guide member.

<Feature H4>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H0 to H3,
A bending holding portion (pressing member 811) capable of holding the light guide bending portion overlapping the rear side of the cover bending portion with the cover bending portion pressed down along the cover bending portion;
The light guide member is configured to be integrated with the cover portion by the first mounting portion after the light guide bending portion is held by the bending holding portion. Machine.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature H4, the light guide member is configured such that, before being integrated with the cover portion by the first attachment portion, the light guide bending portion stacked on the rear side of the cover bending portion is bent by the bending holding portion. It is held in a state where it is pressed against the cover curved portion along the cover curved portion. Therefore, when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed to a certain amount or more due to manufacturing variation or the like, in a state where the shape of the light guide bending portion is corrected to the shape of the cover bending portion by the bending holding portion, The light guide member and the cover can be integrated by the one mounting portion. Therefore, the shape of the light guide bending portion can be corrected within a certain range while greatly allowing manufacturing variations of the light guide member including the light guide bending portion, and a predetermined image using the light guiding member is attractive. It can be displayed well.

<Feature H5>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a front section. A light guide member having a plate-shaped (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide bending portion (bending portion 715B1) that protrudes in a curved manner, and is provided in a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) crossing the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) such that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) on at least the light guide bending portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to be overlapped with at least a front side of the light guide bending portion, and has a light transmissivity that allows the predetermined image displayed on the light guide member to be viewed from the front side, and the light guide curve is provided. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) having a curved shape along the portion;
A light source unit (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
When one of the light source unit and the cover portion is integrated with the other, a mounting portion (through holes 841A and 841B) that allows positioning in a predetermined range with respect to the other in the predetermined continuous direction. , 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover portion with the attachment portion.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, a light guide member having a curved plate-shaped portion (curved portion) instead of a flat light guide plate may cause a problem at the time of assembling into a unit or the like. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured in a shape as designed, it may not be possible to display a predetermined design with good light emission. On the other hand, if it is attempted to manufacture the light guide member including the curved portion with high tolerance while reducing the tolerance, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost as a gaming machine increases. In addition, when an excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, a positional shift between the light source and the light guide member occurs, and the light guide function may be impaired.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. In other words, at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side, a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved forward and protrudes. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member is configured such that, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, a predetermined image can be emitted and displayed on at least the light guide bending portion by the light. Be composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end of the light guide member. For this reason, when a predetermined structure including a shape that is curved and protrudes forward is disposed behind the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely largely separated before the predetermined structure. A predetermined image can be displayed without the need. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the height, posture, and the like of the player, the position where the predetermined image is displayed overlapping the front side of the predetermined structure may be greatly shifted. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition, at least on the front side of the light guide bending portion in the light guide member, a cover portion having a cover curved portion having a curved shape along the light guide bending portion is provided in an overlapping manner. The cover portion has a light-transmitting property so that a predetermined image displayed on the light guide member can be visually recognized from the front side.

  Here, since the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover portion, by integrating the light source unit with the light guide member in advance. The position of the light source with respect to the light guide member can be suitably adjusted.

  Further, when one of the light source unit and the cover portion is integrated with the other, the mounting portion is configured such that positioning in the direction along the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other is allowed within a predetermined range with respect to the other. I have. Therefore, even when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variations, etc., when the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit, the light guide member has a predetermined continuous direction. Since the manufacturing error of the light guide member is absorbed by the mounting portion, the manufacturing variation of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction is greatly allowed, and the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed.

<Feature J0>
A predetermined end side (e.g., a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) so that the light travels along the predetermined end direction ( A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) by light when light is incident from the end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5);
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
Light that is incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means travels as partially weak light, or is light guide that includes a predetermined direction (regions D1 and D2) in which the light does not travel. Means (recess Z);
The light guide means is configured to emit light more intensely than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one and the other around the light source along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. A gaming machine for guiding light from a light emitting means.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, a mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by a light guide plate (light guide member) is one in which light is uniformly illuminated according to the color of a light source such as an LED, and variations in a mode displayed by light guide tend to be poor. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, a light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by the light is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member.

  In addition, the light guided by the light guide means causes the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means to be partially weak light and travels, or to be a light guide including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel. For this reason, the light guide means makes the part that emits light more intense than the part extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one and the other around the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. Can be provided. This makes it possible to make the light guide member shine nonuniformly and randomly, thereby realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member.

  Note that the predetermined image in the feature J0 may include at least an image displayed by the light output by the plurality of light emitting units.

<Feature J1>
A predetermined end side (e.g., a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) so that the light travels along the predetermined end direction ( A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) by light when light is incident from the end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5);
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated in at least two directions (arrow F1, arrow F2, and arrow F3 directions) and travels through the light guide member, and the light in each of the separated directions is separated. A light guide means (recess Z) configured to form regions (regions D1 and D2) that shine weaker than the light or do not reach the light. .

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, a mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by a light guide plate (light guide member) is one in which light is uniformly illuminated according to the color of a light source such as an LED, and variations in a mode displayed by light guide tend to be poor. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, a light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by the light is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member.

  Further, the light guide unit separates the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting unit in at least two directions and travels through the light guide member, and shines weaker than the light between the separated lights in each direction. Alternatively, a region where the light does not reach can be formed. This makes it possible to make the light guide member shine nonuniformly and randomly, thereby realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member.

  Note that the predetermined image in the feature J1 may include at least an image displayed by the light output by the plurality of light emitting units.

<Feature J2>
The gaming machine according to Feature J0 or Feature J1,
The light guide unit includes two or more sides (sides Z1, Z2, Z3) formed on an end surface of the light guide member on the predetermined end side, and light from the light source among the two or more sides. And a top (left end C1, right end C2) formed by two adjacent sides having different angles with respect to the output direction of the game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Feature J1, the light guide unit is formed by at least two or more sides formed on an end surface on a predetermined end side of the light guide member and a light source among the two or more sides. Since it is a concave portion having an apex formed by two adjacent sides having different angles with respect to the light output direction, the light guide member can be formed by processing the shape of the end of the light guide member without attaching a dedicated component. The lighting can be randomized.

<Feature K0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710) capable of variable display of a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit variably displays the plurality of symbol rows, and then stops and displays the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, a game which is more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a state,
Symbol width change control means (sub-control board 940) for changing the width of the symbol in a predetermined direction intersecting with the symbol change direction in which the symbol change is performed during the symbol change display by the change executing means. And a gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  Such a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a display device (display unit), and on the display device, a variable display of symbols is started based on the lottery being performed, and a final stop display of the variable display is performed. A stop result according to the lottery result is displayed.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine such as the gaming machine described above, in which the display of symbols on the display unit is changed. For example, when a symbol that is fluctuated is displayed in a large size, the large symbol can give a strong impression to the fluctuating display to the player. In some cases, it became too hard to see the variable display.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature K0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from feeling difficult to see the variable display. In other words, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variable execution means performs variable display of a plurality of symbol columns on the variable display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means. . At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols indicating the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  During the variable display of the symbol by the variable performing means, the symbol width change control means changes the width of the symbol in a predetermined direction intersecting the variable direction of the symbol on which the variable display is performed to be small. This makes it possible to reduce the area in which the variable display is performed. By reducing the area in which the variable display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

<Feature K1>
The gaming machine according to Feature K0,
Holding means (main control board 920) for holding execution of the symbol change display by the change execution means with a predetermined upper limit as a limit;
In the state where the symbol is being displayed by the variation execution unit and the execution of the variation display is not suspended by the suspending unit after the variation display, after the high-speed variation in the variation display, the variation display is performed. And a symbol width restoration control means (sub-control board 940) for largely changing the width of the symbol, which has been reduced by the symbol width change control means, before stopping.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature K1, in a situation where the symbol display is being displayed by the variable execution unit and the execution of the variable display is not suspended by the holding unit after the variable display, the high-speed display in the variable display is performed. After the fluctuation and before the fluctuation display is stopped, the width of the symbol that has been changed to a small value by the symbol width change control unit is changed by the symbol width restoration control unit.

  As a result, while the execution of the variable display is suspended, the width of the symbol that has been changed to a small value by the symbol width change control unit can be maintained. Therefore, while the variable display of the held symbols is continuously performed, it is possible to maintain the area in which the variable display is performed in an easy-to-see state.

<Feature K2>
The gaming machine according to feature K0 or feature K1,
When the width of the symbol is changed to be small by the symbol width change control unit during the change display of the symbol by the change execution unit, the width of the plurality of symbol rows in the arrangement direction is reduced after the change, Symbol display area control means for changing a display position of a symbol constituting at least one symbol row of the plurality of symbol rows along the arrangement direction to thereby reduce a display range in which the symbol rows are displayed. (A sub-control board 940).

  In the gaming machine according to the feature K2, when the width of the symbol is changed to be small by the symbol width change control unit during the symbol change display by the change execution unit, the display area control unit after the change, The display positions of the symbols constituting at least one of the plurality of symbol rows are moved along the row direction so that the total width of the plurality of symbol rows in the row direction is reduced, whereby the plurality of symbols are arranged. The display range in which columns are displayed is changed to be smaller. Therefore, not only by changing the width of the symbol but also by moving the display position of the symbol, it is possible to make the area where the variable display is performed smaller than by reducing the width of the symbol.

<Feature K3>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K0 to K2,
The variation display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged orbits is the one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. It is configured to be able to change display by rotating,
At least a part of the plurality of turning bodies constituting the plurality of symbol rows has an expanding / contracting mechanism (first reel) capable of expanding and contracting in the predetermined direction that intersects the turning direction of the turning body. (A solenoid 1701, a second reel body 1702) and an actuating means (a drive solenoid provided in the rotating body and acting on a peripheral side of a side surface substantially perpendicular to a rotation axis of the rotating body to expand and contract the expansion mechanism) 1711), and
The symbol width change control means activates the operating means of the rotating body during the acceleration period from when the variation display of the plurality of symbol rows by the variation executing means reaches a high-speed variation to when the variation is displayed, and the expansion and contraction is performed. A gaming machine wherein the width of the symbol is reduced by contracting the mechanism.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature K3, the variable display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional torso arranged such that a plurality of symbols orbits is arranged as one symbol row, and a plurality of the torso including the torso are arranged. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies.

  At least a part of the plurality of rotating bodies constituting the plurality of symbol rows has at least a part of the rotating body capable of expanding and contracting in a predetermined direction intersecting with the rotation direction of the rotating body by an expansion and contraction mechanism. Is extended and contracted by the actuation means provided in the rotating body acting on the peripheral side on the side surface substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotating body.

  During the acceleration period from when the variation display of the plurality of symbol rows by the variation executing means reaches the high-speed variation to when the variation stops, the symbol width change control means activates the operating means of the turning body constituting the symbol row. The width of the symbol is changed to be small by contracting the expansion and contraction mechanism.

  Therefore, even when the symbol row is a three-dimensional torso, it is possible to reduce the area in which the variable display is performed, and to reduce the area in which the variable display is performed, so that the variable display is provided to the player. It is possible to suppress the appearance of being hard to see.

  Further, the operation of the operating means is performed during the acceleration period from the time when the fluctuation display of the plurality of symbol rows reaches the high-speed fluctuation to the time when the fluctuation is stopped, so that the operating means operates on the side surface substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotating body. The force acting on the peripheral edge is easily applied evenly, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the contraction of the expansion and contraction mechanism that expands and contracts in a predetermined direction.

<Feature L0>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a front section. A light guide member having a plate-shaped (or formed to have a substantially constant thickness) light guide bending portion (bending portion 715B1) that protrudes in a curved manner, and is provided in a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) crossing the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) such that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided. A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) on at least the light guide bending portion by the light;
Light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
In a state where the output of the light incident on the predetermined end portion side from the light emitting means is kept substantially constant, the light emission display of the light guide bending portion by the light incident from the light emitting means may be changed. A gaming machine comprising: a possible changing means (a driving solenoid 1731).

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, a mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by a light guide plate (light guide member) is one in which light is uniformly emitted by light incident from a light source such as an LED, and variations in the mode displayed by light guide tend to be poor. There was a problem that.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature L0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of an image display mode by the light guide member. In other words, at a position overlapping the front side of the structural portion so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side, a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved forward and protrudes. A light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction, at least a predetermined image is formed by the light at the light guide bending portion. Is configured to be capable of emitting light. Light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end of the light guide member.

  As described above, since the predetermined image can be displayed on the light guide bending portion, when a predetermined structure including a shape that curves forward and protrudes is disposed on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the predetermined image is displayed. A predetermined image can be displayed without a large distance as a whole before the structure. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the height, posture, and the like of the player, the position where the predetermined image is displayed overlapping the front side of the predetermined structure may be greatly shifted. Instead, a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  Also, the light emission display of the light guide bending portion by the light incident from the light emitting means, the output of the light incident on the predetermined end portion side of the light guide member from the light emitting means was kept substantially constant by the changing means. It is configured to be changeable depending on the state. Therefore, it is difficult to make the light emission display of the light guide bending portion uniform, and it is possible to realize diversification of the display mode of the image by the light guide member.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature L0, the change in the light emission display of the light guide bending portion by the changing means is, for example, a change in the light emission of the predetermined image displayed by light emission in the light guide bending portion. Alternatively, the change may be a change in the position where the image shines, or a change in the color of the image displayed by light emission.

<Feature L1>
The gaming machine according to Feature L0,
The changing means changes the curvature of the light guide bending portion in a state where the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the predetermined end of the light guide member is kept substantially constant, whereby the light emitting means is changed. A game machine capable of changing a light-emitting display of the light guide bending portion by light incident from the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature L1, the light-emitting display of the light guide bending portion by the light incident from the light-emitting means is changed by the changing means so that the positional relationship between the light-emitting means and a predetermined end of the light-guiding member is substantially constant. In this state, the light guide member can be changed by changing the curvature of the light guide bending portion. Therefore, it is possible to change the light emission display of the light guide bending portion using the installed light guide member as it is.

<Feature M0>
A predetermined end side (e.g., a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) so that the light travels along the predetermined end direction ( A first light guide member (light guide plate) having a first light guide unit capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined first image (picture 1761) by light when light is incident from the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751. 1751)
First light emitting means (light emitting means provided above and below the light guide plate 1751) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the first light guide member;
A second light-guiding member provided on the front side or the rear side of the first light-guiding member, wherein the second light-guiding member intersects in a thickness direction in a predetermined continuous direction (or in a predetermined continuous direction in which a plate surface is continuous, When light is incident from a predetermined end side (an upper end surface or a lower end surface of the light guide plate 1771) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided, a predetermined second image is generated by the light. A second light guide member (light guide plate 1771) having a second light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying (picture 1781) superimposed on the first light guide portion, and
Second light emitting means (light emitting means provided above and below the light guide plate 1771) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the second light guide member;
At least one of the first light guide member or the second light guide member is moved to the first light guide member so that one of the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion moves relative to the other. A game machine comprising: moving means (light guide plate support portion 1772, gear 1773) for moving in a direction intersecting with an overlapping direction of a light member and the second light guide member.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine in which the effects are diversified by providing a light guide plate for emitting and displaying a predetermined design by emitting light from an end face in a game area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, in a predetermined design in which light is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member), since the display position on the light guide plate is fixed, the variation in the mode of display by light guide tends to be poor. There was a point.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature M0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction, a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined first image by the light is provided. A first light guide member is provided. First light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end of the first light guide member.

  On the front side or the rear side of the first light guide member, when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction crossing the thickness direction, a predetermined first light A second light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying two images is provided. Second light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end of the second light guide member.

  At least one of the first light guide member and the second light guide member is moved by the moving means in a direction intersecting the overlapping direction of the first light guide member and the second light guide member, and One of the first light guide and the second light guide can be moved relative to the other. Since one of the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion is relatively movable with respect to the other, the first light guide member and the second light guide member are fixed (that is, one is relative to the other). Display mode based on a combination of the first image and the second image that can be visually recognized by the player from the front of the first light guide member and the second light guide member, as compared to the case where Variations can be increased. Therefore, diversification of the display mode of the image by the light guide member can be realized.

<Feature N0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variable display of identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that, when the start condition is satisfied, variably displays the identification information on the variation display unit and then stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit; ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result, and generates a special game state which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for
If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Holding means (main control board 920) for storing the change display corresponding to the information by the change execution means,
A suspension display unit (suspension number display area 1810) capable of displaying a suspension display (suspension icon 1812) corresponding to the number of pieces of the information for which the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspension unit, in accordance with the number of the information. When,
When the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means and the new start condition is satisfied, the execution of the variable display is already performed as the suspended display corresponding to the establishment of the new start condition. The first hold display that has been held differs from the first hold display according to a time interval from when the start condition for the first hold display is satisfied to when the new start condition is satisfied. A gaming machine comprising: a hold display control means (sub-control board 940) capable of displaying a second hold display in a display mode on the hold display section.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area, a starting condition is established, a lottery is performed, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that such a conventional gaming machine still has room for improvement. For example, for a pachinko machine during a game, the degree of ease of establishment of the start condition is determined based on the game played over a certain period of time, based on the number of times the start condition is satisfied with respect to the number of game balls fired. And the like, but it may be difficult to grasp the degree of easiness of establishing the short-term starting condition at a certain time. In the case where the firing force of a game ball is adjusted, for example, it is preferable that the short-term starting condition be easily established.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature N0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the degree of easiness of establishing a short-term start condition at a certain time. In other words, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the variation display unit by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means. The suspension display corresponding to the number of pieces of information for which the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspension means is displayed on the suspension display unit in accordance with the number of pieces of information.

  When a new start condition is satisfied in a state where the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, the suspension display control means sets the fluctuation display as a suspended display corresponding to the establishment of the new start condition. The first hold display in which the execution of the display has been held, and the first hold display according to a time interval from when a start condition for the first hold display is satisfied to when the new start condition is satisfied. A second hold display having a display mode different from that of the second display is displayed on the hold display section.

  Therefore, the player recognizes the time interval from when the start condition for the first hold display is satisfied to when the start condition corresponding to the second hold display is satisfied from the display mode of the second hold display. Can be. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the degree of the easiness of the start condition being established, and for example, can grasp the degree of the easiness of the short-term start condition being established at a certain time.

<Feature N1>
The gaming machine according to Feature N0,
In a case where the execution of at least one variation display is suspended by the suspension unit, when the new start condition is satisfied, the identification executed by the variation execution unit in response to the establishment of the new start condition. A variable time setting means for setting a variable time of the variable display of information in accordance with a time interval from when the start condition for the first hold display is satisfied to when the new start condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being.

<Feature N2>
The gaming machine according to Feature N0,
The fluctuating time is changed by the holding means so that the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display of the identification information varies according to a time interval from when the starting condition is satisfied to when the new starting condition is satisfied. A variable time setting means for setting a value according to the number of pieces of the information held.

  In the gaming machines described in the features N1 and N2, when a new starting condition is satisfied in a state where execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the retaining unit, the new starting is performed by the variable time setting unit. If the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation display of the identification information executed by the fluctuation execution means in response to the establishment of the condition is different depending on the time interval from when one start condition is satisfied to when a new start condition is satisfied. The change time of the change display of the identification information can be set according to the interval at which the start condition is satisfied.

<Feature P0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variable display of identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that, when the start condition is satisfied, variably displays the identification information on the variation display unit and then stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit; ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result, and generates a special game state which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for
If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Holding means (main control board 920) for storing the change display corresponding to the information by the change execution means,
A suspension display unit (suspension number display area 1810) capable of displaying a suspension display (suspension icon 1812) corresponding to the number of pieces of the information for which the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspension unit, in accordance with the number of the information. When,
In a situation where the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspension means, a predetermined display (suspend scheduled icon 1811) corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition scheduled thereafter is displayed on the suspension display unit. A holding display control means (sub-control board 940).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area, a starting condition is established, a lottery is performed, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that such a conventional gaming machine still has room for improvement. For example, a player may not be able to recognize whether or not a lottery is performed when a start condition is satisfied or a lottery is not performed when a start condition is satisfied, for a pachinko machine being played. is there.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature P0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to appropriately recognize whether or not a lottery is performed in response to establishment of a start condition. In other words, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the variation display unit by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means. The suspension display corresponding to the number of pieces of information for which the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspension means is displayed on the suspension display unit in accordance with the number of pieces of information.

  In a situation in which the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspension unit, a predetermined display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition scheduled thereafter is displayed on the suspension display unit by the suspension display control unit. . Therefore, the player can recognize in advance the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition, so that the progress of the game can be easily recognized.

<Feature P1>
In the gaming machine described in the feature P0, the hold display control means changes a display mode of the predetermined display in accordance with an elapsed time since the start condition was last satisfied, and the next start condition is A gaming machine displaying the hold display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the predetermined display when newly established.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature P1, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed by the hold display control means according to the elapsed time since the last start condition was satisfied, and the next start condition is newly set. Is established, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition is determined.

  Therefore, the display mode of the predetermined display that changes according to the elapsed time since the last start condition was satisfied is a hold display corresponding to the next start condition being satisfied when the next start condition is newly satisfied. Is determined as the display mode, the player can recognize from the determined hold display mode the elapsed time required since the last start condition was satisfied until the start condition was newly satisfied. Thereby, the player can grasp the degree of easiness of establishing the short-term starting condition at a certain time. Therefore, when the position of the firing operation is adjusted, it is possible to easily grasp whether the short-term start condition is satisfied.

  In particular, since the display mode of the hold display changes according to the elapsed time since the last time the start condition was satisfied, the player can determine the state of change in the display mode from the last time the start condition was satisfied. The elapsed time can be grasped sensuously.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature P1, "when the next start condition is newly established, the display mode of the predetermined display is determined as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to establishment of the next start condition. `` Does '' means that the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition does not necessarily need to be determined by taking over all of the display modes of the predetermined display. Any configuration may be used as long as part or all of the part changed in accordance with the elapsed time since the start condition was finally established is determined.

<Feature Q0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variable display of identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that, when the start condition is satisfied, variably displays the identification information on the variation display unit and then stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit; ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result, and generates a special game state which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for
During a predetermined game period, if a new start condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the start condition was satisfied, a predetermined display (table state icon 1821) is displayed. A display control means (sub-control board 940) for updating the display content of a predetermined display section (table status icon display area 1820).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a starting port provided in a game area, a starting condition is established, a lottery is performed, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that such a conventional gaming machine still has room for improvement. For example, a player can intuitively grasp the degree of ease of establishment of a start condition for a predetermined pachinko machine based on a game played for a certain period, but if the start condition is difficult to be established. If it is felt, it is difficult to determine whether it is due to accident or a malfunction of the platform.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature Q0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily determine the state of the gaming machine. In other words, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the variation display unit by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  During a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, if a new start condition is not satisfied, a predetermined display is displayed on the predetermined display unit. The display content is updated by the display control means.

  Therefore, as the display content of the predetermined display unit is updated, there is a high possibility that there is some problem that makes it difficult to satisfy the starting condition, so the player should check the display content of the predetermined display unit. Thus, the state of the gaming machine can be determined.

  In addition, since the display content of the predetermined display unit is updated based on the interval at which the start condition is satisfied during the predetermined game period, an event in which the interval at which the start condition is satisfied becomes longer because a game is not performed is excluded. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the display content of the predetermined display unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature Q0, "during the predetermined game period" may be during a period in which a player is playing a game or during a period in which a game ball is being fired. May be during a period in which the condition for firing is satisfied, may be during a predetermined game state (for example, during a normal game state), or may be during a period in which identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It may be during a period in which a plurality of conditions including the set condition or another condition are satisfied.

<Feature Q1>
The gaming machine according to feature Q0,
The display control means gradually changes the display content of a predetermined display section (table state icon display area 1820) on which the predetermined display (table state icon 1821) is displayed in a predetermined direction (direction in which the table state icon 1821 decreases). A gaming machine characterized by being updated to:

  It should be noted that the display control means may update to a plurality of types of modes according to the number of times that the new start condition has not been satisfied even after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the start condition was satisfied.

<Feature Q2>
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein
The display control means,
During a predetermined game period, if the new start condition is satisfied for a predetermined number of times before the predetermined second period shorter than the first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, A gaming machine, wherein the display content of the predetermined display unit is returned by a predetermined number of steps in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (a direction in which the platform state icons 1821 increase).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature Q2, during a predetermined game period, it is determined that a new start condition is satisfied before a predetermined second period shorter than the first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied. In this case, the display content of the predetermined display unit on which the predetermined display is displayed is returned by the display control means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by a predetermined step.

  If the new start condition is satisfied for a predetermined number of times before the second period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, there is a low possibility that there is a problem that makes it difficult to satisfy the start condition. By returning the display content of the predetermined display unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by a predetermined step, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately reflected on the display content of the predetermined display unit.

<Feature R0>
Determining means (part of the process of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determination information display means (special symbol display devices 471, 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When the determination means determines that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a specific game state (a special game state, a probable change game state, and a time reduction game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is generated. Specific game state control means (each processing for controlling the special game state, the probable change game state, and the time saving game state of the main control board 920);
A display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling a display means for displaying a result corresponding to whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied,
The specific game state control means,
As the specific game state,
A special game state in which a variable winning section to which a predetermined game value is given when a game ball enters is controlled to a predetermined approach allowable posture,
A first game state (probable change game state) in which the start condition is more easily established than the normal game state and the specific game start condition is established with a higher probability than the normal game state;
At least a second gaming state (a time-saving gaming state) in which the starting condition is more easily established than in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming start condition is established with a lower probability than the first gaming state. ,
When it is determined by the determination means that the first specific game start condition (big hit 1) is satisfied, the special game state and the first game state are generated, and the first game state is set to the next state. , Perform control that continues at least until the specific game start condition is satisfied,
In the first game state, when the determination unit determines that the second specific game start condition (big hit 2) is satisfied, the special game state and the second game state are generated, and the second game state is generated. (2) In the game state, the unit game (one game from the start of the variable display to the result display) based on the establishment of the start condition is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) or the unit game of the predetermined number of times During execution, at least continue until the specific game start condition is satisfied, and perform control to shift to a normal game state when the unit game has been executed the predetermined number of times in the second game state,
The display control means,
Display contents displayed when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state and when the second specific game start condition is not satisfied in the first game state (battle standby) After the unit game has been executed a predetermined number of times or more (80 times) in the second game state shifted by the establishment of the second specific game start condition. Means for displaying a predetermined effect display (effect display of battle defeat) corresponding to establishment of the second specific game start condition when the specific game start condition is not satisfied in a unit game of a predetermined number or more. A gaming machine comprising:

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port provided in the game area and a winning is started, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, a configuration is known in which after a special game state, a transition is made to a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a probability-change game state or a time-saving game state, and then the game is returned to the normal game state.

  Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed. Then, during the fluctuation display of the symbol, there is known an effect display of various character designs and the like, which suggests a degree of expectation to be a big hit according to the type of the displayed character symbol to the player. (See, for example, JP-A-2009-153699).

  However, if the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state or the probability of continuing the advantageous gaming state is set to be high, the shooting ability becomes high. Therefore, it is sometimes desirable to set the probability to be low. On the other hand, if the transition probability and the continuation probability to the advantageous game state are set low and the probability of the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is set high, the effect display that indicates the transition to the normal game state is correspondingly made. There is a possibility that the frequency of execution will increase, and the user will lose his or her willingness to continue the game by visually recognizing the effect display, and move to a gaming machine with high shootability. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform a suitable effect display for the player while keeping the transition probability to the advantageous game state and the continuation probability of the advantageous game state low.

  According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic R0, when the first specific game start condition is satisfied, the special game state and the first game state are generated as the specific game state, and the second specification is performed in the first game state. When the game start condition is satisfied, a special game state and a second game state occur. The second game state is at least continued until the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times based on the establishment of the start condition, or until the specific game start condition is satisfied during execution of the predetermined number of unit games.

  Then, when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the display content displayed when the second specific game start condition is not satisfied in the first game state is continuously displayed. Is done. For this reason, even if the player visually recognizes the display content of the display means, the player cannot recognize that the state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state, and after the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times or more, By visually recognizing the predetermined effect display, when the second specific game start condition is satisfied and the predetermined number of unit games are completed, it is possible to recognize with a delay that the game will return to the normal game state.

  On the other hand, if the specific game start condition is satisfied before the predetermined effect display is displayed even after shifting to the second game state, another game state such as the first game state is passed through the special game state. Or the second game state is started again. In this case, the predetermined effect display at the scheduled timing is not displayed. Therefore, for the player, by visually recognizing the predetermined effect display, the second specific game start condition is satisfied, and the situation in which the possibility of returning to the normal game state is increased is recognized by the display content. Opportunities can be reduced. Therefore, the probability that the predetermined effect display is visually recognized can be suppressed lower than the probability that the second specific game start condition that returns to the normal game state is satisfied among the satisfaction of the specific game start condition. The probability that the second specific game start condition is satisfied is set low, so that it is possible to easily give an impression that the gaming machine has a high probability that the specific game state continues. Thus, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of executing an effect display suitable for a player can be provided while suppressing a transition probability to an advantageous gaming state and a continuation probability of an advantageous gaming state.

  It should be noted that the display control means continuously displays the displayed content, which means that the display mode of the character is displayed when the character is displayed, and the second specific game start condition is set in the first game state. It is sufficient that the unit game in the case of being established and the unit game executed before the unit game are identical to such an extent that they can be visually recognized that no change has occurred from the player, and they do not always completely match. Not only the case but also a different case. In addition, the display content that is continuously displayed is not limited to the case where the character is displayed, and the display in which the variable display is executed and the substantially same result display is performed in substantially the same variable time as the symbol variable display. It may be content.

  Further, the probability of displaying the predetermined effect display by the means for displaying the predetermined effect display of the display control means is a unit equal to or more than a predetermined number of times in the second game state shifted by the establishment of the second specific game start condition. After the game is executed, if the specific game start condition is not satisfied in the unit game of the predetermined number or more, a probability of 100%, that is, a predetermined effect display is always displayed. The predetermined effect display may be displayed with a high probability exceeding at least 50%, and it is preferable that the predetermined effect display is displayed with a high probability exceeding 70%. It is preferable that the setting is such that a predetermined effect display is displayed.

<Feature R1>
The gaming machine according to Feature R0, wherein the display control unit includes:
Unless the specific game start condition is satisfied until the last or the last unit game of the predetermined number of times in the predetermined number of times in the second game state is executed, in the last or predetermined unit game, the predetermined A first effect display in which the first effect display corresponding to the establishment of the second specific game start condition, which is an effect display in which the character moves, is displayed on the display means. Control means;
If the first specific game start condition is satisfied before the last or the last unit game of the predetermined number of times in the second game state is executed, the first specific game is started. In the unit game in which the start condition is satisfied, a second effect control in which the display unit displays a second effect display corresponding to the satisfaction of the first specific game start condition, which is an effect display in which the predetermined character moves. Means,
In the unit game in which the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the effect display for operating the predetermined character is not displayed on the display means, and the predetermined display displayed in the first game state is not performed. And a predetermined display continuation means for continuously displaying the display content of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature R1, the player can know which specific game start condition has been established by the effect of operating the same character. It can be easily known by the common effect contents. In addition, even if the second specific game start condition is satisfied, if the first specific game start condition is satisfied within a certain period thereafter, the second effect display is executed, and a transition is made to a normal game state. It is not necessary to visually recognize the first effect display corresponding to the establishment of the second specific game start condition, and it is not necessary to recognize the establishment of the second specific game start condition. Therefore, it is easy to give an impression that the first gaming state has been continued, and it is possible to know the situation where the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or the transition to the normal gaming state is approaching. Opportunities can be suppressed.

<Feature R2>
The gaming machine according to feature R0 or R1,
The display unit includes a display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information,
The display control means may repeatedly display a short-time fluctuation display (a fluctuation display of 5 seconds or less or a fluctuation display of 2 seconds or less) as the predetermined display content every time the unit game is executed. A gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature R2, even if the player visually recognizes the contents of the variable display, it is not necessary to visually recognize that the state has shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. It is possible to further easily give an impression that the gaming state is continuing.

<Feature R3>
The gaming machine according to feature R2,
The display control means executes, as the short-time fluctuation display, a specific fluctuation display when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state before and after the fluctuation display. A gaming machine characterized in that a display is performed in a shorter time than a fluctuation time of a normal fluctuation display when the specific game start condition is not satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature R3, the specific variable display when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first gaming state is a variable display executed before and after the variable display. It is displayed in a shorter time than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display when the specific game start condition is not satisfied. Therefore, even if a special game state that ends in a short time is set as the special game state during the time difference of the fluctuation time, it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the special game state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the variable display of the unit game in which the second specific game start condition is satisfied and the special game state generated by the unit game, and whether the first game state is continued. Can be more easily imparted.

<Feature R4>
The gaming machine according to feature R3,
When the second specific game start condition is satisfied, the specific game state control means is in a special game state different from the case where the first specific game start condition is satisfied, and the specific change display And a short-duration special game state that ends in substantially the same time as the time difference between the normal fluctuation display and the normal fluctuation display.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature R4, it is more difficult for the player to recognize the establishment of the second specific game start condition, and it is easier to give an impression that the first gaming state is continuing. be able to.

<Feature S0>
Determining means (part of the process of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determination information display means (special symbol display devices 471, 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When the determination means determines that the specific game start condition is satisfied, a specific game state (a special game state, a probable change game state, and a time reduction game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is generated. Specific game state control means (each processing for controlling the special game state, the probable change game state, and the time saving game state of the main control board 920);
A display control means for controlling display contents including a display means for displaying a result corresponding to whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied,
The specific game state control means (sub-control board 940)
If the determination means determines that the specific game start condition (small hit 2) of the number of times has been satisfied, the unit game (fluctuation) based on the establishment of the start condition is regarded as a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. One game from the start of the display to the display of the result) is executed a predetermined number of times, or the number-limited game state at least continuing until the specific game start condition is satisfied during the execution of the predetermined number of unit games. Control to generate,
The display control means,
If the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the last or the last (80 times) unit game of the predetermined number of times in the predetermined number of times gaming state, an effect in which a predetermined character operates A first control for displaying, on the display means, a first effect display (battle defeat) corresponding to the establishment of the specific game start condition of the number-of-times restriction that is to be shifted to the number-of-times-limited gaming state. Effect control means,
An effect display in which a predetermined character operates when the specific game start condition is satisfied before the last or the last unit game of the predetermined number of times in the predetermined number of times in the number-limited game state is executed. Second effect control means for controlling the display means to display a second effect display (battle victory) corresponding to establishment of the specific game start condition,
A period effect control means for performing a period display (display of an invincible time and an invincible period) indicating a predetermined determined effect period when the number of executions of the unit game remains in a certain number or more in the number-limited game state; A gaming machine characterized in that during the fixed effect period, only when the specific game start condition is satisfied, the second effect display is displayed and an effect display in which the predetermined character operates is executed.

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting port provided in the game area and a winning is started, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. In addition, a configuration is known in which after a special game state, a transition is made to a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a probability-change game state or a time-saving game state, and then the game is returned to the normal game state.

  Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed. In addition, display conditions (so-called missions) such as an instruction to display a predetermined effect display are displayed during the fluctuation display. For example, a display of “Let's reach with the symbol (7)” is displayed on the display screen. When an effect display that satisfies the instruction is displayed on the display screen with a variable display performed during the display period, there is also an effect that determines that a big hit will be determined thereafter (for example, JP-A-2008-136553). Gazette).

  However, as for the control of the effect display in which the display condition is set, the effect display is controlled so as not to be displayed on the display screen unless a predetermined lottery is won. For this reason, even if the player is interested in the content of the effect, it may not be possible to confirm the content. In this case, you may be worried about the contents of the production, or you may feel uneasy that you overlooked the big hit because the production was displayed. is there.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature S0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing the effect display control for displaying the display conditions. In other words, in the number-limited game state, if the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the last or a predetermined unit game of the predetermined number of times is executed, the predetermined character is operated. Since the effect display in which the predetermined character for displaying the first effect display corresponding to the non-establishment of the specific game start condition is displayed on the display means is executed after a fixed effect period has elapsed, the player is required to execute the fixed effect. If the game in the advantageous game state is continued after the elapse of the period, the effect can always be confirmed by the first effect display. In addition, since the period display indicating the fixed effect period is performed when the number of times of execution of the unit game remains in the number-limited game state, the first effect display is performed after the fixed effect period ends. Can be set to Then, if the specific game start condition is satisfied within the fixed effect period, the second effect display is displayed and the effect display in which the predetermined character moves is executed. Thus, a display condition such as displaying a predetermined character can be presented, and the player can be provided with a game property in which a special game state occurs when the display condition is satisfied. Therefore, after the period display is displayed, it is possible to always generate an opportunity for the player to visually recognize the effect display in which the predetermined character is operated, and for the player to be dissatisfied with the effect of the effect contents. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a situation in which the player holds the game is reduced and the game is easily continued.

<Feature S1>
The gaming machine according to feature S0,
The period effect display control means performs a plurality of types of period display indicating a fixed effect period having a different period length, and the number of remaining unit games in the number-limited game state is a predetermined number or more. A gaming machine characterized by performing a period display including a period display of a long fixed effect period selected in the case.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature S1, a plurality of types of period display indicating the fixed production periods having different period lengths are performed, and as a part thereof, the unit game is selected when the remaining number of times is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Since the display includes the period display of the long confirmed effect period, it is possible to add a game property for estimating the remaining number of unit games in the number-limited game state by the displayed period display.

  Note that the number of remaining unit games in the number-limited game state is a unit game in which the specific game start condition is not satisfied even if the start condition is satisfied in the number-limited game state, and the variable display is still executed. The number of remaining unit games that have not been played (may not be started or not finished) may be used.

<Feature T0>
A game area (game area) in which game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down,
A plurality of entrances (general prize devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and through which game balls can enter;
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting means (main control board) for giving a predetermined privilege according to the entrance where the game ball entered. 920)
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. Input means (rear setting switch) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any of the plurality of probabilities. 905, initialization switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When predetermined conditions relating to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances are satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. A game machine comprising: a setting output unit (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature T0, the “predetermined conditions regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance” include, for example, one or more predetermined entrances out of a plurality of entrances. That the game ball enters the entrance of the game ball; that the game ball enters the predetermined two or more entrances of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order; A predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined one or more entrances, and are updated in accordance with entry into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances. The predetermined condition is satisfied for the entry number information or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the entry number information. During a predetermined game period, a predetermined one of a plurality of entrances is determined. Or is the starting condition based on the entry of the game ball into two or more entrances satisfied? Be previously predetermined time period which is determined is passed, a new starting condition is that the status is not established to a predetermined number of occurrences of predetermined, and the like.

<Feature U0>
A game area (game area) in which game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down,
A plurality of entrances (general prize devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and through which game balls can enter;
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting means (main control board) for giving a predetermined privilege according to the entrance where the game ball entered. 920)
A setting storage unit (main control board 920) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. RAM)
An input means for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, initialization Switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into the predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied; And a setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting the same.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machines described in the feature T0 and the feature U0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to a probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  A plurality of entrances into which the game balls can enter are provided in a game area where the game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down, and a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances is provided. When a game ball enters the game, a predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance into which the game ball has entered is provided by the privilege providing means. When a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage is output by the setting output. Is done. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the gaming property of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during the game through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for a player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  In particular, in the gaming machine described in the feature U0, when a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances is satisfied, the game is stored in the setting storage means. Since the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means, the player can determine in advance the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery. Can be obtained as a privilege of having a game ball enter the entrance. Therefore, the player can play a game while enjoying the game ball entering a predetermined entrance.

<Feature U1>
The gaming machine according to feature U0,
The setting output means may include, as at least a part of the predetermined condition, a game ball entering a predetermined two or more of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order. A game machine that outputs the setting output information on condition that:

  In the gaming machine described in the feature U1, a predetermined condition (that is, a case where the gaming ball enters at least two or more predetermined entrances of the plurality of entrances in a predetermined order). Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means that at least a part of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance of the plurality of entrances is satisfied. Is output by the setting output means. As a result, the player sets the lottery probability at which a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery as a privilege in which game balls enter the predetermined two or more entrances in a predetermined sequence. It is possible to enjoy the gaming property of obtaining information corresponding to the probability of being played. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls enter two or more predetermined entrances in a predetermined order.

<Feature V0>
Firing means (firing device 330) for firing a game ball;
A game area (game area) in which game balls fired by the firing means and entered from a predetermined entrance flow down;
A ball entrance (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can enter;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the entrance;
Setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery in a game. ) And input means capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any of the plurality of probabilities (back setting switch 905, Initialization switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
An entry number storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing entry number information (general winning number) updated according to entry of a game ball into the entry opening;
A predetermined condition including at least a condition satisfied corresponding to the number-of-entries information stored in the number-of-entries storage means or corresponding information (a nail state level) counted corresponding to the number-of-entries information is satisfied. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. .

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature V0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. You. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to information corresponding to a probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input unit.

  In the game area where the game balls that have been fired by the firing means and entered from a predetermined entrance flow down, there is provided an entrance where game balls can enter, and when the game ball enters the entrance, , A predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance is provided by the privilege providing means. When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability at which the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add the gaming property of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during the game through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for a player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  The entry number storage means stores entry number information updated in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the entrance. The setting corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied for the number-of-entries information stored in the number-of-entries storage means or the corresponding information counted corresponding to the number-of-entry information. The output information is output by the setting output means. Since the number-of-entry information and the correspondence information are information reflecting the state of entry of the game ball into the entrance, a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery according to the state of entry of the game ball into the entrance. It is possible to output information corresponding to the currently set probability as the lottery probability to be performed.

  Thereby, for example, when the predetermined condition is a value indicating that the performance of the gaming machine may not be as designed according to the entry number information and the corresponding information regarding the entry of the game ball into the entrance, It is possible to indicate that there is a possibility of suffering disadvantages, and to make use of the information output by the setting output means to make the player determine whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine being played. It becomes possible.

<Feature X0>
A display unit (decorative design display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a special game state;
Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control Input means (back side) for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities; A setting switch 905, an initialization switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
During a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period has elapsed since the start condition was satisfied, a predetermined condition including a case where the new start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times has been satisfied. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. .

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature X0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery. The information can be suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add the gaming property of estimating the probability information about the gaming machine during the game through the establishment of the predetermined condition including the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for a player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  Also, during a predetermined game period, even if a predetermined first period has elapsed after the start condition has been satisfied, if a situation in which the new start condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times, the condition is stored in the setting storage means. The setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means. A situation in which a new starting condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period elapses after the starting condition is satisfied is an undesirable situation for a player, and is compared with a case where a player plays a game in another gaming machine. May be disadvantaged. On the other hand, in this situation, it is possible to make the player determine whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game by utilizing the information output by the setting output unit.

  Note that, in place of the description of the setting output means in the gaming machine described in the feature X0, when a predetermined condition including a game ball entering a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, And setting output means for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means.

<Feature Y0>
A display unit (decorative design display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the predetermined lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a special game state;
Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control Input means (back side) for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities; A setting switch 905, an initialization switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
At least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery is satisfied to when stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by the variation executing unit. Effect selection means (main control board 920, sub-controller 920) for selecting an effect of an effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means from among a plurality of effects with different effect times. Control board 940);
An effect display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying an effect selected by the effect selecting means on the display unit.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the playability of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability at which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages. On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature Y0 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  Out of a plurality of types of effects with different effect times, the effect of the effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is selected by the effect selecting means, and the starting condition under which the first result is obtained in a predetermined lottery is determined. It is selected as an effect composed of at least a part of the period from the establishment to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, and the effect is displayed on the display unit by the effect display control means. You.

  Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is the predetermined probability. Of at least a part of the period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery is established to when the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by the variation executing means. Is reflected in the production time. Therefore, the player can estimate the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery from the production time of the effect. Can be added. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to pay attention to the length of the production time in order to estimate the probability information. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a lottery transition of a gaming state, the number of objects to be focused can be increased, so that the gaming performance in a gaming machine utilizing the flow of gaming balls can be improved.

<Feature Y1>
The gaming machine according to feature Y0,
The effect selecting means selects an effect with a probability that the effect with the longest effect time among the plurality of effects is likely to be executed, with respect to the probability that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of probabilities. A gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature Y1, the probability that the effect with the longest effect time among the plurality of effects is likely to be executed is selected with respect to the probability that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of settable probabilities. Therefore, the player can expect that the most advantageous probability is set when the effect is performed for a long time.

<Feature Y2>
The gaming machine according to feature Y0 or feature Y1,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player is provided,
The effect selected by the effect selecting means is such that after the start condition, in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery, is satisfied, the change execution means sets the identification information corresponding to the first result. A special effect that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at a predetermined operation time set within an executable period of an effect configured at least partially in a period until the stop display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

If it is a gaming machine described in the feature Y2,
An effect composed of at least a part of a period from when a start condition in which a first result is obtained by a predetermined lottery is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by a variable execution unit. The operation time is set within the executable period of the operation. The effect selected by the effect selecting means is a special effect executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at the operation time. Therefore, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit at the operation time, and determines a lottery probability or a first lottery at which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery from the effect time of the special effect performed based on the operation. The probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be estimated.

<Feature Z0>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display section variably displays the identification information, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery section. 940)
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variable execution means stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal game state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a special game state;
Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a probability set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control Input means (back side) for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities; A setting switch 905, an initialization switch 907),
Setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Control execution means (main control board 920, sub-control, main control board 920) for executing control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when predetermined conditions including conditions that can be satisfied during the special game state are satisfied. A substrate 940).

  2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player in a plurality of stages. In a conventional typical gaming machine having such a function, a manager of a game arcade or the like can change a setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming performance of a gaming machine in which a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state shift lottery, can be set in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature Z0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming performance. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability at which a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result at a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. The probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined result in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage unit to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input unit. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined condition including a condition that can be satisfied during the special game state is satisfied, control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is executed by the control execution unit. Therefore, based on the content appearing under the control of the control execution means, the player stores the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, in the lottery probability at which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or in the second lottery. It is possible to add a gaming property for estimating a probability currently set as a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined result. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for one's own taste or a different gaming machine, the estimated probability information is one of the selection factors of whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature Z0, it is preferable that the condition that can be satisfied in the special game state include an entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance in the special game state. In order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to establish a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. it can. For this reason, in a gaming machine which tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a transition lottery of a game state, it is possible to increase a chance to pay attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance, and a predetermined entry. It is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine utilizing the flow of a game ball, for example, by diversifying the game by setting the number of ball openings, setting the number, and the like.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature Z0, an operation unit different from an operation unit that performs a firing operation of a player firing a game ball in a game area during the special game state is set as a condition that can be satisfied during the special game state. It is preferable to set conditions that can be satisfied by the operation for. In this way, during the special game state, it is possible to add a playability in which attention is paid to an operation different from the firing operation, and it is possible to not only continue the firing operation but also add another operation to the It is possible to add new playability that enables information to be acquired.

<Feature α0>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Firing means (firing device 330) for firing a game ball;
A starting opening (a winning opening of the middle starting winning device 431, a winning opening of the right starting winning device 432) that satisfies a starting condition when a game ball fired by the firing means enters;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
Of the lottery results, a lottery result in which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing means is suspended is held in a predetermined holding storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Means (main control board 920);
When the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, a predetermined first probability (winning probability in a hold full tank effect lottery) is set to a predetermined probability in a predetermined first period. Special effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing a special effect,
The special effect execution means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit, and is the same as the end time of the first period or the end time of the first period A game extending means for extending an end time of the first period when a predetermined extension condition is satisfied earlier in a predetermined second period reaching an end time. Machine.

  Note that the predetermined extension condition may be a condition that can be satisfied by a game ball fired by the firing means, or may be a condition that can be satisfied by a game ball fired by the firing means, For example, the execution of a part of the effect determined to be executed in the variable display whose execution has already been suspended (for example, the appearance of a specific character) may be established as the extension condition. You may make it hold.

<Feature α1>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Firing means (firing device 330) for firing a game ball;
A starting opening (a winning opening of the middle starting winning device 431, a winning opening of the right starting winning device 432) that satisfies a starting condition when a game ball fired by the firing means enters;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. (Main control board 920),
Of the lottery results, a lottery result in which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing means is suspended is held in a predetermined holding storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Means (main control board 920);
When the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, a predetermined first probability (winning probability in a hold full tank effect lottery) is set to a predetermined probability in a predetermined first period. Special effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing a special effect,
The special effect execution means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit, and is the same as the end time of the first period or the end time of the first period If a predetermined extension condition that can be satisfied by the game ball fired by the firing means is satisfied earlier (within a predetermined second period reaching the end time) (the number of times of holding increases by one and the predetermined A game machine comprising a period extending means for extending an end time of the first period in a case where an effect extension lottery to be won with two probabilities is won).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result on hold. For example, if the number of lottery results stored reaches the upper limit value, even if a game ball subsequently enters the starting port, the lottery result for that ball will not be stored and will be wasted, Before the number of pending memories reaches the upper limit, the firing of the game balls is stopped, so that the consumption of the game balls may be small and the operation may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature α1, it is possible to suitably execute the effect in the gaming machine capable of holding the lottery result on hold. In other words, when the starting condition is satisfied by the game ball fired by the firing means entering the starting port, the fluctuation execution means displays the symbol variation on the display unit, and then the lottery result by the lottery means. Is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variation display of the symbols by the variation executing means are suspended are stored in a prescribed storage unit up to a predetermined number by the reserve storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit in a predetermined first period at a predetermined first probability. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit. Thereby, the player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the hold storage unit by the hold storage unit can be improved.

  Here, as a period after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, a predetermined time when the end time is reached at the same time as the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period Is provided, and within the second period, when predetermined conditions are satisfied by the game balls fired by the firing means, the end time of the first period is extended by the time extending means. It is configured as follows.

  Thereby, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special effect when the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, the player fires a game ball during the first period in which the special effect can appear. By doing so, it is possible to add extendable gaming properties.

  The "special effect" in the gaming machine described in the features α0 and α1 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by operation of an operable structure. Alternatively, the effect may be a combination of some or all of these effects. Further, the special effect may be an effect performed only during the first period, or an effect in which the probability of being executed in the first period is higher than before and after the start of the first period. Is also good. Further, the period extending means may extend the first period and the second period. Further, the second period may be a fixed period that is not extended even if the first period is extended by the period extending unit, or may be a variable period that is extended when the first period is extended by the period extending unit. Period.

<Feature α2>
A gaming machine according to feature α0 or α1,
The special effect execution means,
During the first period, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result in which the symbols are stopped and displayed by the change execution unit, the lottery result indicating the first result is not included. In some cases, a predetermined effect that is not executed may be executed as the special effect,
The period extension unit executes, as the predetermined condition, a symbol change display by the change execution unit within the second period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. A game machine that extends the end time of the first period with the second predetermined probability when a lottery result for which the reservation is suspended is newly stored in the suspension storage unit.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature α2, when the lottery result stored in the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result by the holding storage unit, the lottery stored in the holding storage unit is used. A predetermined effect which is not executed when the result does not include the lottery result indicating the first result is at least executed as a special effect.

  Then, as a period after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit has reached the upper limit, the second time when the end time reaches the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period When a predetermined second period is provided, and during the second period, a lottery result in which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing means is suspended as a predetermined condition is newly stored in the suspension storage unit Is configured to extend the end time of the first period.

  Therefore, in the situation where the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit has reached the upper limit, even if the lottery result does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, the lottery result must be within the second period. In the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is newly stored in the hold storage unit, the predetermined effect is executed as a special effect, so that it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to visually recognize the predetermined effect, Dissatisfaction with not being able to see the predetermined effect can be suppressed.

<Feature β0>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then stops and displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery as a stop symbol. 940)
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. Game control means (main control board 920)
Of the lottery results of the predetermined lottery, the lottery results of which the execution of the symbol display by the variable execution means is suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit (the RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Possible holding storage means (main control board 920);
Predetermined setting information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a probability set as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery An information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least
One of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery Input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting the setting information corresponding to the probability;
A setting information storage unit (main control board 920) for storing the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information in the information storage unit when the operation information is input by the input unit;
When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition, setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit is output with a predetermined probability. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940).

  The predetermined condition for the feature β1 is not limited to the case where the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit has reached the upper limit, but also the case where the number of times the special symbol is held has increased from three to four, Select whether or not to output setting suggestion information triggered by the satisfaction of a condition for another number of suspensions, such as when the suspension occurs once during suspension and only once for a moment when the variable display is started thereafter. Then, the setting suggestion information may be displayed, and any one condition may be satisfied, or two or more conditions may be satisfied.

<Feature β1>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then stops and displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery as a stop symbol. 940)
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. Game control means (main control board 920)
Of the lottery results of the predetermined lottery, the lottery results of which the execution of the symbol display by the variable execution means is suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit (the RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Possible holding storage means (main control board 920);
Predetermined setting information corresponding to a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a probability set as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery An information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least
One of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery Input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting the setting information corresponding to the probability;
A setting information storage unit (main control board 920) for storing the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information in the information storage unit when the operation information is input by the input unit;
A setting to output setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches an upper limit; A gaming machine comprising output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball enters the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entry, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed. Also, in a conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbol is being changed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result on hold.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature β0, it is possible to suitably execute the effect in the gaming machine capable of holding the lottery result on hold. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  The information storage unit stores a predetermined lottery probability corresponding to a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a probability set as a lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. At least can be stored. Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result that is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, one probability is set. When the operation information corresponding to the operation of selecting the corresponding setting information is input by the input unit, the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is stored in the information storage unit by the setting information storage unit. Is stored. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be set to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  Further, among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the symbol change display by the change execution means is suspended are configured to be memorable in a predetermined hold storage unit up to a predetermined number by the reserve storage means. . When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, the setting output unit outputs setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit with a predetermined probability. You.

  Thereby, the setting information stored in the information storage unit, that is, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery in which the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery Information corresponding to the probability currently set as the probability can be suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means.

  Therefore, by increasing the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit until the number reaches the upper limit, it is possible to add a gaming property for estimating setting information about a gaming machine being played. For example, considering whether the gaming machine is suitable for the user's own taste or a different gaming machine, the setting information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or to move to another gaming machine. Can be used, so that the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature β1>
The gaming machine according to feature β0,
The setting output unit, when the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, the setting information stored in the information storage unit, the plurality of probabilities of the A gaming machine characterized in that when the setting information corresponds to at least one of the highest probability and the lowest probability, setting output information corresponding to the setting information is output at a predetermined probability.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature β1, when the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit, the setting information stored in the information storage unit is changed to the first result by a predetermined lottery. Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that is selected or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, at least one of the highest probability or the lowest probability If the setting information corresponds to the setting information, the setting output unit outputs the setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage unit with a predetermined probability.

  Therefore, the setting output means determines that the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game or the highest probability or the lowest probability is set as the predetermined lottery result in the second lottery. The player can be guessed based on the output setting output information. This allows the player to make various selections for continuing the game, such as whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played or move to another gaming machine, based on the output setting output information. In addition, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming performance of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

  Note that at least one feature described in Features 10 to β1 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of features. Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on operation of the launch operation means, a passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a game area; wherein a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Spindle-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

100 gaming machine, 261 pressing operation device, 263 selection operation device, 479 decoration device display device, 710 reel device, 711L left reel, 711M middle reel, 711R right reel, 712 main design, 713B .., A second control symbol, 730, a lottery result display device, 920, a main control board, 940, a sub control board, 401, a base, 701, a base, 702, a side wall, 715, a resin cover, 715A, an outer cover, 715A1. Bending part, 715B ... Light guide plate, 715B1 ... Bending part, 715B4, 715B5 ... End face, 717A ... Reel side lamp, 720 ... Retention lamp, 741,742,743 ... Picture, 753 ... Information display part, 761A, 761B ... Half mirror , 771 ... wave lamp, 781, 782, 783 ... gear, 1441A, 1441B ... start winning switch, 1 10 entrance, 1612 guide passage, 1613A, 1613B first passage, 1614A, 1614B second passage, 1631 first rear side, second rear side, 1631A, 1631B passage wall, 811 Members, 812, 813: Light source unit, 824, 834: Light emitting means, 892, 893: Protrusion, 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B: Through holes, 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B ... Projection, 842A, 842B, 852A, 852B ... through-hole, 861A, 861B, 862A, 862B ... through-hole, D1, D2 ... area, Z ... recess Z1, Z2, Z3 ... side, C1 ... left end of side Z1, C2 ... Right end of side Z1, 1701 first reel, 1702 second reel, 1711 drive solenoid, 1 31 ... Drive solenoid, 1751 ... Light guide plate, 1761 ... Picture, 1771 ... Light guide plate, 1781 ... Picture, 1772 ... Light guide plate support, 1773 ... Gear, 1810 ... Suspension count display area, 1811 ... Suspension scheduled icon, 1812 ... Suspension Icon, 1820: Stand status icon display area, 1821: Stand status icon, 2439A, 2439B: General winning device, 905: Rear setting switch, 907: Initialization switch

Claims (2)

A display unit capable of displaying symbols,
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A starting port that satisfies a starting condition when a game ball fired by the firing means enters,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit performs a variable display of the symbol, and then performs a variable execution unit that performs a stop display with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. When,
Among the lottery results, a lottery result in which the execution of the variation display of the symbol by the variation execution means is suspended, a holding storage means that can be stored in a predetermined holding storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
A special effect execution means for executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined first period at a predetermined first probability when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit by the reservation storage unit reaches an upper limit; ,
The special effect execution means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit, and is the same as the end time of the first period or the end time of the first period If a predetermined extension condition that can be satisfied by the game ball fired by the firing means is satisfied earlier within a predetermined second period reaching the end time, the end time of the first period is extended. A gaming machine comprising a period extending means.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.